Справочник технических параметров

Справочник технических параметров
00-1
GROUP 00
GENERAL
CONTENTS
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL. . . . . .
00-2
BODY DIMENSIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
00-6
ACTIVE SAFETY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
00-7
PASSIVE SAFETY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
00-7
TARGETS OF DEVELOPMENT . . . .
00-2
COMFORTABLE EQUIPMENTS . . . . . . . .
00-7
PRODUCT FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . .
00-2
ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION . . . . . . .
00-8
TECHNICAL FEATURES. . . . . . . . . .
00-3
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION . . . . . . . .
00-9
EXTERIOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
00-3
MODELS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
00-9
INTERIOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
00-4
MAJOR SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . .
00-10
GENERAL
00-2
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
M2000029001698
MODEL INDICATIONS
The following abbreviations are used in this manual
for identification of model types.
2000:Indicates models equipped with the 1,998 mL
<4B11> petrol engine.
2400:Indicates models equipped with the 2,360 mL
<4B12> petrol engine.
2WD:Indicates the 2-wheel drive vehicles.
4WD:Indicates the 4-wheel drive vehicles.
A/C:Indicates the air conditioner.
CVT: Indicates the continuously variable transmission.
DOHC: Indicates an engine with the double overhead camshaft.
INVECS:Indicates the intelligent and innovative vehicles electronic control system.
MIVEC:Indicates the Mitsubishi innovative valve timing electronic control system.
MPI:Indicates the multipoint injection.
TARGETS OF DEVELOPMENT
M2000004002285
While the worldwide sluggish car demand is
expected to increase in the future, the demand for a
compact size Sport Utility Vehicle (SUV) is expanding
drastically and stably. The middle size SUV has
accounted for 40% of the whole SUV market. Furthermore, emerging markets are also expected to
expand drastically. By considering these market
trends, Mitsubishi Motors launches "NEW OUTLANDER", which leads with its innovations in the
areas of fuel consumption and environmental protection (low CO2 emission level), in all the markets
(including major advanced and emerging countries).
CONCEPT KEYWORD: Well balanced
ECO SUV
• Best-in-class fuel consumption and eco-friendliness
• New Outlander has derived positive-rated points
from the predecessor, and boasts of high-level
eco-friendliness.
• Negative-rated points such as equipment (navigation system, etc.) and interior quality have
been improved.
• Various advanced equipment and systems have
been added.
PRODUCT FEATURES
M2000005001199
EVOLVED ORTHODOXY SUV
Fuel economy
Space & utility
Evolved Orthodoxy SUV
Performance
Easy drive
ACC00018
FUEL ECONOMY
Improved fuel consumption
Best-in-class fuel consumption
GENERAL
TECHNICAL FEATURES
• Low aerodynamic drag coefficient (7% reduction compared to the predecessor)
• Light weight (85 kg reduction on average
compared to the predecessor)
• Newly-developed engine adopted for all models
PERFORMANCE
Advanced electronic-controlled 4WD
• Manual 2WD/4WD changeover has been abolished. A brand-new system switches the drive
train mode from "4WD ECO" (2WD) to "4WD
AUTO" (and vice versa) automatically, depending
on road condition.
• The mode switch has been changed from rotary
type to push type.
00-3
EASY DRIVE
Vehicle silhouette has been derived from the
predecessor.
Vehicle dimensions are roughly the same as the
predecessor.
Improved front vision
Improved front vision
• Reduced cross-section of A pillar
• Clearance around the outside rear view mirror
V-shaped area widened
• Lowered wiper blade rest position
SPACE AND UTILITY
Wide luggage compartment space
• The rear seat folding mechanism has been modified in order to widen the luggage compartment
space (239 mm longer than the predecessor).
• Stowed tonneau cover
TECHNICAL FEATURES
EXTERIOR
M2000017001862
DESIGN FEATURES
"Eco-friendliness appealing design" as the world
leading car
• Unique form satisfying aerodynamic requirements
• Excellent quality in surface treatment as well as
weight reduction in sheet metal
GENERAL
00-4
TECHNICAL FEATURES
MAIN FEATURES
ACB05806
3
7
2, 4, 5, 6
3
3
1
2, 4, 5, 6
3
ACC00047AB
1. A wide and stable SUV-face boasting of an
emblem and a trapezoid grille, which are used to
echo Mitsubishi Sport Utility Vehicle (SUV) heritage.
2. Boxy silhouette conveying excellent practicality
and the exclusivity of a premium-class SUV.
3. Fine-tuned roof silhouette, rearward narrowed-down cabin form, aerodynamic form
offered by front and rear edge treatments.
4. Body form realising weight saving without any
compromise to rigidity by adopting optimum
cross-sectional area.
5. Longitudinal streamlined body silhouette
enhances this car's main characteristics, thus
offering grand image
6. A practical as well as dynamic body form adopting a wedged shape in belt line and side character line.
7. Grand, wide and vivid image by locating an
emblem in higher position
INTERIOR
M2000018002095
DESIGN FEATURES
"Quality design" enhancing grand presence
• Grand presence enhancing premium image and
reliability
• Surface quality offering generous and
wrap-around feeling
• Effectively and clearly assigned decorations and
accents
GENERAL
00-5
TECHNICAL FEATURES
MAIN FEATURES
2
2
1
3
3
1. Instrument panel
• Clear and simple form due to reduced separations
• Luxurious soft pads attached around the
upper part, thus improving the sense of touch
• Ergonomic layout where controls are
arranged at the centre of the dash board and
face towards the driver
• Glazed black finish on the centre panel offering advanced image
• Large premium-class decorations, which feature sporty silver carbon or eucalyptus wood
(optional), are arranged optimally in the vicinity of front passenger.
ACC00045AB
2. Door trim
• Soft pad attached on the front door trim, thus
improving the sense of touch
• Large decorations are arranged at the front,
which underline spaciousness and horizontal
contours, thus improving appearance.
• Dynamic-shaped fabric insert adhered on horizontal-contoured trim
3. Front seat and rear seat
• Simple and premium form featuring moderate
character
• Double-stitch seam on leather seat (optional)
underling premium image
GENERAL
00-6
TECHNICAL FEATURES
BODY DIMENSIONS
M2000000400445
COMFORT
9
10
12
11
5
6
2
3
8
4
7
1
13
ACC00013AB
No.
Item
Dimension mm
1
Overall length
4,655
2
Front overhang
955
3
Wheelbase
2,670
4
Rear overhang
1,030
5
Overall height (unladen)
1,680
6
Ground clearance (unladen)
215
7
Overall width
1,800
8
Front track
1,540
Rear track
1,540
9
Front leg space
870
10
Rear leg space
875
11
Head room
12
13
Cargo room length
Front seat
928
Rear seat
872
1,685
GENERAL
00-7
TECHNICAL FEATURES
AERODYNAMICS
2
1
3
4
4
Rear under cover
Front under cover
ACC00050 AB
New OUTLANDER achieved a drag coefficient of CD
(Coefficient of drag), 7% reduction as compared to
the current model, by using the cutting-edge computer simulation technology and with the numerous
wind tunnel experiments. Optimized body form of
bumper side, roof, C-pillar and effective aerodynamic
items such as air dams, under covers, rear spoiler
also reduce aerodynamic drag and lift force.
1. Optimized bumper makes the side flow very
smooth.
2. Tapered body shape makes the wake stable and
small.
3. Stream-lined roof shape is even more optimized.
4. Air resistance is reduced by optimally arranged
aerodynamic items such as air dams, under covers.
These items reduce front and rear lift force, too.
• S-HID headlamp (Super wide High Intensity Discharge headlamp)
• Security alarm
PASSIVE SAFETY
M2000032001654
The following safety equipment/systems are used:
• RISE Body (Reinforced Impact Safety Evolution
body)
• Driver's and front passenger's SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) air bag
• Curtain air bag and Side-airbag
• Driver's knee air bags
• Front seat belt retractor with pre-tensioner and
force-limiter function.
• Three-point rear seat belt with ELR/ALR (child
seat fixing mechanism)
• Immobilizer function
COMFORTABLE EQUIPMENTS
ACTIVE SAFETY
M2000031001598
The following safety equipment/systems are used:
• ABS (Anti-skid Braking System) with EBD (Electronic Brake-force Distribution)
• ASC (Active Stability Control system)
• Hill start assist system
• ESS (Emergency Stop signal System)
M2000026000953
STEERING SYSTEM WITH TILT AND TELESCOPIC MECHANISMS
The tilt and telescopic mechanisms allow the driver
to adjust the steering wheel position precisely
depending on his/her wish and body size.
GENERAL
00-8
TECHNICAL FEATURES
KEYLESS OPERATION SYSTEM (KOS)
The door entry function has been employed, that
enables the driver to lock or unlock all the doors
(including tailgate) without taking the key out from
his/her pocket or bag by operating the lock/unlock
switches on the front door <Driver's side> or tailgate
whenever the driver carries the keyless operation
key with him/her. [Refer to GROUP 42B − Keyless
Operation System (KOS) ]
ONE-TOUCH START SYSTEM (OSS)
For vehicles equipped with the keyless operation
system (KOS), the push-type engine start switch has
been employed. [Refer to GROUP 42B − One-touch
Start System (OSS) ]
MULTI-INFORMATION DISPLAY
<Standard meter>
Multi-information display
ACC00056AB
<High contrast meter>
can be switched by operating the multi-information
meter switch. Also, the displayed language or unit on
the multi-information display can be changed from
the function setting screen. (Refer to GROUP 54A −
Combination Meter )
AUDIO AND NAVIGATION SYSTEM
A NEW GENERATION WIDE 2-DIN CD OUDIO
• A "Wide 2-DIN" size system has been
adopted.
• Piano black paint and chrome decorations
offer premium image.
• Supports USB/iPod control functions
Newly developed DISPLAY AUDIO
• Piano black paint and chrome decorations
offer premium image.
• Features 6.1 inch QVGA (Quarter Video
Graphics Array) full-colour display and touch
screen.
• Supports USB/iPod control functions
• Rear view camera image with reference lines
Newly-developed NAVIGATION − Mitsubishi Multi
Communication System (MMCS)
• SD card is used as data storage instead of
HDD.
• High-definition display [VGA (Video Graphics
Array) instead of QVGA (Quarter Video
Graphics Array)]
• Dual display function such as navigation and
AV (Audio Visual)/Vehicle information, etc.
• Supports USB/iPod control functions and SD
audio files
A/C SYSTEM
Multi-information display
ACC00057AB
The multi-information display can display the following items: various warnings, odometer and trip meter,
illumination control, service reminder information,
engine coolant temperature, remaining fuel amount,
selector lever position, average and instantaneous
fuel consumption, possible cruising distance, average vehicle speed, and others. Displayed contents
There are two modes for the air conditioner system
(same as the predecessor); full auto A/C and dual
zone A/C.
The "dual zone A/C" mode allows separate stratification control selections for the right and left outlets,
depending on individual passenger's wishes (Refer
to GROUP 55 − Heater, Air Conditioner and Ventilation ).
ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION
M2000027000945
Mitsubishi Motors Corporation has given careful consideration to protection of natural resources and the
environment. Environmentally friendly features are
shown below.
Classification
Parts Name
Features
Adoption of easy
recycling material
Bumper, Radiator grille, Instrument panel, Adoption of thermoplastic resin
Interior door trims
GENERAL
00-9
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION
Classification
Parts Name
Features
Expansion of recycled
material
Bumper, Radiator grille, Instrument panel, Re-use of material discarded in plant
Interior door trims
Sound absorbing materials in dash panel
and headlining, Oil level gauge
Reduction of
Fuel tank, Radiator, Heater core, Balance
hazardous substances weight for wheel, Glass ceramics print,
Electrode position paint, bearing metal,
valve sheet
Discharge headlight, combination meter,
Navigation system
Re-use of discarded material in other
industry
Adoption of lead free material
Adoption of mercury free material
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION
MODELS
M2000001101495
VEHICLES FOR RUSSIA (EASTERN EUROPE COUNTRIES)
<2000>
Model code
GF2W
XTSHL6Z
Seating
capacity
Engine model
Transmission model
Fuel supply
system
5-persons
4B11 (1,998 mL)
DOHC MIVEC
petrol engine
F1CJA (Front wheel drive 2WD,
INVECS-III CVT with sport mode)
MPI
Seating
capacity
Engine model
Transmission model
Fuel supply
system
5-persons
4B12 (2,360 mL)
DOHC MIVEC
petrol engine
W1CJA (Electronic control 4WD,
INVECS-III CVT with sport mode)
MPI
XTSHZL6Z
<2400>
Model code
GF3W
XTHHZL6Z
W1CJA (Electronic control 4WD,
INVECS-III CVT with sport mode)
MODEL CODE
1
2 3
4 5 6 7 8 9
No. Item
Content
1
Development
GF
OUTLANDER
2
Engine type
2
2.0L MPI (4B11)
3
2.4L MPI (4B12)
3
Vehicle type
W
Station wagon
4
Body style
X
4-door with tailgate
5
Transmission type
T
CVT
10
ACB04331AB
GENERAL
00-10
MAJOR SPECIFICATIONS
No. Item
Content
6
S
INFORM <2000 − 2WD>
H
INVITE <2000 − 4WD>, INSTYLE <2400>
Trim level (Price class)
7
Engine specification
H
MIVEC (DOHC)
8
Special feature
None
2WD
Z
4WD
9
Steering wheel location
L
Left hand
10
Destination
6Z
Vehicles for Russia
MAJOR SPECIFICATIONS
M2000030003256
8
1
2
3
7
4
6
9
5
ACB04339AB
<2000>
Item
INTENSE
GF2W
XTSHL6Z
Vehicle
Front track
dimension mm Overall width
XTSHZL6Z
1 1,540
1,540
2 1,800
1,800
Front overhang
3 955
955
Wheelbase
4 2,670
2,670
Rear overhang
5 1,030
1,030
Overall length
6 4,655
4,655
Ground clearance (unladen)
7 215
215
Overall height (unladen)
8 1,680
1,680
Rear track
9 1,540
1,540
Without full optional parts 1,415
1,480
With full optional parts
1,484
1,559
Gross vehicle weight
1,985
1,985
Gross axle weight rating-front
1,150
1,150
Gross axle weight rating-rear
1,250
1,250
Gross combination weight
3,665
3,665
5
5
Vehicle weight Kerb weight
kg
Seating capacity
GENERAL
00-11
MAJOR SPECIFICATIONS
Item
INTENSE
GF2W
XTSHL6Z
XTSHZL6Z
Model No.
4B11
4B11
Type
DOHC MIVEC
DOHC MIVEC
Total displacement mL
1,998
1,998
Max. output <EEC> kW/rpm
107/6,000
107/6,000
Max. torque <EEC> N⋅m/rpm
196/4,200
196/4,200
Fuel system
Fuel supply system
MPI
MPI
Transmission
Model code
F1CJA
W1CJA
Type
Front wheel drive 2WD, Electronic control 4WD,
INVECS-III CVT with
INVECS-III CVT with
sport mode
sport mode
Engine
Turning radius Body
m
Wheel
<2400>
Item
5.73
5.73
5.3
5.3
INSTYLE
GF3W
XTHHZL6Z
Vehicle
Front track
dimension mm Overall width
1 1,540
2 1,800
Front overhang
3 955
Wheelbase
4 2,670
Rear overhang
5 1,030
Overall length
6 4,655
Ground clearance (unladen)
7 215
Overall height (unladen)
8 1,680
Rear track
9 1,680
Vehicle weight Kerb weight
kg
Without full optional parts 1,495
With full optional parts
1,569
Gross vehicle weight
2,210
Gross axle weight rating-front
1,150
Gross axle weight rating-rear
1,250
Gross combination weight
3,890
Seating capacity
5
Engine
Model No.
4B12
Type
DOHC MIVEC
Total displacement mL
2,360
Max. output <EEC> kW/rpm
123/6,000
Max. torque <EEC> N⋅m/rpm
222/4,100
Fuel supply system
MPI
Fuel system
GENERAL
00-12
MAJOR SPECIFICATIONS
Item
INSTYLE
GF3W
XTHHZL6Z
Transmission
Model code
W1CJA
Type
Electronic control 4WD, INVECS-III CVT with
sport mode
Turning radius Body
m
Wheel
5.73
5.3
11-1
GROUP 11
ENGINE
MECHANICAL
CONTENTS
GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . .
11-2
BASE ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-3
ENGINE MECHANICAL
11-2
GENERAL INFORMATION
GENERAL INFORMATION
Two types of engines are available; 4B11 (1,998 cc)
and 4B12 (2,360 cc).
These engines have adopted the following features:
• MIVEC (Mitsubishi Innovative Valve timing Electronic Control system) for the intake valves
•
•
•
•
M2112000102444
Cylinder block made of an aluminium alloy
Valve train with direct-acting valve tappets
Silent timing chain
Unit type balancer<4B12>
MAIN SPECIFICATIONS
Item
Specification
Engine model
4B11
4B12
Total displacement cc
1,998
2,360
Bore × stroke mm
86 × 86
88 × 97
Compression ratio
10.0
10.5
Combustion chamber
Pentroof type
Intake opening
28° BTDC − 3° BTDC
40° BTDC − 0° BTDC
Intake closing
45° ABDC − 20° ABDC
64° ABDC − 24° ABDC
Exhaust opening
BBDC 39°
BBDC 39°
Exhaust closing
ATDC 5°
ATDC 5°
Maximum output (EEC net) kW / r/min
107 / 6,000
123 / 6,000
Maximum torque (EEC net) N⋅m / r/min
196 / 4,200
222 / 4,100
Fuel injection system
Electronically controlled multipoint fuel injection
Ignition system
Electronically controlled 4-coil
Valve timing
ENGINE MECHANICAL
11-3
BASE ENGINE
BASE ENGINE
M2112001002194
CYLINDER HEAD RELATION
Cylinder head cover
PCV valve
Front camshaft
bearing cap
Valve guide
Camshaft bearing cap
Cylinder head
Camshaft
bearing
Camshaft position
sensor
Valve seat
Cylinder head gasket
Oil feeder control valve
Oil hole
Oil feeder control
valve filter
Water hole
Water hole
AKB00849 AB
1. CYLINDER HEAD COVER
• A Plastic cylinder head cover has been adopted.
2. PCV VALVE
3. FRONT CAMSHAFT BEARING CAP
• On each camshaft, the thrust load is supported
by No. 4 bearing. The No. 1 bearings for the
intake and exhaust camshafts have a common
bearing cap.
4. CAMSHAFT BEARING CAP
• Each of the intake and exhaust camshafts is supported by five bearings.
5. CAMSHAFT BEARING
6. OIL FEEDER CONTROL VALVE
7. OIL FEEDER CONTROL VALVE FILTER
8. CYLINDER HEAD
• The cylinder head is made of aluminium alloy,
which is lightweight and has an excellent cooling
efficiency. The intake and exhaust ports are
arranged in a cross-flow construction. Each cylinder has a pair of intake ports on one side and a
pair of exhaust ports on the other side.
9. CYLINDER HEAD GASKET
• A dual-layer, metal type cylinder head gasket that
excels in heat resistance and sealing performance has been adopted.
10.VALVE GUIDE
• Valve guides that are common to both the inlet
and exhaust have been adopted.
11.VALVE SEAT
• Sintered alloy valve seats have been adopted.
12.CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR
ENGINE MECHANICAL
11-4
BASE ENGINE
CYLINDER BLOCK
Crankshaft bearing cap
Cylinder block
Crankshaft oil seal
Ladder frame
AKB00850 AB
A cylinder block made of an aluminium alloy has
been adopted for weight reduction.
Five bearings are provided for the crankshaft journals and the No. 3 bearing sustains the thrust load of
the crankshaft.
The water jacket is the full Siamese type.
1. CYLINDER BLOCK
• The cylinder block is made of lightweight aluminium alloy.
The water jacket is of a full-seamless design.
Item
4B11
4B12
Overall height
mm
230.1
240.1
Bore mm
86
88
Bore pitch mm
96
96
Stroke mm
86
97
2. CRANKSHAFT BEARING CAP
• The crankshaft journal is supported by four bearings. The crankshaft thrust load is supported by
No. 3 bearing.
3. LADDERFRAME
ENGINE MECHANICAL
11-5
BASE ENGINE
PISTON RELATION
Piston ring No.1
Piston ring No.2
Piston ring No.1
Piston
Piston pin
Piston ring No.2
<4B11>
Connecting
rod
<4B12>
Maker mark
Oil ring
Oil ring
Rail
Spacer
Connecting rod bearing
AKB00851AB
1. PISTON
• The pistons are made of a special aluminium
alloy. Their weight has been reduced by lowering
their overall height and increasing the depression
at each end of the piston pin. The piston pin hole
centre is offset 0.8 mm towards the thrust side of
the piston centre. The skirt portion along the
perimeter of the piston is finished with streaks
that excel in oil retention and seizure resistance.
2. PISTON PIN
• The piston pin is of a semi-floating type, press-fitted into the connecting rod small end while capable of floating relative to the piston.
3. CONNECTING ROD
• The connecting rod is made of highly rigid, forged
carbon steel. The rod portion has an H-shaped
cross section. The connecting rod big end bearing is lubricated through an oil passage running
from the main journal to the crankshaft pin.
4. PISTON RING
• Each piston is provided with No. 1 and No. 2
compression rings and an oil ring.
5. CONNECTING ROD BEARING
• The upper and lower connecting rod bearing
halves are identical. The connecting rod bearing
is equipped with back metal. While the bearing
itself is made of aluminium alloy, the back metal
is normally made of steel sheet. The connecting
rod bearing is narrower than the bearing cap, this
is to minimize wear.
ENGINE MECHANICAL
11-6
BASE ENGINE
CRANKSHAFT RELATION
Adapter plate
Thrust bearing
Oil
groove
Upper crankshaft
bearing
Drive plate
Crankshaft
sensing ring
Crankshaft
Crankshaft
sprocket
Crankshaft
pulley
Lower crankshaft
bearing
Balance weight
Crankshaft
sprocket
Oil hole
Balance weight
Crankshaft sensing ring
Crankshaft
Balance weight
AKB00852 AB
1. CRANK SHAFT
• A casted crankshaft is used for the crankshaft.
The crankshaft consists of five main bearings and
eight balance weights. The crankshaft pins are
arranged at 180° intervals. The oil hole supplies
lubrication oil from the journal to the crank pin. A
crankshaft sprocket and an oil pump drive gear
shaft are shrink-fitted onto the front of the crankshaft.
2. CRANKSHAFT BEARING
• The upper crankshaft bearing (with oil groove) is
located on the cylinder block side while the lower
bearing (without oil groove) is held by the bearing
cap.The crankshaft bearing is equipped with back
metal. While the bearing itself is made of aluminium alloy, the back metal is made of steel sheet.
3. THRUST BEARING
• A thrust bearing is installed on both sides of the
No. 3 crankshaft bearing.
4. CRANKSHAFT PULLEY
• The crankshaft pulley is made of cast-iron and
rubber. The pulley has grooves to engage with a
V-ribbed belt (six ribs), which drives an alternator
and a water pump and an A/C compressor. An
ignition timing mark (notch) is stamped on the
flange of the pulley. The crankshaft pulley is
equipped with a torsional damper to minimize the
torsional vibration of the crankshaft as well as
substantially reduce noise and vibration at the
high speed range.
5. CRANKSHAFT SENSING RING
The crankshaft is also fitted with a crankshaft
sensing ring.
6. DRIVE PLATE
• A cast iron ring gear is a shrink fit in the steel
plate of the drive plate. The drive plate is installed
by tightening six bolts.
ENGINE MECHANICAL
11-7
BASE ENGINE
TIMING CHAIN RELATION
Inlet V.V.T. sprocket
Exhaust camshaft sprocket
Timing chain
Tensioner lever
assembly
Timing chain mark
link plate (blue)
Timing mark
Timing chain mark
link plate (blue)
Chain guide
Timing chain
tensioner
Camshaft sprocket
timing mark
V.V.T. sprocket
timing mark
Oil seal
Timing chain
case
Crankshaft sprocket
Timing mark
Timing chain mark
link plate (blue)
AKB00853 AB
1. OIL SEAL
• A front crankshaft oil seal is press-fit into the
case.
2. TIMING CHAIN CASE
• The engine support bracket, the oil pump and the
relief valve are integrated as well as water chamber of the water pump.
3. TIMING CHAIN
• The two camshafts are driven by the timing chain
via the respective sprockets. The timing chain,
consisting of 180 links, is an endless chain, connecting the crankshaft sprocket with the camshaft
and V.V.T. sprockets. The timing chain is
equipped with three mark link plates (blue) to correctly time the two sprockets with each other. The
timing chain is tensioned by the timing chain tensioner, which has a built-in plunger with plunger
springs.
4. TIMING CHAIN TENSIONER
• The plunger in the timing chain tensioner directly
pushes the tension lever, and the pressure automatically adjusts the timing chain tension. A cam
is provided to lock the plunger in place after the
engine stops. This helps prevent the timing chain
from wobbling just after the engine starts. With
the timing chain tensioner installed, do not crank
the engine in the reverse direction. This will force
the plunger to overcome the cam, or even cause
other problems.
5. TENSIOR LEVER ASSEMBLY
6. CHAIN GUIDE ASSEMBLY
7. CAMSHAFT SPROCKET EXHAUST
8. V.V.T. CAMSHAFT SPROCKET
ENGINE MECHANICAL
11-8
BASE ENGINE
VALVE RELATION
Valve tappet
Inlet camshaft
Valve spring
Exhaust camshaft
Valve stem seal
Inlet valve
Exhaust valve
AK502499 AJ
The valve mechanism is based on a 4-valve DOHC
(Double Over Head Camshaft) design having the
camshaft on the upper valve. Each cylinder has two
intake valves and two exhaust valves, arranged in a
V-shape pattern.
Camshaft rotation is transmitted via valve tappets to
the respective valves which open and close accordingly.
1. CAMSHAFT
2. VALVE TAPPET
• Valve tappets are available in 47 thicknesses, at
0.015 mm intervals between 3.000 mm and 3.690
mm, to ensure correct valve clearance.
3. VALVE
• The valves have heat-resistance. The entire
valve surface is treated with nitriding.
4. VALVE STEM SEAL
• The valve stem seals are integrated with the
valve spring seats.
• The valve stem seal portion excels in sealing performance and is equipped with a spring to prevent oil from descending.
5. VALVE SPRING
• The valve spring has a dual pitch spring to prevent surging in the high speed range.
ENGINE MECHANICAL
11-9
BASE ENGINE
MIVEC (MITSUBISHI INNOVATIVE VALVE TIMING ELECTRONIC CONTROL SYSTEM)
RELATION
V.V.T. camshaft
sprocket (Inlet )
A
Oil feeder
control valve
Cylinder head
Oil feeder control
valve filter
Cylinder block
A
Section A-A
AKB00854AB
MIVEC (Mitsubishi Innovative Valve timing Electronic
Control system) consists of the components illustrated above.
The intake valve timing is optimally controlled (continuously variable) under the changing driving conditions to improve performance in the entire speed
range.
V.V.T. SPROCKET (VARIABLE VALVE TIMING SPROCKET)
Inlet V.V.T. sprocket
Valve housing
Valve rotor
Advance oil
chamber
Timing mark
Stopper pin
Vance bushing
V.V.T. sprocket
bolt
Sprocket
Retard oil chamber
AKB00855 AB
Oil from the oil feeder control valve is sent to the
V.V.T. sprocket, moving the vane rotor and thus regulating the valve timing.
ENGINE MECHANICAL
11-10
BASE ENGINE
CAMSHAFT
Cam position
sensing cam
Inlet camshaft
Retard
oil channel
Advance
oil channel
Dowel pin
Sealing cap
Hollow section
Exhaust camshaft
AK502506 AH
The lightweight camshaft is achieved by the hollow
design.
Oil channels run through the intake camshaft,
through which oil is sent from the oil feeder control
valve to the V.V.T. sprocket.
A cam position sensing ring is press-fitted onto the
rear portion of the intake camshaft.
OIL FEEDER CONTROL VALVE (OCV)
Valve sleeve
Pressure
chamber
Insulation collar
Bobbin
Default
pressure
Shaft
chamber
Yoke
Terminal
Spring guide
Guide cap
Plunger
Spool
Drain
Drain
Pump
O-ring
Stator
Enamelled copper wire
Bracket
AKB00856AB
The oil feeder control valve is essentially a solenoid
valve, regulated by the engine-ECU signals to feed
oil to the V.V.T. sprocket assembly to move the vane
rotor.
ENGINE MECHANICAL
11-11
BASE ENGINE
BALANCER RELATION<4B12>
Crank shaft
sprocket
Counter balancer shaft
Balancer chain
guide
Timing mark
link plate
Balancer shaft
module assembly
Balancer
tensioner
lever
Crankshaft sprocket
timing mark
Balancer timing
chain
Crank shaft
sprocket
Balancer tensioner
lever
Balancer timing
chain tensioner
Balancer shaft module
assembly
Balancer
chain guide
Timing mark
link plate
1. BALANCER TIMING CHAIN
• The balancer chain is a silent, endless type, consisting of 72 links. It is installed around the balancer module sprocket and the crankshaft
sprocket. Two mark link plates (orange and blue)
are installed on the balancer chain to locate the
sprockets. When the balancer chain drives the
balancer module sprocket, the balancer gear
causes the right and left balancer shafts to rotate.
2. CRANKSHAFT SPROCKET
Balancer timing
chain tensioner
Balancer module
sprocket timing mark AKB00857 AB
3. BALANCER TIMING CHAIN TENSIONER
4. BALANCER CHAIN GUIDE
5. BALANCER TENSIONER LEVER
6. BALANCER SHAFT MODULE ASSEMBLY
• The counter balancer shaft is located inside the
oil pan to achieve a compact engine. The balancer shaft module assembly integrates an oil
pump and a balancer unit to realise a compact
and lightweight package. The balancer shaft
module assembly cannot be disassembled.
12-1
GROUP 12
ENGINE
LUBRICATION
CONTENTS
GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . .
12-2
OIL PASSAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12-3
ENGINE LUBRICATION
12-2
GENERAL INFORMATION
GENERAL INFORMATION
M2120000100465
The lubrication system is the full-flow, filter pumping
system.
The engine oil that accumulates in the oil pan is
drawn and discharged by the oil pump. After its pressure is regulated by the relief valve, the oil passes
through the oil filter. Then, it flows from the oil passage in the cylinder block to the individual crankshaft
journals and the cylinder head.
After the oil is pumped to the individual crankshaft
journals, it passes through a passage in the crankshaft and is fed to the pins. After the oil is pumped to
the cylinder head, it flows to the camshaft journals
and the oil feeder control valves.
LUBRICATION RELATION
Oil filler cap
Oil level gauge
Oil filter
Oil pump chain
guide
Oil pump tensioner lever
Crank shaft
sprocket
Oil pump sprocket
Drain plug
Oil pump assembly
Oil pump chain
AKB00885 AB
1. OIL FILLER CAP
2. OIL LEVEL GAUGE
3. DRAIN PLUG
4. OIL PAN
• The oil pan is made of sheet metal and contains
an oil sump in the forward area of the engine.
FIPG (Formed-In-Place Gasket) is used to seal
between the oil pan and the ladder frame.
NOTE: FIPG is the abbreviation for Formed-In-Place
Gasket.
5. OIL FILTER
• The oil filter is installed on the left side of the cylinder block.
6. OIL PUMP<4B11>
• The oil screen is integrated into the oil pump case
to be compact and lightweight.
The oil pump case, which is installed to the bottom of
the ladder flame, is driven by the oil pump chain
through the oil pump sprocket installed to the
front of the oil pump case.
ENGINE LUBRICATION
12-3
OIL PASSAGE
Item
Specification
Displacement L/min(6,000 r/min.)
70
OIL PASSAGE
M2120000200741
Oil screen
Balancer shaft<4B12>
Relief valve
Oil pump
Cylinder block
oil passage
Oil filter bracket
Oil filter
Oil pressure switch
Cylinder block
oil passage
(main gallery)
Oil feeder control valve
Cylinder head
oil passage
Crankshaft journal
V.V.T. camshaft sprocket
Camshaft journal
Crankshaft pin
Oil pan
AK502548AE
13-1
GROUP 13
FUEL
CONTENTS
MULTIPOINT FUEL INJECTION (MPI)
FUEL SUPPLY
13A-1
GROUP 13A
MULTIPOINT FUEL
INJECTION (MPI)
CONTENTS
GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . .
13A-2
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13A-36
CONTROL UNIT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13A-5
FUEL PUMP RELAY CONTROL . . . . 13A-37
SENSOR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13A-7
STARTER RELAY CONTROL . . . . . . 13A-38
ACTUATOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13A-20
OXYGEN SENSOR HEATER CONTROL
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13A-39
FUEL INJECTION CONTROL . . . . . .
13A-24
IGNITION TIMING AND CONTROL FOR
CURRENT CARRYING TIME . . . . . . 13A-30
THROTTLE VALVE OPENING ANGLE
CONTROL AND IDLE SPEED CONTROL
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13A-32
MIVEC (Mitsubishi Innovative Valve Timing
Electronic Control System) . . . . . . . 13A-34
ENGINE CONTROL RELAY CONTROL
A/C COMPRESSOR RELAY CONTROL
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13A-40
ALTERNATOR CONTROL . . . . . . . . . 13A-41
PURGE CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13A-41
CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK (CAN)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13A-41
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM. . . . . . . . . . . . . 13A-41
13A-2
MULTIPOINT FUEL INJECTION (MPI)
GENERAL INFORMATION
GENERAL INFORMATION
M2132000102640
The following points of the 4B1 engine introduced to
the previous OUTLANDER have been changed:
Improvement / Additions
Remark
The variable valve timing control (V.V.T.) system has Due to this, the exhaust oil control valve and the
been discontinued at the engine exhaust side.
exhaust camshaft position sensor have been
discontinued.
An electric power steering has been adopted.
Due to this, the power steering fluid pressure switch
terminal has been deleted from the engine-ECU.
The air flow sensor has been changed.
The engine-ECU delivers a sensor reference voltage
to the air flow sensor.
The exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) valve has been Weight saving due to simpler structure
discontinued.
MULTIPOINT FUEL INJECTION (MPI)
13A-3
GENERAL INFORMATION
System Block Diagram
Engine-ECU
Air flow sensor
No.1 injector
Barometric pressure sensor
No.2 injector
Intake air temperature sensor
Engine control unit
Manifold absolute pressure
sensor
Engine coolant temperature
sensor
[1] Fuel injection control
No.4 injector
[2] Throttle valve opening control
and idle speed control
No.1 ignition coil
Throttle position sensor (main)
Throttle position sensor (sub)
No.3 injector
[3] Ignition timing and control for
current carrying time
No.2 ignition coil
No.3 ignition coil
Accelerator pedal position
sensor (main)
Accelerator pedal position
sensor (sub)
[4] MIVEC (Mitsubishi Innovative
Valve timing Electronic
Control system)
No.4 ignition coil
Throttle valve control servo
[5] Purge control
Crank angle sensor
Inlet camshaft position sensor
Oxygen sensor (front)
Oxygen sensor (front) heater
[6] Oxygen sensor heater
control
[7] Engine control relay control
Oxygen sensor (rear) heater
Inlet oil feeder control valve
Oxygen sensor (rear)
Detonation sensor
[8] Throttle valve control servo
relay control
Alternator FR terminal
[9] Fuel pump relay control
Alternator L terminal
[10] Starter relay control
Ignition switch-IG
[11] A/C compressor relay control
Ignition switch-ST
Oil pressure switch
[12] Alternator control
Purge control solenoid valve
Engine control relay
Throttle valve control servo relay
Fuel pump relay
Starter relay
A/C compressor relay
Power supply
CAN communication
(input signal)
[13] Diagnostic output
Alternator G terminal
[14] RAM data transmission
CAN communication
(output signal)
AKB00747AB
MULTIPOINT FUEL INJECTION (MPI)
13A-4
GENERAL INFORMATION
Control System Diagram
1 Air flow sensor
2 Intake air temperature
sensor
3 Throttle position sensor
(main)
4 Throttle position sensor
(sub)
5 Manifold absolute
pressure sensor
6 Inlet camshaft position
sensor
7 Engine coolant
temperature sensor
8 Detonation sensor
9 Crank angle sensor
10 Oxygen sensor (front)
11 Oxygen sensor (rear)
Power supply
Ignition switch-IG
Ignition switch-ST
Accelerator pedal
position
sensor (main)
Accelerator pedal
position
sensor (sub)
Engine oil pressure
switch
Alternator FR terminal
Alternator L terminal
CAN communication
(input signal)
EngineECU
Barometric
pressure
sensor
4 Purge control solenoid valve
1 Injector
2 Inlet oil feeder
control valve
3 Throttle valve control
servo
4 Purge control solenoid
valve
Ignition coil
Engine control relay
Fuel pump relay
Starter relay
Throttle valve control
servo relay
A/C compressor relay
Alternator G terminal
Oxygen sensor (front)
heater
Oxygen sensor (rear)
heater
CAN communication
(input signal)
3 Throttle position sensor (main)
4 Throttle position sensor (sub)
3 Throttle valve control servo
Canister
5 Manifold absolute pressure
sensor
Air
2 Inlet oil feeder control valve
1 Air flow sensor
2 Intake air
temperature
sensor
6 Inlet camshaft
position sensor
From fuel pump
1 Injector
7 Engine coolant
temperature sensor
Catalytic
converter
8 Detonation sensor
9 Crank angle sensor
Catalytic
converter
11 Oxygen sensor (rear)
10 Oxygen sensor (front)
AKB00748AB
MULTIPOINT FUEL INJECTION (MPI)
13A-5
CONTROL UNIT
CONTROL UNIT
M2132021500960
ENGINE-ECU
Engine-ECU
Microprocessor
Input
sensor
Input
interface
Output
interface
Output
actuator
ROM
RAM
AK602218AD
that change and correction of control data is possible
using special tools. It also uses Electrically Erasable
Programmable Read Only Memory (EEPROM) so
that studied compensation data is not deleted even if
battery terminals are disconnected.
Engine-ECU is installed in the engine room.
Engine-ECU judges (calculates) the optimum control
to deal with the constant minute changes in driving
conditions based on information input from the sensors and drives the actuator. Engine-ECU is composed of 32-bit microprocessor and Random Access
Memory (RAM), Read Only Memory (ROM) and
Input /Output interface. Engine-ECU uses
flash-memory ROM that allows re-writing of data so
ENGINE-ECU CONNECTOR INPUT/OUTPUT PIN ARRANGEMENT
1
2
3
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
15
16
71
72
76
75
74
73
80
79
78
77
81
82
17
18
19
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
31
32
83
84
88
87
86
85
92
91
90
89
93
94
33
34
35
46
45
44
43
42
41
40
39
38
37
36
47
48
95
96
100
99
98
97
104
103
102
101
105
106
49
50
51
62
61
60
59
58
57
56
55
54
53
52
63
64
107
108
112
111
110
109
116
115
114
113
117
118
AK602565 AB
Terminal
No.
Terminal
code
Terminal name
Terminal Terminal
No.
code
Terminal name
1
OCVI
Inlet oil feeder control valve
2
INJ1
No. 1 injector
3
INJ2
No. 2 injector
4
CIL1
No. 1 ignition coil
5
CIL2
No. 2 ignition coil
6
NTSW
Starter active signal
8
SGT
Crank angle sensor
9
5V
Sensor supplied voltage
10
TPSM
Throttle position sensor
(main)
11
TPSS
Throttle position sensor (sub)
MULTIPOINT FUEL INJECTION (MPI)
13A-6
CONTROL UNIT
Terminal
No.
Terminal
code
Terminal name
Terminal Terminal
No.
code
Terminal name
12
TPS5
Power supply voltage
applied to throttle position
sensor
13
TPSE
Throttle position sensor earth
14
CPI
Inlet camshaft position
sensor
15
ETV+
Throttle valve control servo (+)
16
ETV−
Throttle valve control servo
(−)
18
INJ3
No. 3 injector
19
INJ4
No. 4 injector
20
CIL3
No. 3 ignition coil
21
CIL4
No. 4 ignition coil
24
SGTE
Crank angle sensor earth
25
K/S
Detonation sensor (+)
26
WTS
Engine coolant temperature
sensor
27
WTSE
Engine coolant temperature
sensor earth
30
CPIE
Inlet camshaft position sensor
earth
34
OHFL
Oxygen sensor (front) heater 35
OHRL
Oxygen sensor (rear) heater
36
OPSW
Oil pressure switch
37
PURG
Purge control solenoid valve
38
O2FL
Oxygen sensor (front)
39
OFLE
Oxygen sensor (front) offset
voltage
40
O2RL
Oxygen sensor (rear)
41
ORLE
Oxygen sensor (rear) offset
voltage
42
K/SE
Detonation sensor (−)
44
MAP5
Power supply voltage applied
to manifold absolute pressure
sensor
45
MAP
Manifold absolute pressure
sensor
46
MAPE
Manifold absolute pressure
sensor earth
60
ALTG
Alternator G terminal
61
ALTF
Alternator FR terminal
62
ALTL
Alternator L terminal
71
RSG
Throttle valve control servo
earth
72
RSB
Power supply voltage
applied to throttle valve
control servo
73
C/R
Engine control relay
74
APSM
Accelerator pedal position
sensor (main)
75
APS5
Power supply voltage applied
to accelerator pedal position
sensor (main)
76
APSE
Accelerator pedal position
sensor (main) earth
77
APSS
Accelerator pedal position
sensor (sub)
78
5VV
Power supply voltage
applied to accelerator pedal
position sensor (sub)
79
EV
Accelerator pedal position
sensor (sub) earth
81
GNDE
Engine-ECU earth
82
BAT1
Power source
83
RSH
Throttle valve control servo
earth
84
C/RL
Throttle valve control servo
relay
87
AFS
Air flow sensor
88
AFSE
Air flow sensor earth
89
ATS
Intake air temperature
sensor
90
CANH
CAN interface (high)
MULTIPOINT FUEL INJECTION (MPI)
13A-7
SENSOR
Terminal
No.
Terminal
code
Terminal name
Terminal Terminal
No.
code
Terminal name
91
CANL
CAN interface (low)
92
IGN
Ignition switch-IG
93
GNDE
Engine-ECU earth
96
FP/R
Fuel pump relay
97
AFS5
Air flow sensor reference
voltage
102
AC/R
A/C compressor relay
103
FMB
Flash EP-ROM data
rewriting power source
104
BACK
Backup power source
105
ST
Ignition switch-ST
106
STRL
Starter relay
108
BRK
Brake switch
SENSOR
M2132001001472
AIR FLOW SENSOR
Silicon substrate
Heat sensing
resistor
Sensing area
Intake air
IN
OUT
Diaphragm
AKB00749AB
Air flow sensor is installed in the air intake hose. Air
flow sensor is composed of an extremely small heatsensing resistor. The air flow sensor controls the
amount of electric current flowing into the heat sensing resistor to keep the heat sensing resistor at a
constant temperature to the intake air temperature.
When the air mass flow rate increases, the air flow
speed is higher and also the amount of heat transfer
from the heat sensing resistor to the air increased.
Therefore, the air flow sensor increases the amount
of electric current to the heat sensing resistor. Thus,
the amount of electric current increases in accordance with the air mass flow rate. The air flow sensor
measures the air mass flow rate by detecting the
amount of electric current. The air flow sensor amplifies the detected electric current amount and outputs
it into the engine-ECU. Engine-ECU uses this output
current and engine speed to calculate and decide
basic fuel injection time. Sensor properties are as
shown in the figure.
From engine control relay
5V
Output current (mA)
Mass flow (g/s)
Air flow sensor
Engine-ECU
AKB00757AB
MULTIPOINT FUEL INJECTION (MPI)
13A-8
SENSOR
INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Sensory part
(thermistor)
Intake air temperature sensor is built in to the air flow
sensor. Intake air temperature sensor detects intake
air temperature through thermistor's resistance
change and outputs the voltage according to intake
air temperature to engine-ECU. Engine-ECU uses
this output voltage to compensate fuel injection control and ignition timing control. Sensor properties are
as shown in the figure.
AKB00750 AB
Output voltage (V)
Engine-ECU
5V
Intake air temperature
sensor (thermistor)
Resistance (k )
Intake air
temperature (˚C)
Intake air
temperature (˚C)
AK602207AN
MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE
SENSOR
Manifold absolute
pressure sensor
Pressure
AKC00061AB
The manifold absolute pressure sensor is installed in
the inlet manifold. Manifold absolute pressure sensor
uses a piezo resistive semiconductor to output the
voltage according to manifold absolute pressure to
engine-ECU. Engine-ECU uses this output voltage to
compensate fuel injection volume according to manifold absolute pressure. Sensor properties are as
shown in the figure.
MULTIPOINT FUEL INJECTION (MPI)
13A-9
SENSOR
Output voltage (V)
Manifold absolute
pressure sensor
Engine-ECU
5V
Power source
5V
Output signal
Earth
0
101
Pressure (kPa)
AK602206AF
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE
SENSOR
The engine coolant temperature sensor is installed in
the thermostat housing. Engine coolant temperature
sensor uses thermistor's resistance change to detect
coolant temperature and output the voltage according to coolant temperature to engine-ECU.
Engine-ECU uses this output voltage to appropriately
control fuel injection volume, idle speed and ignition
timing when the engine is cold. Sensor properties are
as shown in the figure.
Sensory part
(thermistor)
AK602255AB
Engine coolant
temperature sensor
(thermistor)
Output voltage (V)
Engine-ECU
5V
Resistance (k )
Engine coolant
temperature (˚C)
Engine coolant
temperature (˚C)
AK602208AK
MULTIPOINT FUEL INJECTION (MPI)
13A-10
SENSOR
THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
Throttle body
Throttle
position
sensor
AKC00062AB
The throttle position sensor is installed in the throttle
body. Throttle position sensor outputs voltage to
engine-ECU based on the throttle shaft rotation
angle. Engine-ECU uses this signal to detect the
throttle valve opening angle to perform throttle valve
control servo feedback control. This throttle position
sensor uses Hall IC and is a non-contact type.
STRUCTURE AND SYSTEM
Throttle position sensor is composed of a permanent
magnet fixed on the throttle shaft, Hall IC that outputs
voltage according to magnetic flux density and a stator that efficiently introduces magnetic flux from the
permanent magnet to Hall IC.
Magnetic flux density at Hall IC is proportional to the
output voltage.
Throttle position sensor has 2 output systems − throttle position sensor (main) and throttle position sensor
(sub), and the output voltage is output to
engine-ECU. When throttle valve turns, output voltage of throttle position sensor (main) and throttle
position sensor (sub) changes. This allows
engine-ECU to detect actual throttle opening angle.
Engine-ECU uses this output voltage for throttle
valve control servo feedback control. The relationship between throttle opening angle and output voltage of the throttle position sensor (main) and throttle
position sensor (sub) is as shown in the figure below.
Throttle position sensor
Throttle position
sensor (main)
Hall IC
Throttle position
sensor (sub)
Hall IC
Output voltage (V)
5
4.5
Throttle position
sensor (main)
2.5
5V
5V
Engine-ECU
Throttle position
sensor (sub)
0.5
0
Fully
closed
Throttle valve opening angle
Fully
opened
AK602222AG
MULTIPOINT FUEL INJECTION (MPI)
13A-11
SENSOR
When abnormality is detected
Throttle valve
control servo
Throttle
position
sensor
Restrict or shut off
the operating
Main
Fuel cut
Sub
Engine-ECU
Injector
Sub
Accelerator
pedal position
sensor
Main
AKB00593 AB
Engine-ECU compares output voltage of the throttle
position sensor (main) and throttle position sensor
(sub) to check for abnormality in the throttle position
sensor. If the engine-ECU detects the abnormality,
the emergency should be prevented by performing
the fuel-safe control.
• When 1-system malfunctions
The engine ECU should perform the throttle valve
position control by only using the signal having no malfunctions. Depressing the accelerator pedal half way can perform the control.
Performing the fuel cut can increase the
engine rotation speed.
• When 2-system malfunctions
The engine ECU should cut the energization of
the throttle valve control servo. At that time,
the spring built in the throttle valve can slightly
open the throttle valve. This allows the engine
ECU to control the engine output.
ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION
SENSOR
Accelerator pedal position
sensor connector
Accelerator pedal arm
AK602569AB
MULTIPOINT FUEL INJECTION (MPI)
13A-12
SENSOR
Accelerator pedal position sensor is integrated with
accelerator pedal, and detects accelerator opening
angle. Engine-ECU uses the output voltage of this
sensor to control appropriate throttle valve opening
angle and fuel injection volume. This accelerator
pedal position sensor uses Hall IC and is a non-contact type.
STRUCTURE AND SYSTEM
Magnet
Hall IC
Pedal shaft
AK602570AB
Accelerator pedal position sensor is composed of a
permanent magnet fixed on the magnet carrier of the
pedal shaft, Hall IC outputs voltage according to
magnetic flux density and a stator that efficiently
introduces magnetic flux from the permanent magnet
to Hall IC.
Magnetic flux density at Hall IC is proportional to the
output voltage.
The accelerator pedal position sensor has 2 output
systems − accelerator pedal position sensor (main)
and accelerator pedal position sensor (sub), and the
output voltage is output to engine-ECU. According to
depression of the accelerator pedal, output voltage
of the accelerator pedal position sensor (main) and
accelerator pedal position sensor (sub) changes.
This allows engine-ECU to detect the actual accelerator pedal depression amount. Engine-ECU uses
accelerator pedal position sensor (main) output voltage for appropriate throttle valve opening angle control and fuel injection volume control. Also,
engine-ECU compares output voltage of the accelerator pedal position sensor (main) and accelerator
pedal position sensor (sub) to check for abnormality
in sensor. The relationship between accelerator
opening angle and output voltage of the accelerator
pedal position sensor (main) and accelerator pedal
position sensor (sub) is as shown in the figure below.
Accelerator pedal position sensor
Accelerator pedal
position sensor (main)
Hall IC
Accelerator pedal
position sensor (sub)
Hall IC
Output voltage (V)
5
Accelerator pedal
position sensor (main)
4
3
2
Accelerator pedal
position sensor (sub)
1
5V
5V
0
Engine-ECU
Accelerator
pedal stroke
Full throttle
point
AK602211AD
MULTIPOINT FUEL INJECTION (MPI)
13A-13
SENSOR
When abnormality is detected
Throttle valve
control servo
Throttle
position
sensor
Restrict or shut off
the operating
Main
Fuel cut
Sub
Engine-ECU
Injector
Sub
Accelerator
pedal position
sensor
Main
AKB00595 AB
OXYGEN SENSOR
Engine-ECU compares output voltage of the accelerator pedal position sensor (main) and accelerator
pedal position sensor (sub) to check for abnormality
in sensor. If the engine-ECU detects the abnormality,
the emergency should be prevented by performing
the fuel-safe control.
• When 1-system malfunctions
The engine-ECU should detect the amount of
accelerator pedal depressed by only using the
signal having no malfunctions. Depressing
the accelerator pedal half way can perform
the control. Performing the fuel cut can
increase the engine rotation speed.
• When 2-system malfunctions
The engine-ECU should cut the energization of
the throttle valve control servo. At that time,
the spring built in the throttle valve can slightly
open the throttle valve. This allows the
engine-ECU to control the engine output.
Front
Sensing
area
Rear
Sensing
area
AKB00751AB
The oxygen sensor (front) is installed in the exhaust
manifold. The oxygen sensor (rear) is installed in the
exhaust front pipe.
Oxygen sensor has a built-in heater to help early
activation of the sensor. This allows feedback control
of air-fuel ratio soon after engine start.
This sensor uses the oxygen concentration cell principle of solid electrolyte (zirconia) and displays the
property of sudden change in output voltage near
theoretical air-fuel ratio. This property is used to
detect oxygen density in exhaust gas. Feedback to
engine-ECU allows it to judge whether air-fuel ratio is
rich or lean compared to theoretical air-fuel ratio.
This allows engine-ECU precise feedback control to
get theoretical air-fuel ratio with best cleaning efficiency of 3-way catalytic converter.
MULTIPOINT FUEL INJECTION (MPI)
13A-14
SENSOR
From engine control relay
Oxygen sensor
Heater
Engine-ECU
Zirconia element
0.5V
AK602576AB
CRANK ANGLE SENSOR
Crankshaft sensing ring
Crankshaft sensing ring
(36 teeth including 3 missing teeth)
Magnet flux
Crank angle
sensor
Vane
Magnetic resistance element
AK602737AE
A crank angle sensor is installed on the exhaust side
of the cylinder block. The crank angle sensor monitors rotation of crankshaft sensing ring (36 teeth
including 3 missing teeth) installed on the crankshaft
and converts to voltage (pulse signal) that is output
to engine-ECU. Engine-ECU uses crank angle sensor's output pulse to detect crankshaft position.
Crankshaft sensing ring
Magnet flux
Vane
Magnetic resistance element
AK602265AD
The crank angle sensor uses a magnetic resistance
element. When the vane of the crankshaft-sensing
ring passes the front surface of the magnetic resistance element, the flux from the magnet passes the
magnetic resistance element. Thus, resistance of the
magnetic resistance element increases. When the
vane of the crankshaft-sensing ring does not pass
the front surface of the magnetic resistance element,
MULTIPOINT FUEL INJECTION (MPI)
13A-15
SENSOR
the flux from the magnet does not pass the magnetic
resistance element and the resistance decreases.
The crank angle sensor converts this change in
resistance of the magnetic resistance element to a 5
V pulse signal and outputs it to engine-ECU.
Engine-ECU
Crank angle sensor
Magnetic resistance element
5V
5V
Output signal
AK602285AB
INLET CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR
Camshaft position sensing portion
Camshaft position sensor
Magnet flux
Sensing portion
Camshaft
Magnetic resistance element
AK602738AB
The inlet camshaft position sensor is installed on the
inlet side of the cylinder head. The inlet camshaft
position sensor monitors shape of the half-moon
sensing portion and converts to voltage (pulse signal) that is output to engine-ECU. Upon receiving this
output voltage, the engine-ECU effects feedback
control to optimize the phase of the inlet camshaft.
Also, engine-ECU uses a combination of the camshaft position sensor output pulse signal and crankshaft position sensor output pulse signal to identify
cylinders in the compression process.
Camshaft position sensing portion
Magnet flux
Magnetic resistance element
AK602574AE
The inlet camshaft position sensor uses a magnetic
resistance element. When the camshaft position
sensing portion passes the front surface of the magnetic resistance element, the flux from the magnet
passes the magnetic resistance element. Thus,
resistance of the magnetic resistance element
increases. When the camshaft position sensing portion does not pass the front surface of the magnetic
resistance element, the flux from the magnet does
MULTIPOINT FUEL INJECTION (MPI)
13A-16
SENSOR
not pass the magnetic resistance element and the
resistance decreases. The inlet camshaft position
sensor converts this change in resistance of the
magnetic resistance element to a 5 V pulse signal
and outputs it to engine-ECU.
Engine-ECU
Camshaft position sensor
Magnetic resistance element
5V
5V
Output signal
AK602287AB
A detonation sensor is installed on the inlet side of
the cylinder block. Detonation sensor uses the piezoelectric element to convert the vibration of the cylinder block generated when engine is in operation to
minute voltage that is output to engine-ECU.
Engine-ECU uses the minute output voltage from the
detonation sensor filtered through the cylinder
block's natural frequency to detect knocking, and
compensates the ignition timing lag according to the
strength of the knocking.
DETONATION SENSOR
Piezoelectric element
AK604903AC
Engine-ECU
5V
Detonation sensor
Piezoelectric element
AK602226AC
MULTIPOINT FUEL INJECTION (MPI)
13A-17
SENSOR
BAROMETRIC PRESSURE SENSOR
OIL PRESSURE SWITCH
Barometric pressure sensor
(built in engine-ECU)
Oil
pressure
Contact switch
AK602575AB
A barometric pressure sensor is built into
engine-ECU. The barometric pressure sensor is a
semiconductor diffused pressure element which outputs voltage to engine-ECU according to atmospheric pressure. Engine-ECU uses this output
voltage to sense the altitude of the vehicle and compensates fuel injection volume to achieve the appropriate air-fuel ratio for that altitude.
AK602587AB
The oil pressure switch is installed on the inlet side of
the cylinder block. The oil pressure switch detects
whether the oil pressure is high or low using the contact switch. When the oil pressure becomes higher
than the specified value after the engine starts, the
contact point of the oil pressure switch opens.
This allows the engine-ECU to detect the oil pressure
is higher than the specified value. The engine-ECU
outputs the OFF signal to the combination meter
through the CAN and then turns off the oil pressure
warning lamp.
Engine-ECU
Engine-ECU
terminal voltage (V)
12
0
ON
Oil pressure switch
Operating pressure
Oil pressure: high
OFF
Oil pressure:low
ON
Oil pressure (kPa)
OFF
AK602228 AF
ALTERNATOR FR TERMINAL
Alternator turns ON/OFF the power transistor in the
voltage regulator to adjust current flow in the field coil
according to alternator output current. In this way
alternator output voltage is kept adjusted (to about
14.4 V). The ratio of power transistor ON time (ON
duty) is output from alternator FR terminal to
engine-ECU. Engine-ECU uses this signal to detect
alternator output current and drives throttle valve
control servo according to output current (electric
load). This prevents change in idle speed due to
electric load and helps maintain stable idle speed.
MULTIPOINT FUEL INJECTION (MPI)
13A-18
SENSOR
Battery
B
S
Engine-ECU
FR
Field coil
Voltage regulator
Alternator
AK604998AB
ALTERNATOR L TERMINAL
After turning on the ignition switch, the current is
input by the engine-ECU to the alternator L terminal.
This allows the voltage regulator to be on and the
field coil to be excited. When the alternator rotates in
this situation, the voltage is excited in the stator coil
and the current is output from B-terminal through the
commutation diode. Also the generated voltage is
input to the voltage regulator through the commuta-
tion diode. After the electric generation begins, the
current is supplied to the field coil from this circuit. In
addition, the generated voltage is output from the
alternator L terminal to the engine-ECU. This allows
the engine-ECU to detect that the electric generation
begins. The engine-ECU outputs the ON signal to
the combination meter through the CAN and then
turns off the charge lamp.
MULTIPOINT FUEL INJECTION (MPI)
13A-19
SENSOR
Battery
B
S
Engine-ECU
L
CAN
communication
Charge
warning
lamp
Field coil
Combination meter
Voltage regulator
Alternator
AK604999 AB
MULTIPOINT FUEL INJECTION (MPI)
13A-20
ACTUATOR
ACTUATOR
M2132002001129
INJECTOR
An injector is an injection nozzle with the electromagnetic valve that injects fuel based on the injection signal sent by engine-ECU. 1 injector is installed in the
inlet manifold of each cylinder and fixed to the delivery pipe. When electricity flows through the solenoid
coil, the needle gets sucked in. The needle gets
pulled till the fully open position so that the injection
hole is fully open and the fuel gets injected.
Fuel
Connector
Filter
Solenoid coil
Needle
Plate
AK800561 AE
MULTIPOINT FUEL INJECTION (MPI)
13A-21
ACTUATOR
From battery
ON
No. 1
Engine control relay
OFF
No. 2
No. 3
No. 4
Injectors
Engine-ECU
AKB00844 AB
Voltage from the battery gets applied from the injector relay to the injector and up to the engine-ECU.
Engine-ECU turns ON its power transistor and prepares the injector's earth circuit. Thus, current flows
through the injector while power transistor is ON and
the injector injects fuel.
THROTTLE VALVE CONTROL SERVO
Throttle body
Throttle valve control servo
AKC00062AC
A throttle valve control servo is installed in throttle
body. The throttle valve control servo performs the
Open/Close of the throttle valve through the reduction gear. Engine-ECU changes current direction
according to the Open/Close direction and also
changes current to the motor coil to control the throttle valve control servo.
Throttle valve control servo is composed of a good
response, low energy, and small DC motor with
brush and can generate rotation force corresponding
to the current applied on the coil. When there is no
current passing through the throttle valve control
servo, the throttle valve remains at a prescribed
opening angle. So, even if current stops because of
a fault in the system, a minimum level of running
remains possible.
MULTIPOINT FUEL INJECTION (MPI)
13A-22
ACTUATOR
From battery
Engine control relay
Throttle valve
control servo
ON
OFF
To engine-ECU
OFF
Power source
ON
Throttle valve
control servo relay
Engine-ECU
AK602231 AF
IGNITION COIL
Refer to GROUP 16 − Ignition System − Ignition Coil
.
PURGE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Refer to GROUP 17 − Emission Control <MPI> −
Evaporative Emission Control System .
INLET OIL FEEDER CONTROL VALVE
Spool valve movement
Advance Retard
chamber chamber
Spring
Coil
Drain
Drain
Oil pressure
Plunger
AK604740AE
The inlet oil feeder control valve is installed on the
inlet side of the cylinder head. Receiving the duty
signal from the engine-ECU, the inlet oil feeder control valve operates the spool valve position and
divides the oil pressure from the cylinder block into
the advanced chamber and the retarded chamber of
the V.V.T. sprocket as well as continually changes
the inlet camshaft phase. The spring makes spool
valve stop at the position where the inlet camshaft is
at the most retarded angle when the engine is
stopped. The engine-ECU operates the spool valve
position by increasing and decreasing ON duty ratio
of the inlet oil feeder control valve and allows the
inlet camshaft to be at the target phase angle. When
the duty ratio increases, the V.V.T. sprocket makes
phase of inlet camshaft advanced angle side. When
the duty ratio degreases, the V.V.T. sprocket makes
phase of inlet camshaft retarded angle side. When
the medium duty ratio, at which the spool valve is at
the medium position, is achieved, all the oil passages
are closed. This allows the phase angle to be kept
constant. The engine-ECU changes and controls the
duty ratio in accordance with the engine operation to
get the optimum phase angle.
MULTIPOINT FUEL INJECTION (MPI)
ACTUATOR
13A-23
From engine control relay
Engine-ECU
Inlet oil feeder
control valve
AK700721 AB
ALTERNATOR G TERMINAL
Engine-ECU uses ON/OFF of alternator G terminal
to control alternator output voltage. When the power
transistor in the engine-ECU turns ON, output voltage gets adjusted to about 12.8 V. When alternator
output voltage drops to 12.8 V it becomes lower than
voltage of the charged battery and almost no current
is output from the alternator. When the power transistor in the engine-ECU turns OFF, output voltage gets
adjusted to about 14.4 V. When alternator output
voltage is about 14.4 V, alternator outputs current to
produce electricity. In case electric load is generated
suddenly, engine-ECU controls alternator G terminal's On-duty to limit the sudden increase in alternator load due to generation and thus prevents change
in idle speed.
MULTIPOINT FUEL INJECTION (MPI)
13A-24
FUEL INJECTION CONTROL
Battery
B
S
Engine-ECU
G
Field coil
Voltage regulator
Alternator
AK605000 AB
FUEL INJECTION CONTROL
M2132003001876
Fuel injection volume is regulated to obtain the optimum air-fuel ratio in accordance with the constant
minute changes in engine driving conditions. Fuel
injection volume is controlled by injector drive time
(injection time). There is a prescribed basic drive
time that varies according to the engine speed and
intake air volume. Engine-ECU adds prescribed
compensations to this basic drive time according to
conditions such as the intake air temperature and
engine coolant temperature to decide injection time.
Fuel injection is done separately for each cylinder
and is done once in two engine rotations.
MULTIPOINT FUEL INJECTION (MPI)
13A-25
FUEL INJECTION CONTROL
System Configuration Diagram
Air flow sensor
Intake air temperature sensor
Manifold absolute
pressure sensor
Barometric pressure sensor
Engine coolant
temperature sensor
Injector
EngineECU
Throttle position sensor
Accelerator pedal position sensor
Detonation sensor
Inlet camshaft position sensor
Crank angle sensor
Ignition switch-ST
Oxygen sensor
Vehicle speed signal (CAN)
AKB00752AB
1. INJECTOR ACTUATION (FUEL INJECTION) TIMING
Injector drive time in case of multipoint fuel injection
(MPI) is controlled as follows according to driving
conditions.
MULTIPOINT FUEL INJECTION (MPI)
13A-26
FUEL INJECTION CONTROL
Fuel Injection During Cranking and Normal Operation
<No.1 TDC>
<No. 2 TDC>
Crank angle
sensor signal
H
Inlet camshaft
position sensor
signal
H
<No. 3 TDC>
<No. 4 TDC>
<No. 2 TDC>
L
L
: Fuel injection
Cylinder stroke
No. 1 Cylinder
Compression
Combustion
Exhaust
Intake
No. 3 Cylinder
Intake
Compression
Combustion
Exhaust
No. 4 Cylinder
No. 2 Cylinder
Exhaust
Intake
Compression
Combustion
Combustion
Exhaust
Intake
Compression
AKB00753 AB
Fuel injection to each cylinder is done by driving the
injector at optimum timing while it is in exhaust process based on the crankshaft position sensor signal.
Engine-ECU compares the crankshaft position sensor output pulse signal and inlet camshaft position
sensor output pulse signal to identify the cylinder.
Using this as a base, it performs sequential injection
in the sequence of cylinders 1, 3, 4, 2.
Additional Fuel Injection During Acceleration
<No. 2 TDC>
Crank angle
sensor signal
<No.1 TDC>
<No. 3 TDC>
<No. 4 TDC>
<No. 2 TDC>
H
L
Increase injection for acceleration
Cylinder stroke
No. 1 Cylinder
Compression
Combustion
Exhaust
Intake
No. 3 Cylinder
Intake
Compression
Combustion
Exhaust
No. 4 Cylinder
No. 2 Cylinder
Exhaust
Intake
Compression
Combustion
Combustion
Exhaust
Intake
Compression
AK704439 AB
In addition to the synchronizing fuel injection with
crankshaft position sensor signal during accelera-
tion, the volume of fuel is injected according to the
extent of the acceleration.
MULTIPOINT FUEL INJECTION (MPI)
FUEL INJECTION CONTROL
2. Fuel injection volume (injector drive
time) control
Under normal operating conditions, the figure shows
the flow chart of calculating the injection amount during the injector driving time. Basic drive time is
decided based on the air flow sensor signal (intake
air volume signal) and crankshaft position sensor
13A-27
signal (engine rotation signal). This basic drive time
is compensated according to signals from various
sensors and optimum injector drive time (fuel injection volume) is calculated according to driving conditions.
MULTIPOINT FUEL INJECTION (MPI)
13A-28
FUEL INJECTION CONTROL
Fuel Injection Volume Control Block Diagram (Normal Operation)
Air fuel ratio
compensation
(Predetermined
compensation)
Air flow sensor
Basic fuel
injection time
determination
Crank angle sensor
Oxygen sensor
feedback
compensation
Oxygen sensor
Engine coolant
temperature
compensation
Engine coolant
temperature sensor
Accelerationdeceleration
compensation
Barometric pressure
sensor
Fuel pressure
compensation
Manifold absolute
pressure sensor
Battery voltage
compensation
Battery voltage
Injector
AK602278AB
[Injector basic drive time]
Fuel injection is performed once per cycle for each
cylinder. Basic drive time refers to fuel injection volume (injector drive time) to achieve theoretical
air-fuel ratio for the intake air volume of 1 cycle of 1
cylinder. Fuel injection volume changes according to
Basic fuel
injection time
the pressure difference (injected fuel pressure)
between manifold pressure and fuel pressure (constant). So, injected fuel pressure compensation is
made to injector drive time for theoretical air-fuel
ratio to arrive at basic drive time.
Intake air amount per cycle per cylinder
Fuel injection pressure compensation
Theoretical air-fuel ratio
AK602279AB
MULTIPOINT FUEL INJECTION (MPI)
FUEL INJECTION CONTROL
Intake air volume of each cycle of 1 cylinder is calculated by engine-ECU based on the airflow sensor
signal and crank angle sensor signal. Also, during
engine start, the map value prescribed by the coolant
temperature sensor signal is used as basic drive
time.
13A-29
[Injector drive time compensation]
After calculating the injector basic drive time, the
engine-ECU makes the following compensations to
control the optimum fuel injection volume according
to driving conditions.
List of main compensations for fuel injection control
Compensations
Content
Oxygen sensor feedback compensation
The Oxygen sensor signal is used for making the
compensation to get air-fuel ratio with best cleaning
efficiency of the 3-way catalytic converter. This
compensation might not be made sometimes in
order to improve drivability, depending on driving
conditions. (Air-fuel ratio compensation is made.)
The engine-ECU compensates the output signal of
the oxygen sensor (front) using the output signal of
the oxygen sensor (rear). This allows the deviation
of the output signal, caused by the deterioration of
the oxygen sensor (front), to be solved, then the
highly accurate exhaust gas control is performed.
Air-fuel ratio compensation
Under driving conditions where oxygen sensor
feedback compensation is not performed,
compensation is made based on pre-set map
values that vary according to engine speed and
intake air volume.
Engine coolant temperature compensation
Compensation is made according to the engine
coolant temperature. The lower the engine coolant
temperature, the greater the fuel injection volume.
Acceleration/ Deceleration compensation
Compensation is made according to change in
intake air volume. During acceleration, fuel injection
volume is increased. Also, during deceleration, fuel
injection volume is decreased.
Fuel injection compensation
Compensation is made according to the pressure
difference between atmospheric pressure and
manifold absolute pressure. The greater the
difference in pressure, the shorter the injector drive
time.
Battery voltage compensation
Compensation is made depending on battery
voltage. The lower the battery voltage, the greater
the injector drive signal time.
Learning value for fuel compensation
Compensation amount is learned to compensate
feedback of oxygen sensor. This allows system to
compensate in accordance with engine
characteristics.
[Fuel limit control during deceleration]
[Fuel-cut control when over-run]
Engine-ECU limits fuel when decelerating downhill to
prevent excessive rise of catalytic converter temperature and to improve fuel efficiency.
When engine speed exceeds a prescribed limit
(6,600 r/min), engine-ECU cuts fuel supply to prevent overrunning and thus protect the engine.
MULTIPOINT FUEL INJECTION (MPI)
13A-30
IGNITION TIMING AND CONTROL FOR CURRENT CARRYING TIME
IGNITION TIMING AND CONTROL FOR CURRENT
CARRYING TIME
M2132027100573
Ignition timing is pre-set according to engine driving
conditions. Compensations are made according to
pre-set values depending on conditions such as
engine coolant temperature, battery voltage etc. to
decide optimum ignition timing. Primary current connect/disconnect signal is sent to the power transistor
to control ignition timing. Ignition is done in sequence
of cylinders 1, 3, 4, 2.
System Configuration Diagram
Engine control relay
Battery
Air flow sensor
Intake air temperature sensor
Manifold absolute
pressure sensor
EngineECU
Engine coolant
temperature sensor
Inlet camshaft position sensor
Crank angle sensor
Ignition coil
Throttle position sensor
Detonation sensor
Ignition switch-ST
Spark plug
Cylinder No.
1
2
3
4
AK502722 AN
1. Ignition power control
Based on the crankshaft position sensor signal and
camshaft position sensor signal, engine-ECU
decides the ignition cylinder, calculates the ignition
timing and sends the ignition coil primary current
connect/disconnect signal to the power transistor of
each cylinder in the ignition sequence.
MULTIPOINT FUEL INJECTION (MPI)
13A-31
IGNITION TIMING AND CONTROL FOR CURRENT CARRYING TIME
<No. 2 TDC>
Crank angle
sensor signal
H
Inlet camshaft
position sensor
signal
H
<No.1 TDC>
<No. 3 TDC>
<No. 4 TDC>
<No. 2 TDC>
L
L
Cylinder stroke
Ignition
No. 1 Cylinder
Compression
Combustion
Exhaust
Intake
No. 3 Cylinder
Intake
Compression
Combustion
Exhaust
No. 4 Cylinder
No. 2 Cylinder
Exhaust
Intake
Compression
Combustion
Combustion
Exhaust
Intake
Compression
AK604969AC
2. Spark-advance control and current carrying time control
[During start]
Engine-ECU initiates ignition at fixed ignition timing
(5° BTDC) synchronized with the crankshaft position
sensor signal.
[During normal operation]
After determining the basic spark-advance based on
the intake air volume and engine speed, engine-ECU
makes compensations based on input from various
sensors to control the optimum spark-advance and
current carrying time.
List of main compensations for spark-advance control and current carrying time control
Compensations
Content
Intake air temperature compensation
Compensation is made according to intake air
temperature. The higher the intake air temperature
the greater the delay in ignition timing.
Engine coolant temperature compensation
Compensation is made according to engine coolant
temperature. The lower the engine coolant
temperature the greater the advance in ignition
timing.
Knocking compensation
Compensation is made according to generation of
knocking. The greater the knocking the greater the
delay in ignition timing.
Stable idle compensation
Compensation is made according to change in idle
speed. In case engine speed becomes lower than
target speed, ignition timing is advanced.
Delay compensation when changing shift
During change of shift, sparking is delayed
compared to normal ignition timing to reduce
engine output torque and absorb the shock of the
shift change.
13A-32
MULTIPOINT FUEL INJECTION (MPI)
THROTTLE VALVE OPENING ANGLE CONTROL AND IDLE SPEED CONTROL
Compensations
Content
Battery voltage compensation
Compensation is made depending on battery
voltage. The lower the battery voltage the greater
the current carrying time and when battery voltage
is high current carrying time is shortened.
[Control for checking ignition timing]
During basic ignition timing set mode for M.U.T.-III
actuator test function, sparking is done with fixed
ignition timing (5° BTDC) synchronized with crankshaft position sensor signal.
THROTTLE VALVE OPENING ANGLE CONTROL AND IDLE
SPEED CONTROL
M2132003501053
Engine-ECU detects the amount of accelerator pedal
depression (as per operator's intention) through the
accelerator pedal position sensor. Based on pre-set
basic target opening angles it adds various compensations and controls the throttle valve opening angle
according to the target opening angle.
Motor drive power source
(From throttle valve control
servo relay)
Throttle valve
control servo
Throttle
position
sensor
Motor drive circuit
Intake air temperature
sensor
Main
Crank angle sensor
Sub
A/C switch (CAN)
Control unit
Accelerator
pedal position
sensor
Engine coolant
temperature sensor
A/C load signal (CAN)
Alternator FR terminal
Sub
Inhibitor switch (CAN)
Main
Barometric pressure
sensor
Engine-ECU
AK602236AQ
While starting
Engine-ECU adds various compensations to the target opening angle that are set based on the engine
coolant temperature, so that the air volume is opti-
mum for starting.
MULTIPOINT FUEL INJECTION (MPI)
THROTTLE VALVE OPENING ANGLE CONTROL AND IDLE SPEED CONTROL
13A-33
While idling
While driving
Engine-ECU controls the throttle valve to achieve the
target opening angle that are set based on the
engine coolant temperature. In this way best idle
operation is achieved when engine is cold and when
it is hot. Also, the following compensations ensure
optimum control.
Compensations are made to the target opening
angle set according to the accelerator pedal opening
angle and engine speed to control the throttle valve
opening angle.
List of main compensations for throttle valve opening angle and idle speed control
Compensations
Content
Stable idle compensation (immediately after start)
In order to stabilize idle speed immediately after
start, target opening angle is kept big and then
gradually reduced. Compensation values are set
based on the engine coolant temperature.
Rotation speed feedback compensation (while
idling)
In case there is a difference between the target idle
speed and actual engine speed, engine-ECU
compensates the throttle valve opening angle
based on that difference.
Atmospheric pressure compensation
At high altitudes atmospheric pressure is less and
the intake air density is low. So, the target opening
angle is compensated based on atmospheric
pressure.
Engine coolant temperature compensation
Compensation is made according to the engine
coolant temperature. The lower the engine coolant
temperature the greater the throttle valve opening
angle.
Electric load compensation
Throttle opening angle is compensated according
to electric load. The greater the electric load, the
greater the throttle valve opening angle.
Compensation when shift is in D range
When transmission is changed from P or N range
to some other range, throttle valve opening angle is
increased to prevent reduction in engine speed.
Compensation when A/C is functioning
Throttle opening angle is compensated according
to functioning of A/C compressor. While A/C
compressor is being driven, the throttle valve
opening angle is increased.
Initialize control
After ignition switch turns OFF, engine-ECU drives
the throttle valve from fully closed position to fully
open position and records the fully closed/open studied value of the throttle position sensor (main and
sub) output signals. The recorded studied values are
used as studied value compensation for compensating basic target opening angle when the engine is
started next.
Engine protection control
When the racing is continued during the vehicle
stopped period (no-load period) for more than the
specified time, the engine-ECU closes the throttle
valve and restricts the engine speed to protect the
engine.
13A-34
MULTIPOINT FUEL INJECTION (MPI)
MIVEC (Mitsubishi Innovative Valve Timing Electronic Control System)
MIVEC (Mitsubishi Innovative Valve Timing Electronic
Control System)
M2132023500911
The MIVEC system effects a continuously variable
control on the inlet valve timing. The valve operating
angle is not change. MIVEC enables valve timing
control that is optimal for the operating conditions of
the engine. Thus, it stabilizes the idle and improves
power output and torque in all driving ranges.
System Configuration Diagram
Inlet oil feeder
control valve
Retard direction
Crankshaft position sensor
Air flow sensor
Spool valve movement
Spool valve
Throttle position sensor
Engine-ECU
Advance direction
Engine coolant temperature
sensor
To oil pan
Retard chamber
Inlet camshaft position
sensor
Oil pressure
Advance chamber
To oil pan
Spring
AKB00755 AB
• The engine-ECU assesses the driving conditions
of the engine by way of the signals input by sensors.
• Based on the assessed information, the
engine-ECU outputs duty cycle signals to the inlet
oil feeder control valve in order to control the
position of the spool valve.
• By varying the position of the spool valve, the oil
pressure can be applied either to the retard or
advance chamber, thus continuously changing
the phases of the inlet camshaft.
MULTIPOINT FUEL INJECTION (MPI)
MIVEC (Mitsubishi Innovative Valve Timing Electronic Control System)
<No.2TDC>
Crank angle
sensor signal
H
Inlet camshaft
position sensor
signal
H
<No.1TDC>
<No.3TDC>
<No.4TDC>
13A-35
<No.2TDC>
L
L
: Phase angle
AKB00756AB
The engine-ECU calculates the detected phase
angle by using the signal from the inlet camshaft
position sensor and the crank angle sensor.
Operation Conceptual Diagram
Valve lift
Inlet camshaft
phase angle
Exhaust valve lift curve
At most
advanced angle
Inlet valve lift curve
(at most retarded angle)
Overlap
AK800138 AB
The engine-ECU controls the camshaft phase angle
in order to attain optimal valve timing that suits the
engine load and engine speed.
Initial Phase
Control Direction
Inlet valve
Advance direction
Most retarded angle
MULTIPOINT FUEL INJECTION (MPI)
13A-36
ENGINE CONTROL RELAY CONTROL
ENGINE CONTROL RELAY CONTROL
M2132006000720
Battery
LOCK
Ignition switch
ST
IG1
Engine control
relay
ACC
IG2
OFF
ON
ETACS-ECU
To each sensor and
actuator
Power
source
Engine control relay control
Battery
backup
Engine-ECU
Ignition switch-IG
AK604134AD
When the ignition switch-IG "ON" signal is input,
engine-ECU turns ON the power transistor for control
of the engine control relay. As a result, current flows
through the engine control relay's coil, the relay
switch turns ON and power is supplied to each sensor and actuator. Also, when ignition switch-IG "OFF"
signal is input, engine-ECU performs the following
controls and then turns OFF the power transistor for
control of engine control relay.
• Throttle valve initializing control
MULTIPOINT FUEL INJECTION (MPI)
13A-37
FUEL PUMP RELAY CONTROL
FUEL PUMP RELAY CONTROL
M2132006500769
Battery
LOCK
Engine control
relay
ST
ACC
IG1 IG2
Ignition switch
OFF
ON
To engine-ECU
ETACS-ECU
Fuel pump
relay
OFF
ON
Fuel pump
and gauge
unit
Ignition switch-ST
M
Engine-ECU
Fuel pump
relay control
Crank angle sensor
AK700635 AB
When current flows through the fuel pump relay, the
relay turns ON and the fuel pump is driven. The fuel
pump relay is built into the ETACS-ECU. When the
ignition switch-ST signal is input, engine-ECU turns
ON the power transistor for control of the fuel pump
relay. As a result, power is supplied to the fuel pump.
Also, if engine speed falls below a set value, the fuel
pump relay is turned OFF. Thus, it deals with sudden
stoppages such as engine stalling etc. by stopping
the pump.
MULTIPOINT FUEL INJECTION (MPI)
13A-38
STARTER RELAY CONTROL
STARTER RELAY CONTROL
M2132025500672
Battery
Ignition switch-ST
Inhibitor
switch
N
R
P
ETACS
-ECU
Starter relay
OFF
ON
ON
Engine-ECU
Starter relay
control
OFF
Starter
M
AK800140 AB
When the ignition switch-ST signal is input,
engine-ECU turns ON the power transistor for control
of the starter relay.
MULTIPOINT FUEL INJECTION (MPI)
13A-39
OXYGEN SENSOR HEATER CONTROL
OXYGEN SENSOR HEATER CONTROL
M2132007000734
Engine-ECU
Oxygen sensor heater
Engine control
relay
Engine coolant
temperature sensor
Battery
AK602241AE
When exhaust gas temperature is low, the oxygen
sensor response is dull. So, response is improved by
raising the sensor temperature by passing current
through the heater at a low exhaust gas temperature,
such as in the immediate aftermath of the engine
start, or during the warm up operation and in cutting
the fuel during deceleration. Based on driving conditions and the oxygen sensor activation state,
engine-ECU changes the amount of current (duty
ratio) to the heater to quicken the activation of the
oxygen sensor.
MULTIPOINT FUEL INJECTION (MPI)
13A-40
A/C COMPRESSOR RELAY CONTROL
A/C COMPRESSOR RELAY CONTROL
M2132034500722
Battery
A/C compressor relay
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
A/C
refrigerant
temperature
switch
A/C switch (CAN)
Crank angle sensor
A/C compressor
assembly
Accelerator pedal position sensor
A/C compressor
clutch
A/C compressor
relay control
Vehicle speed signal (CAN)
Inhibitor switch (CAN)
Engine-ECU
AK800141 AH
After the A/C switch is turned ON and A/C compressor relay reaches a state where it can turn ON,
engine-ECU turns ON the A/C compressor relay and
drives the A/C compressor. In order to prevent
change in engine speed due to increased load of
driving the compressor, it controls the A/C compres-
sor relay to drive the A/C compressor after idle-up is
complete. Also, in order to secure acceleration performance, it turns OFF the A/C compressor relay for
a fixed amount of time, if the throttle opening angle
increases beyond a prescribed limit.
MULTIPOINT FUEL INJECTION (MPI)
13A-41
ALTERNATOR CONTROL
ALTERNATOR CONTROL
M2132025000785
Alternator G terminal
Engine coolant
temperature sensor
Alternator FR terminal
Crank angle sensor
Engine-ECU
A/C switch (CAN)
Ignition switch-ST
Alternator
AK602242AL
During engine idle operation, engine-ECU controls
duty of conduction between alternator G terminal and
earth. (G terminal duty is controlled to be the same
as ON duty of the power transistor inside the voltage
regulator). If headlights etc. are turned on while
engine is idling, the consumed current increases
suddenly, but by gradually increasing the alternator
G terminal OFF duty, engine-ECU restricts sudden
increase in alternator output current and output current is increased only gradually. (Battery current is
supplied to the headlamp etc. till alternator produces
sufficient current.) Thus, engine-ECU prevents
change in idle speed due to sudden increase of
engine load.
PURGE CONTROL
M2132027500106
Refer to GROUP 17 − Emission Control − Evaporative Emission Control System .
CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK (CAN)
M2132019000957
CAN communication is established to ensure the reliable transmission of information. Refer to GROUP
54C − General Information .
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM
Engine-ECU has been provided with the following
functions for easier system inspection. Refer to the
workshop manual for the details about each item.
• Freeze-frame data function
• Diagnosis code function
• Data list function
• Actuator test function
M2132009002093
13B-1
GROUP 13B
FUEL SUPPLY
CONTENTS
GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . .
13B-2
FUEL TANK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13B-3
FUEL SUPPLY
13B-2
GENERAL INFORMATION
GENERAL INFORMATION
M2134000101676
•
•
•
•
•
The fuel system consists of the following components:
• Fuel injector
• Fuel delivery pipe
• Fuel vapour canister
Fuel high-pressure hose
Fuel line pipe
Fuel tank assembly
Fuel pump and gauge assembly
Fuel gauge unit <4WD>
SPECIFICATIONS
Item
Specification
Fuel tank capacity L
2WD
63
4WD
60
Fuel pump type
Electric (incorporates tank pump and gauge assembly)
Fuel filter type
Cartridge (incorporates tank pump and gauge assembly)
Fuel return system
Return less
Fuel pressure regulator control pressure kPa
324
Fuel injector
Type
Elector-magnetic
Quantity
4
Evaporative emission control system
Fuel vapour canister
CONSTRUCTION DIAGRAM
<2WD>
Fuel tank assembly
Fuel vapour canister
Fuel delivery pipe
Fuel injector
Fuel high-pressure hose
Fuel line pipe
Fuel pump and
gauge assembly
ACB05409AB
FUEL SUPPLY
13B-3
FUEL TANK
<4WD>
Fuel tank assembly
Fuel gauge unit
Fuel vapour canister
Fuel delivery pipe
Fuel injector
Fuel high-pressure hose
Fuel line pipe
Fuel pump and
gauge assembly
ACB05408AB
This fuel system is designed with consideration for
global environment protection to ensure safety at a
collision, reduce weight, and improve reliability and
quality. This system has the following features:
• A quick-joint connector of a plastic tube is used
for the fuel high-pressure hose in the engine
compartment to reduce the permeation of fuel
evaporative emission.
• The surface of under floor fuel line pipes is
coated with 1-mm thickness of resin to improve
resistance to corrosion and chipping.
• A return less fuel system eliminates returned fuel
from the engine. The heat that fuel receives from
the engine is reduced, minimising fuel temperature in the fuel tank and controlling the amount of
evaporated gas.
• The activated charcoal of fuel vapour canister is
modified for downsizing, weight saving and better
performance.
FUEL TANK
M2134001001672
The fuel tank assembly consists of components such
as a fuel pump and gauge assembly, a fuel gauge
unit, and a fuel tank, and has the following features:
• The fuel tank is mounted underneath the second
seat to improve safety at a collision.
• The fuel tank itself is made of a pre-coat galvanized steel sheet that contains no lead.
• The capacity of the fuel tank is 63 litres <2WD>
or 60 litres <4WD> to meet long-distance drives.
• A fuel tank safety valve, which prevents fuel leakage when the vehicle banks or rolls over, is
located inside the fuel tank for fewer openings
and hose bonding points on the fuel tank top surface.
• A built-in fuel filter and a fuel tank suction hose
have been adopted to meet the fuel tank of a saddleback shape. <4WD>
The fuel pump and gauge assembly consist of the
following components:
• Fuel pump
• Fuel gauge unit
• Fuel filter
• Fuel pressure regulator
FUEL SUPPLY
13B-4
FUEL TANK
CONSTRUCTION DIAGRAM
<2WD>
Fuel pump and
gauge assembly
Fuel tank
ACC00445AB
Fuel tank safety valve
Fuel tank safety valve
ACC00461AB
FUEL SUPPLY
13B-5
FUEL TANK
<4WD>
Fuel gauge unit
Fuel pump and
gauge assembly
Fuel tank
ACC00446AB
Fuel tank safety valve
Fuel tank safety valve
Fuel in tank filter
Fuel tank suction hose
ACC00462AB
14-1
GROUP 14
ENGINE COOLING
CONTENTS
GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . .
14-2
WATER PASSAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14-3
WATER PUMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14-3
ENGINE COOLING
14-2
GENERAL INFORMATION
GENERAL INFORMATION
M2140000101567
For the cooling method, a forced water-cooling circulation system is adopted and it has the following
characteristics:
• To reduce the coolant temperature variation, the
inlet control system which arranges the thermostat at the inlet side of the coolant flowing from
the radiator to the engine is adopted.
• A down-flow radiator has been adopted in order
to reduce the number of parts and improve serviceability.
• A ring fan has been adopted in order to reduce
noise.
• A radiator condenser tank is assembled into the
fan shroud in order to reduce the number of parts
and improve serviceability.
SPECIFICATIONS
Item
4B1
Cooling method
Water-cooled pressurised, forced circulation with
electrical fan
Water pump
Thermostat
Radiator
Engine coolant
Type
Centrifugal impeller
Drive method
Drive belt
Type
Wax pellet with jiggle valve
Valve open temperature °C
82 ± 1.5
Type
Pressurised corrugate type
Core size (width × height ×
thickness) mm
687.4 × 400 × 16
Performance kJ/h
201,800
Specified coolant
DIA QUEEN SUPER LONG LIFE COOLANT or
equivalent
Quantity (including 0.65 L in
Approximately 7.5
the radiator condenser tank) L
CONSTRUCTION DIAGRAM
Radiator assembly
Radiator upper hose assembly
Radiator condenser tank
Condenser fan motor
Radiator fan motor
Fan shroud
CVT fluid cooler
feed hose
CVT fluid cooler
return hose
Radiator lower hose
assembly
ACB05950 AB
ENGINE COOLING
14-3
WATER PASSAGE
WATER PASSAGE
M2140004000718
<Hot>
<Cold>
Thermostat
Water pump
Thermostat
Water pump
Heater
Heater
Throttle body
Throttle body
CVT
oil cooler
CVT
oil cooler
Radiator
Radiator
ACB04926AB
WATER PUMP
M2140003000492
The water pump is the centrifugal, impeller type that
is installed in front of the cylinder block. It is driven by
the drive belt.
Impeller
AK503034 AD
Item
Specifications
Discharge volume L/rpm
185/6 500
Impeller diameter mm
62
15-1
GROUP 15
INTAKE AND
EXHAUST
CONTENTS
AIR INTAKE SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . .
15-2
EXHAUST SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15-2
AIR DUCT AND AIR CLEANER . . . . . . . . .
15-2
EXHAUST MANIFOLD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15-2
INLET MANIFOLD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15-2
EXHAUST PIPE AND MUFFLER . . . . . . . .
15-3
INTAKE AND EXHAUST
15-2
AIR INTAKE SYSTEM
AIR INTAKE SYSTEM
AIR DUCT AND AIR CLEANER
M2150004001381
CONSTRUCTION DIAGRAM
Resonator
Air cleaner assembly
Air duct
ACB05021AB
In order to save weight, an air cleaner element without plastics is used and the panel thicknesses of the
cover and the housing are optimised.
INLET MANIFOLD
M2150010000666
The inlet manifold is made of plastic for weight
reduction, and the surface roughness of the inner
walls of the ports has been improved to reduce
intake resistance.
EXHAUST SYSTEM
EXHAUST MANIFOLD
M2150006001105
The exhaust manifold incorporates a catalytic converter. In order to reduce vibration, a spherical joint is
used at the front pipe connection.
INTAKE AND EXHAUST
15-3
EXHAUST SYSTEM
EXHAUST PIPE AND MUFFLER
M2150003001775
CONSTRUCTION DIAGRAM
Hanger bracket
Tail pipe
Hanger bracket
Catalytic converter
Hanger bracket
Main muffler
Annular joint
Sub muffler
Annular joint
ACB05022AB
Exhaust pipe and muffler consisting of two separation system has the following features:
• Improve emission gas cleaning ability by adopting rear exhaust system and placing front catalytic converter by engine as close as possible.
• A 4-point exhaust muffler hanger has been
adopted for optimisation of position, which
reduces vibration to the vehicle.
• The spherical joint has been adopted for connection between the front exhaust pipe and the
exhaust manifold, and between the exhaust pipe
and the centre exhaust pipe, which reduces
vibration to the vehicle.
16-1
GROUP 16
ENGINE
ELECTRICAL
CONTENTS
STARTER MOTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
16-2
IGNITION COIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
16-2
ALTERNATOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
16-2
SPARK PLUG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
16-2
ENGINE ELECTRICAL
16-2
STARTER MOTOR
STARTER MOTOR
M2161002000728
The starter motor is a reduction drive type with planetary gear.
ALTERNATOR
M2162001000687
The alternator is the battery detection type.
IGNITION COIL
M2163001000561
Coil
AKB00492AB
The ignition coil is the plug-top type.
This plug-top type ignition coil has the following features:
• A durable low-tension distribution system is
adopted.
• A separate igniting system is adopted. Due to
this, high voltage generated in the ignition coils
can be delivered into the spark plugs effectively.
• Low fuel consumption due to combustion stabilisation
• Compact and light weight
SPARK PLUG
M2163005000499
Iridium-tipped spark plugs are used.
17-1
GROUP 17
ENGINE AND
EMISSION
CONTROL
CONTENTS
ENGINE CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GENERAL INFORMATION. . . . . . . . . . . . .
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM . . . . . .
17-2
EMISSION CONTROLMPI . . . . . . . . .
17-7
17-2
GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . .
17-7
CRANKCASE VENTILATION SYSTEM . . .
17-8
17-2
GENERAL INFORMATION. . . . . . . . . . . . .
17-2
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
......................................
17-9
CONSTRUCTION AND OPERATION . . . .
17-5
EMISSION REDUCTION SYSTEMS. . . . . .
17-10
ENGINE AND EMISSION CONTROL
17-2
ENGINE CONTROL
ENGINE CONTROL
GENERAL INFORMATION
M2170001001522
For the accelerator system, an electronic throttle
valve control system has been adopted, eliminating
of an accelerator cable.
This system detects the amount of the accelerator
pedal movement by using an accelerator pedal position sensor in the accelerator pedal assembly for
electronically controls the throttle valve.
CONSTRUCTION DIAGRAM
Accelerator pedal assembly
(Built-in accelerator pedal
position sensor)
AC606134 AB
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM
GENERAL INFORMATION
M2170001001533
The cruise control system, which provides the constant speed driving without depressing the accelerator pedal at a vehicle speed determined by the driver
(within the range from approx. 40 to 200 km/h).
For this cruise control system, in conjunction with the
electronic throttle valve control system, the
engine-ECU electronically controls the throttle valve.
ENGINE AND EMISSION CONTROL
17-3
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM
CONSTRUCTION DIAGRAM
Accelerator pedal
(Built-in accelerator
pedal position sensor)
<Standard meter>
Cruise control indicator lamp
Hydraulic unit Assembly
(Built-in ABS-ECU
<Vehicles without ASC>
or ASC-ECU
<Vehicles with ASC>)
ACC00039
<High contrast meter>
"SET" mark
Cruise control display screen
SET
Throttle body assembly
(Built-in throttle position
sensor and throttle valve
control servo)
Inhibitor switch
Multi information
display
Engine-ECU
ACC00040
Stop lamp switch
Cruise control switch
Diagnosis connector
ACB04452
ACB05987
Engine-ECU
Relay box
ETACS-ECU
ACB04414
ACB04416
ACB05843 AB
ENGINE AND EMISSION CONTROL
17-4
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM
COMPONENTS AND FUNCTIONS
Component
Function
ABS-ECU <Vehicles without ASC> or
ASC-ECU <Vehicles with ASC>
Outputs the cruise control cancel signal to the engine-ECU.
Accelerator pedal position sensor
Informs the engine-ECU of the accelerator pedal depression.
Cruise control indicator lamp <standard
meter> or cruise control display screen
<high contrast meter>
When the ON/OFF switch is pressed, a lamp will illuminate or a
screen will be displayed to inform the driver that the cruise
control system is active.
Cruise control
switch
Cruise control ON/OFF Power switch for cruise control system.
switch
RES + switch
Vehicle speed is set with the RES + switch and SET − switch.
SET − switch
CANCEL switch
Cancels the constant speed driving.
CVT-ECU
• Controls the CVT based on the CVT control signal from the
engine-ECU.
• The selector lever "N" position signal from the inhibitor switch
is sent to the engine-ECU.
• Outputs the signal from the secondary pulley speed sensor to
the engine-ECU.
Diagnosis connector
If the M.U.T.-III is connected, the diagnosis code and data list
from the engine-ECU can be read.
Engine-ECU
• Based on the input signal from each sensors and switches,
the throttle opening angle indication signal is sent.
• Based on the input signal from each sensors and switches,
the CVT control signal is sent to the CVT-ECU.
• Based on the secondary pulley speed sensor signal from the
CVT-ECU, it calculates the vehicle speed.
• Based on the selector lever "N" position signal from the
CVT-ECU, it cancels constant speed driving.
• To the cruise control indicator lamp, the cruise control system
ON/OFF signal is sent.
• The diagnosis codes of the cruise control system are sent to
the cruise control indicator lamp.
• The data list of the cruise control system is sent to the
diagnosis connector.
Inhibitor switch
The constant speed driving is cancelled by the selector lever
operation, the "N" position is detected.
Stop lamp switch
• The constant speed driving is cancelled by the brake
operation, the brake pedal operation is detected.
• As for the stop lamp switch, two built-in switches, the stop
lamp switch which is also used for the stop lamp illumination
and the brake switch which is used exclusively for the cruise
control, are integrated, and thus the reliability is enhanced.
Throttle valve control servo
The throttle valve opens and closes in response to the throttle
angle control signal from the engine-ECU.
Throttle position sensor
Informs the engine-ECU of the throttle valve opening angle.
ENGINE AND EMISSION CONTROL
17-5
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM
CONSTRUCTION AND OPERATION
M2170002000890
The cruise control section in engine-ECU calculates
the cruise control system operation condition based
on the signals sent from switches and sensors.
Based on the calculation, the cruise control section
outputs the target accelerator pedal opening angle
signal to the engine control section, and CVT control
signal to CVT-ECU, and cruise control status
(ON/OFF, etc.) to the combination meter, respectively.
In the engine control section, the target throttle valve
opening angle is calculated based on the target
accelerator pedal opening angle signal from the
cruise control section and the actual accelerator
pedal opening angle signal from the accelerator
pedal position sensor, and the vehicle speed is controlled by operating the throttle valve control servo.
The combination meter will turn on the cruise control
indicator lamp <Standard meter> or the cruise control display screen <High contrast meter> when the
cruise control system is active. On the high contrast
meter, "SET" symbol will also appear in the screen
during constant speed driving.
BLOCK DIAGRAM
Cruise control switch
Accelerator pedal
position sensor
Stop lamp switch
Stop lamp switch signal
ETACS-ECU
Engine-ECU
Cruise control
switch signal
Stop lamp
switch signal
(CAN)
Brake
switch
signal
Target accelerator
pedal opening
angle signal
Cruise control section
Inhibitor
switch
signal
(CAN)
Cruise control
ON/OFF signal
(CAN)
Combination meter
(Cruise control
indicator lamp/
Cruise control
display screen)
Secondary
pulley
speed sensor
signal (CAN)
Secondary
pulley
speed sensor
signal
CVT
Engine control section
CVT control
signal (CAN)
CVT-ECU
Inhibitor
switch
signal
Actual accelerator
pedal opening
angle signal
CVT control
signal
Target
throttle
valve
opening
angle
signal
Throttle
valve
opening
angle
signal
Throttle valve Throttle position
control servo sensor
ACB05685
SYSTEM FUNCTIONS
SET FUNCTION
1. While driving in the vehicle speed range of
approximately 40 to 200 km/h, press the SET −
switch.
2. The cruise control system stores the vehicle
speed when the SET − switch is released, and
then performs a constant speed driving at the
stored vehicle speed.
3. When the SET − switch is operated while driving
at the vehicle speed of high speed limit
(approximately 200 km/h) or faster, the constant
speed driving is not performed.
17-6
ENGINE AND EMISSION CONTROL
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM
4. When the SET − switch is operated while driving
at the vehicle speed of low speed limit
(approximately 40 km/h) or slower, the constant
speed driving is not performed.
DECELERATION FUNCTION
1. When the SET − switch is pressed and held for
approximately 0.5 second or longer during the
constant speed driving, the vehicle is decelerated
by using engine braking while the switch is
pressed.
2. After that the SET − switch is released, the vehicle
speed of that time is newly stored, and then the
constant speed driving is performed at that speed.
3. In addition, when the SET − switch is pressed for
less than approximately 0.5 second, the vehicle
speed is decreased by approximately 1.6 km/h
from the constant speed driving speed. The
decelerated speed is newly stored, and then the
constant speed driving is performed at that speed.
4. When the SET − switch is pressed and held, and
the vehicle speed is decelerated to low speed limit
(approximately 40 km/h) , the low speed limit will
be maintained.
RESUME FUNCTION
1. During the constant speed driving, press the
CANCEL switch, or depress the brake pedal to
cancel the constant speed driving.
2. Afterward, when the RES + switch is pressed
while driving at a vehicle speed of low speed limit
(approximately 40 km/h) or more, a constant
speed driving is performed at the vehicle speed
stored when the constant speed driving was
cancelled.
ACCELERATION FUNCTION
1. During the constant speed driving, when the RES
+ switch is pressed and held for approximately 0.5
seconds or longer, the vehicle is accelerated with
the specified acceleration while the switch is
pressed.
2. After that the RES + switch is released, the
vehicle speed of that time is newly stored, and
then the constant speed driving is performed at
that speed.
3. In addition when the RES + switch is pressed for
less than approximately 0.5 second, the vehicle
speed is increased by approximately 1.6 km/h
from the constant speed driving speed. The
accelerated vehicle speed is newly stored, and
then the constant speed driving is performed at
that speed.
CANCEL FUNCTION
When any of the following conditions are satisfied,
the constant speed driving will be cancelled.
• The cruise control system is stopped by the
pressing the cruise control ON/OFF switch.
• The CANCEL switch is pressed.
• The brake pedal is depressed.
• The selector lever is shifted to the "N" position.
• The vehicle speed becomes low speed limit
(approximately 40 km/h) or less.
• The vehicle speed is decreased by 15 km/h or
more from the setting vehicle speed.
• An abnormality occurs in the vehicle speed signal.
• The ASC is operated.
• An abnormality occurs in CVT-ECU.
• An abnormality occurs in the CAN communication.
LAST STATUS MEMORY FUNCTION
The system stores cruise control ON/OFF status of
the cruise control when the ignition switch is turned
off. Then, when the ignition switch is turned on the
next time, the system will resume the stored status.
FAIL-SAFE FUNCTION
When one of the following conditions is met, the
cruise control system function will be suspended until
the system returns to normal condition. Also, when
one of the following conditions is met, a constant
speed driving is cancelled immediately.
• An abnormality occurs in the cruise control
switch.
• An abnormality occurs in the stop lamp signal.
When one of the following conditions is met, unless
the vehicle is stopped to turn the ignition switch to
the "LOCK" (OFF) position, the cruise control system
function will be suspended even if the system returns
to the normal state. Also, one of the following conditions is met, a constant speed driving is cancelled
immediately.
• Engine-ECU abnormality.
• An abnormality occurs in the vehicle speed signal.
• Throttle position sensor abnormality.
• Accelerator pedal position sensor abnormality.
DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION
To ease the system inspection, the diagnosis code
inspection, data list inspection is available by
M.U.T.-III.
NOTE: For the diagnosis code items and input check
code items, refer to the Workshop Manual.
ENGINE AND EMISSION CONTROL
17-7
EMISSION CONTROL<MPI>
EMISSION CONTROL<MPI>
GENERAL INFORMATION
M2171000101756
The emission control is basically the same as the
4B1 engine mounted on the ASX.
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION DIAGRAM
Purge control
solenoid valve
Canister
Air
Air cleaner
From
fuel pump
Positive
crankcase
ventilation
valve
Catalytic
converter
Catalytic
converter
Oxygen sensor (rear)
Oxygen sensor (front)
AKB00864 AB
Exhaust gas cleaning devices list
System
Objective / Function
Composition parts
Crankcase ventilation system
HC decrease
Re-combustion of blow-by
gas.
Positive crankcase ventilation
(PCV) valve
Evaporative emission control system
HC decrease
Re-combustion of blow-by
gas.
• Canister
• Purge control solenoid valve
ENGINE AND EMISSION CONTROL
17-8
EMISSION CONTROL<MPI>
System
Objective / Function
Composition parts
Emission reduction Air-fuel ratio
systems
feedback control
Decrease of CO, HC and
NOx
Controls air-fuel ratio of
air-fuel mixture to become
theoretical air-fuel ratio
(about 14.7), which is when
the 3-way catalytic
converter's cleaning
performance is best. It also
controls optimum fuel
supply based on coolant
temperature, driving
conditions etc.
•
•
•
•
•
Catalytic
converter
Engine-ECU
Air flow sensor
Injector
Oxygen sensor
Crank angle sensor etc.
Decrease of CO, HC and
Monolith catalyst
NOx
It facilitates oxidation of CO
and HC and reduction of
NOx so that all 3 component
gases are cleaned
simultaneously.
CRANKCASE VENTILATION SYSTEM
M2171000400583
Ventilation hose
Air inlet
Positive
crankcase
ventilation
valve
Breather hose
Flow of blow-by gas and clean air (low load area)
Flow of blow-by gas and clean air (high load area)
AKB00825AB
A blow-by gas reduction device prevents blow-by
gas from being expelled into the atmosphere and is
of closed type. A positive crankcase ventilation
(PCV) valve is provided in the ventilation hose from
the rocker cover to the inlet manifold. During low load
driving, clean air is supplied to the crankcase by the
air intake hose via the breather hose and rocker
ENGINE AND EMISSION CONTROL
17-9
EMISSION CONTROL<MPI>
cover, and it mixes with the blow-by gas in the crankcase. The blow-by gas in the crankcase is induced to
the inlet manifold through the rocker cover and PCV
valve. During high load driving, blow-by gas in the
crankcase is induced to the inlet manifold through
the rocker cover and PCV valve and at the same
time also via the air intake hose and throttle body
due to negative pressure in the air cleaner.
POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION
(PCV) VALVE
From
rocker
cover
To inlet
manifold
Spring
Plunger
AK602324 AF
PCV valve lifts the plunger according to negative
pressure at the inlet manifold to create appropriate
ventilation for the crankcase.
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
M2171000200590
Battery
Purge control
solenoid valve
Canister
Air flow sensor
Intake air temperature sensor
Manifold absolute
pressure sensor
Engine coolant
temperature sensor
Crank angle sensor
Engine-ECU
Throttle position sensor
AKB00826AB
HC (hydrocarbon) generated in the fuel tank are
adsorbed by the active carbon in the canister and
stored. HC stored in the canister is introduced to the
inlet manifold when engine is in operation where it is
mixed with intake air and combusted. Engine-ECU
introduces optimum HC amount according to driving
conditions and so performs duty control on the purge
control solenoid valve. Also, the purge control solenoid valve is closed during deceleration or immediately after engine start to restrict change in air-fuel
ratio and prevent engine from stalling.
PURGE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
To canister
B
A
To inlet manifold
AK602742AF
ENGINE AND EMISSION CONTROL
17-10
EMISSION CONTROL<MPI>
A purge control solenoid valve is installed in the inlet
manifold. The purge control solenoid valve controls
the intake volume of fuel vapour gas from the canister. The purge control solenoid valve is a duty control
type solenoid valve. When current is not passing
through the coil, nipple A is kept airtight and fuel
vapour gas cannot be sucked in. When current
passes through the coil, air can pass between nipple
A and B and fuel vapour gas is sucked in.
Engine-ECU changes the ON duty ratio according to
engine's operating condition to control the intake volume of fuel vapour gas.
From engine control relay
100 ms
OFF
12V
Purge control
solenoid valve
0V
ON
Engine-ECU
AK602245AC
EMISSION REDUCTION SYSTEMS
2. CATALYTIC CONVERTER
M2171000800439
These decrease CO, HC and NOx in the exhaust
gases and consist of air-fuel ratio feedback control
and catalytic converter.
Catalytic converter
(built-in to exhaust manifold)
1. AIR-FUEL RATIO FEEDBACK CONTROL
Refer to GROUP 13A − Fuel Injection Control .
Catalytic converter
(built-in to centre exhaust pipe)
Front exhaust pipe
AKC00010AB
The exhaust manifold and the centre exhaust pipe
include a catalytic converter.
Based on appropriate air-fuel ratio feedback from
oxygen sensor, CO and HC are oxidized and NOx is
reduced. Catalytic converter is a monolith with beehive design with catalysts on the unit surface. It is
protected by a thermally insulating mat and enclosed
in a shell.
23-1
GROUP 23
CONTINUOUSLY
VARIABLE
TRANSMISSION
(CVT)
CONTENTS
CVT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GENERAL INFORMATION. . . . . . . . . . . . .
23-2
TRANSMISSION CONTROL . . . . . . .
23-3
23-2
GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . .
23-3
CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE TRANSMISSION (CVT)
23-2
CVT
CVT
GENERAL INFORMATION
M2231000100585
SPECIFICATIONS
The CVT is basically the same as for the predecessor. However, note that a new gear ratio control is
adopted in order to reduce slip unique to the CVT.
Transmission model
F1CJA-2-A5W
Engine model
4B11
Drive system
2WD
Torque converter
4WD
3-element, 1-stage, 2-phase
Stall torque ratio
1.99
Lock-up
Present
Forward
2.349 − 0.394
Reverse
1.750
6.466
Control type
Electronically-controlled
Shift control
Present
Line pressure control Present
Select control
Present
Lock-up control
Present
Self-diagnosis
function
Present
Fail-safe function
Present
Number of speedometer gears
(drive/driven)
− (detected by the ABS sensor)
Oil pump
Model
Vane-type pump
Drive type
Driven by the engine, sprocket, and chain
Brand name
MITSUBISHI MOTORS GENUINE CVTF-J4
Capacity (L)
Approximately 7.1
CVT fluid
1.83
Forward automatic CVT (steel belt-driven), reverse 1 speed
Final reduction gear ratio
Function
W1CJA-1-14YA
4B12
Model
Transmission type
Gear ratio
W1CJA-2-A5WA
CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE TRANSMISSION (CVT)
23-3
TRANSMISSION CONTROL
NEW ACCELERATION CONTROL
: New
Accelerator pedal
operation
: Conventional
%
Time
New: To reduce a feel of untimely shifting, the downshift amount at
the initial acceleration is adjusted. In addition, the upshift amount
is restricted at the later acceleration with the aim of providing
the acceleration feeling like a multi-stage transmission.
CVT gear ratio
Ratio
Time
Engine speed
Conventional: The downshift is carried out quickly at the initial
acceleration and after that the upshift is carried out with vehicle
speed increase.
New: The engine speed increases gradually in conjunction
with acceleration.
Conventional: The engine speed increases quickly at
the initial acceleration.
r/min
Time
New: Acceleration feeling is sustained
Acceleration
Conventional: Acceleration feeling is NOT sustained
G
Time
ACB03776AB
A new acceleration control has been employed, in
which the engine speed and vehicle speed respond
linearly to an accelerator pedal operation to reduce
the CVT-specific slippage feel.
Moreover, both comfortable acceleration and power
output performance have been achieved at the same
time by increasing the acceleration G with increase
of the engine speed.
TRANSMISSION CONTROL
GENERAL INFORMATION
M2232000100823
• The gate-type selector lever with excellent operability has been employed to provide an appropriate control force and a crisp operation feel.
• Shift lock and key interlock mechanisms of reliable electric type have been adopted.
• The weight reduction of the selector lever assembly has been realised by structural rationalisation.
• There are two types of the selector lever knob;
sporty black and luxurious leather.
• The black shift indicator panel enhances the
sporty image.
• Paddle shift is available on certain models.
23-4
CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE TRANSMISSION (CVT)
TRANSMISSION CONTROL
Transmission control cable
Selector lever
assembly
ACC00027AB
25-1
GROUP 25
PROPELLER SHAFT
CONTENTS
GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . .
25-2
PROPELLER SHAFT
25-2
GENERAL INFORMATION
GENERAL INFORMATION
M2250000100829
The 2-piece, 3-joint type propeller shaft with a centre
bearing is adopted.
It has the following features:
• An insulator is installed to the vehicle body joint of
the centre bearing to reduce vibration.
• Inside the rear propeller shaft, the dynamic
damper is integrated to reduce a booming noise
cased by the resonance at the high engine
speed.
• Adopting the friction welding method, the installation structure is streamlined to reduce the weight.
• Lead-free grease is adopted for the universal
joint.
SPECIFICATIONS
Item
Specifications
Propeller shaft
Type
Universal joint
Type
2-piece, 3-joint type propeller shaft
No.1
Cross type (caulking method)
No.2
Constant velocity type
No.3
Cross type (caulking method)
Bearing
Needle roller bearing (maintenance-free type)
CONSTRUCTION DIAGRAM
Rear propeller shaft
Front propeller Centre bearing
shaft
No.1 joint
No.3 joint
AC602513AD
No.2 joint
Insulator
AC504845 AB
Dynamic damper
AC504844 AB
26-1
GROUP 26
FRONT AXLE
CONTENTS
GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . .
26-2
FRONT AXLE
26-2
GENERAL INFORMATION
GENERAL INFORMATION
M2260000101533
For the front axle, the multi-line angular contact ball
bearing with an integral oil seal is adopted as a
wheel bearing, and EBJ-PTJ type constant velocity
joint as a driveshaft.
It has the following features:
• The lightweight and compact EBJ-type constant
velocity joint is installed on the wheel side of the
driveshaft, and the vibration reduced PTJ-type
constant velocity joint is installed on the differential side.
• For the driveshaft (RH), instead of the conventional output shaft, the long stem integrated with
the differential side constant velocity joint is
adopted to streamline the structure. <4WD>
• Dynamic damper is mounted on driveshaft (RH)
to reduce differential booming noise. <2000>
• Lead-free grease for the constant velocity joint is
adopted.
• Hexavalent chromium is eliminated from the dust
cover material.
• The number of parts is reduced by integrating the
magnetic encoder for ABS wheel speed detection
into the wheel bearing.
NOTE: .
EBJ (High Efficiency Compact Undercut Joint):
the lighter and smaller constant velocity joint compared with the conventional BJ has been achieved
by adopting the eight small balls.
PTJ (Pillow Tripod Joint)
SPECIFICATIONS
Item
Wheel bearing
Drive shaft
Specifications
Bearing type
Unit bearing (Double-row angular contact ball
bearing)
Bearing (Outer diameter × inside
diameter) (mm)
80 × 43
Joint type
Outside
EBJ
Inside
PTJ
LH
392.5 × 25.4
RH
708.0 × 34.0 <2WD>, 509.0 × 29.0 <4WD>
Shaft length* × shaft
diameter (mm)
NOTE: *: Indicates the distance between each joint centre.
FRONT AXLE
26-3
GENERAL INFORMATION
CONSTRUCTION DIAGRAM
Strut assembly
AC602514
ACB04894
PTJ
<LH>
Knuckle
Driveshaft (LH)
PTJ
Driveshaft (RH)
<RH - 4WD>
EBJ
Dynamic damper
Front hub
PTJ
<RH - 2WD>
Wheel bearing
Oil seal
Magnetic
encoder
AC504925
Driveshaft (RH)
ACC00499AB
27-1
GROUP 27
REAR AXLE
CONTENTS
REAR AXLE <2WD> . . . . . . . . . . . . .
27-2
REAR AXLE <4WD> . . . . . . . . . . . . .
27-2
DIFFERENTIAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
27-3
ELECTRONICALLY CONTROLLED 4WD
.................................
27-5
GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . .
27-5
4WD-ECU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
27-11
4WD SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
27-13
ELECTRONIC CONTROL COUPLING . . . .
27-13
REAR AXLE
27-2
REAR AXLE <2WD>
REAR AXLE <2WD>
M2270002000325
The rear axle has the following features:
• The wheel bearing is a unit ball bearing (double-row angular contact ball bearing) which incorporates the oil seals and is highly resistant to
thrust loads.
• The number of parts has been reduced by integrating the magnetic encoder for ABS wheel
speed detection into the wheel bearing.
SPECIFICATIONS
Item
Wheel bearing
Specification
Bearing type
Unit ball bearing (double-row angular contact ball bearing)
CONSTRUCTION DIAGRAM
Rear hub
Ball bearing
Magnetic encoder
Oil seal
ACB05764AB
REAR AXLE <4WD>
M2270003000436
For the rear axle, the unit ball bearing (double-row
angular contact ball bearing) in which the hub and
ball bearing are incorporated has been adopted for
the wheel bearing, and the EUJ−ETJ type constant
velocity joint for the driveshaft.
The following features are also available.
• The lightweight and compact EUJ type constant
velocity joint has been installed on the wheel side
of the driveshaft, and the lightweight compact
ETJ type constant velocity joint has been
installed on the differential side.
• Adoption of the electronic control 4WD optimizes
the size of the driveshaft constant velocity joint
and achieves the weight saving.
REAR AXLE
27-3
DIFFERENTIAL
• Lead-free grease for the constant velocity joint
has been adopted.
• Hexavalent chromium has been eliminated from
the dust cover material.
• The number of parts has been reduced by integrating the magnetic encoder for ABS wheel
speed detection into the wheel bearing.
EUJ (High Efficiency Compact Undercut Joint):The
lighter and smaller constant velocity joint compared with the conventional UJ has been
achieved by adopting the eight small balls.
ETJ (High Efficiency Compact Tripod Joint):The
lighter and smaller constant velocity joint compared with the conventional TJ has been
installed.
SPECIFICATIONS
Item
Specification
Wheel bearing
Bearing type
Driveshaft
Joint type
Unit ball bearing (double-row angular
contact ball bearing)
Shaft length* × Shaft diameter mm
Outer
EUJ
Inner
ETJ
LH
496.0 × 24
RH
576.4 × 24
NOTE: *: Indicates the distance between the centre of each joint.
CONSTRUCTION DIAGRAM
Differential carrier
Electronic control coupling
Driveshaft
Rear hub
Ball bearing
Rear hub
Magnetic
encoder
Oil seal
ACB05765 AB
DIFFERENTIAL
M2270001000786
With the introduction of the electronic control 4WD,
the electronic control coupling has been installed in
front of the differential.
REAR AXLE
27-4
DIFFERENTIAL
The electronic control coupling transfers the drive
force to the rear wheels by pushing the clutch in
according to the strength of the magnetic attraction
generated by the magnetic coil (For more details,
refer to Electronic Control 4WD P.27-5).
The following features are also available.
• Aluminium differential carrier has been adopted
for weight saving.
• Optimization of the hypoid gear ratio reduces the
torque loss.
• Adoption of the hypoid gear with the same teeth
height realizes the downsizing and increases the
strength of the coupling.
SPECIFICATIONS
Item
Specification
Reduction gear type
Hypoid gear
Reduction ratio
2.352
Differential gear type
(Type × Quantity)
Side gear
Straight bevel gear × 2
Pinion gear
Straight bevel gear × 2
Number of teeth
Drive gear
40
Drive pinion
17
Side gear
14
Pinion gear
10
Gear oil
Hypoid gear oil API classification GL-5, Approx. 0.4 L
SAE 80W
Differential carrier
Electronic control coupling
Equal altitude
toothed gear
Bevel gear
Hypoid gear
ACB05766AB
Electronic control coupling
Clutch
Differential
Electromagnet
ACB05767AB
REAR AXLE
27-5
ELECTRONICALLY CONTROLLED 4WD
DIFFERENTIAL MOUNT
Rear suspension
crossmember
Upper stopper
Rear differential
mount insulator
Lower
stopper
Upper stopper
Weight
Rear differential mount
front bracket (LH)
Rear differential mount
front bracket (RH)
Electronic control coupling
Lower stopper
Differential carrier
Weight
ACB05770AB
The front side of the differential carrier is installed to
the rear suspension crossmember via rear differential mount front bracket (LH/RH). The rear side of the
differential carrier is installed to the rear suspension
crossmember via rear differential mount insulator. In
this way, the adoption of the three-point support type
differential mount and the optimization of the layout
reduce the vibration and noise.
ELECTRONICALLY CONTROLLED 4WD
GENERAL INFORMATION
M2270000101125
• Electronically controlled 4WD has been adopted
to ensure the on-road performance, achieve
lighter and smaller body, and realize better fuel
economy.
• The electronically controlled 4WD controls the
torque of the electronic control coupling located
between the propeller shaft and rear differential.
This strategy is enabled by varying the torque
distribution to the front and rear wheels from the
status closer to the front wheel drive to the status
closer to the direct coupling 4WD and realizes the
optimal drive force according to the various driving conditions.
27-6
REAR AXLE
ELECTRONICALLY CONTROLLED 4WD
AIMS OF DEVELOPMENT
Lightweight and simple construction of the electronically controlled 4WD achieves good fuel efficiency
and provides enjoyment of selecting the drive mode.
FUNCTION
• The adoption of the electronic control coupling
prevents the tight corner braking phenomenon*
and satisfies the traction performance.
NOTE: *Tight corner braking indicates the following
condition. When the 4WD vehicle turns sharply
on a pavement at low speed (ex. parallel parking), the rotational radius of the front and rear
wheels differs, and this difference can no longer
be compensated by the tyre slippage. At this
time, the driver feels as if the brake was applied.
• The electronically controlled 4WD receives the
signals of the throttle position and vehicle speed
via CAN* communication protocol, detects the
vehicle driving condition and operation of the
driver, and distributes the proper torque to the
rear wheels.
NOTE: *: For more information about CAN (Controller Area Network), refer to GROUP 54C .
• Under severe driving condition, the system is protected by minimizing the limitation force of the differential.
• During high-speed driving, the fuel efficiency is
improved by reducing the limitation force of the
differential.
• The following drive modes are available according to the drivers' preference to provide the enjoyment of selecting functions.
Drive
mode
Control content
Appeal point
4WD
ECO
Minimizes the
limitation force of
the differential.
High fuel efficiency
mode. This mode is
ordinary driven on
efficient 2WD and
provides 4WD
performance on
wheel slipping
conditions.
4WD
AUTO
Increases the
limitation force of
the differential
according to the
different rotation
speed of the front
and rear wheels
and the throttle
position.
Normal mode. This
mode achieves
adequate 4WD
performance on
various conditions,
dried pavement, wet
road, snow road, etc.
4WD
LOCK
Further increases
the limitation force
of the differential
compared to the
4WD AUTO.
High traction mode.
This mode excels at
rough road driving
and escape from
stuck conditions, in
addition, realizes
strong 4WD driving
from low speed to
high speed on
ordinary road.
REAR AXLE
27-7
ELECTRONICALLY CONTROLLED 4WD
CONSTRUCTION DIAGRAM
Steering wheel sensor
Combination meter
ABS/ASC-ECU
4WD switch
ETACS-ECU
Engine-ECU
4WD-ECU
Electronic control coupling
CVT-ECU
Diagnosis connector
< Standard meter>
Drive mode indicator
< High contrast meter>
Drive mode display
ACB05569 AB
System component and function
Parts name
Functional description
Engine ECU
Sends the following signals required by 4WD-ECU via CAN
communication.
• Engine torque signal
• Throttle position signal
• Engine speed signal
CVT-ECU
Sends the following signals required by 4WD-ECU via CAN
communication.
• Gear position signal
ABS/ASC-ECU
Sends the following signals required by 4WD-ECU via CAN
communication.
• ABS sensor signal (4 wheels speed signal)
• ABS/ASC operation signal
• 4WD limitation torque signal
27-8
REAR AXLE
ELECTRONICALLY CONTROLLED 4WD
Parts name
Functional description
Steering wheel sensor
Sends the following signals required by 4WD-ECU via CAN
communication.
• Steering angle signal
4WD switch
Sends the drive mode switch signal (4WD) to 4WD-ECU.
ETACS-ECU
Receives drive mode-related information (4WD ECO, 4WD AUTO, 4WD
LOCK), failure information and protection information from the 4WD-ECU,
and then sends them to the combination meter.
4WD-ECU
Calculates the optimum differential limitation force judging from the vehicle
condition and present drive mode based on the signals from each ECU and
switch, and controls the current value flown to the electronic control
coupling.
Controls the indicators (4WD ECO, 4WD AUTO, 4WD LOCK) in the
combination meter.
Controls the self-diagnostic function and fail-safe function.
Controls diagnostic function (Compatible with M.U.T.-III).
Electronic control coupling
Transmits the torque corresponding to the current value controlled by
4WD-ECU to the rear wheels.
Drive mode indicator
Integrated in the combination meter, and indicates the selected drive mode.
• When the 4WD system fails or is protected, the "4WD-E" or"LOCK"
indicator will flash simultaneously or alternately, and the system
automatically will enter the front wheel drive mode to protect the drive
system components, and the drive mode changeover with the 4WD
switch will become unavailable. <Standard meter>
• When the 4WD system fails or is protected, a message will be
displayed, and the system automatically will enter the front wheel drive
mode to protect the drive system components, and the drive mode
changeover with the 4WD switch will become unavailable. <High
contrast meter>
• The drive mode signal from 4WD-ECU is sent to the combination meter
via ETACS-ECU using CAN communication.
Diagnosis connector
Outputs the diagnosis code and establishes the communication with
M.U.T.-III.
REAR AXLE
27-9
ELECTRONICALLY CONTROLLED 4WD
System configuration
Engine-ECU
ETACS-ECU
ABS/ASC-ECU
CAN-C
Steering wheel
sensor
CVT-ECU
Combination meter
CAN-C-Mid
CAN-C
Diagnosis
connector
4WD-ECU
Engine
Electronic control coupling
Transmission
4WD switch
NOTE:The dashed line indicates CAN communication lines (CAN-C, CAN-C-Mid).
ACC00455 AB
REAR AXLE
27-10
ELECTRONICALLY CONTROLLED 4WD
Control schematic diagram
4WD switch
(4WD ECO
4WD AUTO
4WD LOCK)
Engine-ECU
· Engine r/min
· Engine torque
4WD-ECU
CAN-C
Coupling torque
CAN-C-Mid
ETACS-ECU
ABS/ASC-ECU
· 4 wheels speed
· 4WD torque reduction
requirement
· Yaw rate, longitudinal
and lateral acceleration
ETACS-ECU
· Vehicle information
· Key position
· Battery voltage
· Ambient temperature
· Stop lamp switch
Combination meter
· Drive mode indicator
or display
· Fail information
Diagnosis output
CAN-C
ABS/ASC-ECU
· Drive mode
· Coupling torque
CVT-ECU
· Gear position
Steering wheel sensor
· Steering angle
NOTE:The dashed line indicates CAN communication
lines (CAN-C, CAN-C-Mid).
ACC00456 AB
REAR AXLE
27-11
ELECTRONICALLY CONTROLLED 4WD
Electronically controlled 4WD electric circuit diagram
Fusible link
Ignition switch(IG1)
Fusible link
ETACS-ECU
(Fuse)
ETACS-ECU
(Fuse)
15 A
IG1
relay
10 A
Electronic control
coupling solenoid
7.5 A
4WD-ECU
4WD switch
ABS/ASC
-ECU
Engine-ECU
CVT-ECU
ETACS-ECU
Steering
wheel sensor
LCD
Diagnosis
connector
4WD ECO
4WD AUTO
4WD LOCK
Combination meter
NOTE:The dashed line indicates CAN communication lines.
4WD-ECU
M2270000500078
FUNCTION
The main functions of 4WD-ECU are as follows:
ACB05564 AC
1. Communication function
• CAN communication with other ECUs (Engine
ECU, CVT-ECU, ABS/ASC-ECU, steering
wheel sensor, ETACS)
27-12
REAR AXLE
ELECTRONICALLY CONTROLLED 4WD
• Communication with drive mode switch: The
signal from the drive mode switch changes
the drive mode.
• Combination meter display: Drive mode is displayed.
2. Coupling control function
• Current output: Differential control function of
the electronic control coupling according to
the vehicle conditions
3. ECU self-diagnosis function
• Initial check: ROM check, relay check, etc.
• Recording function of diagnosis codes and
freeze frame data in case of failure
• System shutdown function after failure detection, "4WD-E" and "LOCK" indicator warning
and message indication on display
• Normal control: Malfunction of CPU power
supply, relay check, open or short circuit of
the I/O signal, abnormal CAN communication
FAIL-SAFE FUNCTION
FAILURE DETECTION
4WD-ECU performs the following checks at a timing
shown in the chart below. 4WD-ECU determines the
malfunction occurred when the failure detection conditions are met, and it sets the diagnosis code and
executes the countermeasures for trouble. When the
failure resume conditions are met, ECU determines
the status is normal, and resumes the system.
Start-up (Initial check just after the ignition
switch is turned ON.)
1. CPU check
• Performs the ROM and RAM check.
2. Actuator check
• After CPU check has been completed, check
the driving voltage with the actuator relay
OFF.
Always (During ignition ON status other than initial check operation)
1. CPU check
• Performs CAN communication and interactive
check between CPUs.
2. Power supply check
• Monitors the CPU supply voltage and checks
if the voltage is within specifications.
3. Actuator check
• Checks if the actuator relay turns ON according to the control.
• Compares the command current value from
CPU with the monitored current and checks if
they agree.
4. External wire connection check
• Checks if the input and output of each external wire connection is open, shorted, or stuck.
NOTE: For the fail-safe specification, refer to Workshop Manual.
DIAGNOSTIC FUNCTION
4WD-ECU has the following functions for easier system checks. All of the following items can be diagnosed using the M.U.T.-III.
• Diagnosis code set
• Service data output
• Actuator test
• Freeze frame data output
DIAGNOSIS CODE SET
Using M.U.T.-III, the diagnosis code (information of
failures generated in the electronically controlled
4WD system) can be read. When a failure occurs,
4WD-ECU sets the diagnosis code for that failure in
the nonvolatile memory (EEPROM*), so the recorded
information will not be erased even if the battery is
disconnected.
NOTE: .
• *EEPROM (Electrical Erasable & Programmable
ROM): Special type of memory that can be programmed or erased electrically
• For the diagnosis code output items of the electronically controlled 4WD, refer to Workshop
Manual.
SERVICE DATA OUTPUT
Using M.U.T.-III, the data (input data from each ECU
and switch) used for control by the electronically controlled 4WD system can be read.
NOTE: For each service data item, refer to Workshop Manual.
ACTUATOR TEST
M.U.T.-III can forcibly drive the actuators (electronic
control coupling solenoid and drive mode indicator)
controlled by the electronically controlled 4WD system.
NOTE: For the actuator test specification, refer to
Workshop Manual.
FREEZE FRAME DATA OUTPUT
M.U.T.-III can read the freeze frame data (driving
conditions when the failure occurs) set when the
diagnosis code is detected.
NOTE: For freeze frame data items, refer to Workshop Manual.
REAR AXLE
ELECTRONICALLY CONTROLLED 4WD
4WD SWITCH
27-13
ELECTRONIC CONTROL COUPLING
M2270001300011
The 4WD switch has been installed on the floor console. When the 4WD switch is operated with the ignition switch ON, the drive mode can alternate 4WD
ECO, 4WD AUTO or 4WD LOCK.
M2270000700072
FEATURES
The electronic control coupling realizes the highly
reliable 4WD system with lighter weight and simpler
construction.
CONSTRUCTION
Rear differential
Pilot cam
Magnet coil
Pilot clutch
Armature
Main cam
Ball
Front housing
Rear housing
Main clutch
Shaft
The electronic control coupling is comprised of the
front housing, main clutch, main cam, ball, pilot cam,
armature, pilot clutch, rear housing, magnetic coil,
and shaft.
• The front housing is joined to the propeller shaft
and rotates along with the shaft.
Drive pinion
AC505099AC
• The main clutch and pilot clutch are assembled to
the front housing on the outer side and to the
shaft on the inner side (The pilot clutch is
installed via the pilot cam).
• The shaft is engaged via serrations with the drive
pinion of the rear differential.
REAR AXLE
27-14
ELECTRONICALLY CONTROLLED 4WD
OPERATION
Coupling stops (2WD: Magnetic coil de-energized.)
Main clutch
Pilot clutch
Magnet coil
Front housing
Propeller shaft
Shaft
Drive pinion
(Rear differential)
AC505106AE
The drive force from the transfer is transmitted to the
front housing connected to the propeller shaft. The
drive force is also transferred to the pilot clutch and
the outer side of the main clutch assembled to the
front housing. Because the pilot clutch and the main
clutch are not engaged with the magnetic coil
de-energized, the drive force is not transferred to the
shaft and the drive pinion of the rear differential.
REAR AXLE
27-15
ELECTRONICALLY CONTROLLED 4WD
Coupling operates (4WD: Magnetic coil energized.)
Main cam
Main clutch
Armature
Magnetic field
Pilot clutch
Front housing
Magnet coil
Rear housing
Propeller shaft
Shaft
Ball
Pilot cam
Drive pinion
(Rear differential)
AC505106AD
Pilot cam
Main cam
Ball
AC507947AD
• The drive force from the transfer is transmitted to
the front housing connected to the propeller
shaft. The drive force is also transferred to the
pilot clutch and the outer side of the main clutch
assembled to the front housing. When the magnetic coil is energized, the magnetic field is generated among the rear housing, pilot clutch, and
armature. The magnetic field induces the pilot
clutch and armature to engage the pilot clutch.
When the pilot clutch is engaged, the drive force
is transferred to the pilot cam. When there is a
difference in rotation speed between the front and
rear wheels (i.e. rotation speed of the propeller
shaft is different from that of the drive pinion), the
rotation speed of the pilot cam applied with the
drive force and that of the main cam not applied
with the drive force become different. The ball
slides along the curved space between the pilot
cam and main cam by the rotational speed difference and pushes the pilot cam and main cam.
Then, the main clutch is pushed toward the main
cam to engage. When the main clutch is
engaged, the drive force is transferred to the rear
wheels via the shaft and the drive pinion of the
rear differential.
• By controlling the current applied to the magnetic
coil, the amount of the drive force transferred to
the rear wheels can be controlled within the
range of 0 to 100%.
31-1
GROUP 31
WHEEL AND TYRE
CONTENTS
GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . .
31-2
WHEEL AND TYRE
31-2
GENERAL INFORMATION
GENERAL INFORMATION
M2310000102022
The wheels and tyres of the following specifications
have been established.
SPECIFICATIONS
Road wheel and tyre
<2000>
Item
Wheel
Tyre
Standard
Option <4WD>
Type
Steel type
Aluminium type
Aluminium type
Size
16 × 6.5JJ
16 × 6.5J
18 × 7J
Amount of wheel offset mm
38
38
38
PCD mm
114.3
114.3
114.3
Size
215/70R16 100H
215/70R16 100H
225/55R18 98H
<2400>
Item
Wheel
Tyre
Standard
Option
Type
Aluminium type
Aluminium type
Size
16 × 6.5J
18 × 7J
Amount of wheel offset mm
38
38
PCD mm
114.3
114.3
Size
215/70R16 100H
225/55R18 98H
NOTE: PCD indicates the pitch circle diameter of the wheel installation holes.
Spare wheel and tyre
Item
Wheel
Tyre
Standard
Option
Type
Steel type
Aluminium type
Size
16 × 6.5JJ
18 × 7J
Amount of wheel offset mm
38
38
PCD mm
114.3
114.3
Size
215/70R16 100H
225/55R18 98H
NOTE: PCD indicates the pitch circle diameter of the wheel installation holes.
32-1
GROUP 32
POWER PLANT
MOUNT
CONTENTS
GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . .
32-2
POWER PLANT MOUNT
32-2
GENERAL INFORMATION
GENERAL INFORMATION
M2320000101503
New pendulum engine mounting system reduces
noise and vibration, which has the following features.
• The power train mass is supported in line with the
axis of inertia and torque reaction is controlled by
roll-rod stopper with longitudinal force in stead of
vertical force, sensitive to noise and vibration.
• Roll-rod stopper has two rubber-to-metal bushings including large voided bushing and reduces
vibration and noise doubly.
• Enlarged right-hand engine mount, incorporating
a hydraulic chamber, reduces transmission of
noise and vibration in common use and
enhances ride quality on rough roads.
CONSTRUCTION DIAGRAM
Engine mounting
insulator
Engine roll stopper rod
assembly
Front suspension crossmember
Transmission mounting
insulator
ACB05015 AB
33-1
GROUP 33
FRONT
SUSPENSION
CONTENTS
GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . .
33-2
33-2
FRONT SUSPENSION
GENERAL INFORMATION
GENERAL INFORMATION
M2330000101979
The well-proven MacPherson strut type suspension
has been adopted. Various components such as the
strut assembly and the coil spring have been modified or fine-tuned in order to enhance driving comfort,
compared with the previous model.
MAIN FEATURES
• The thicker upper spring pad and lower spring
pad reduce high-frequency vibration and road
noise.
• The newly adopted polyurethane bump stopper
absorbs high load without transmitting sharp
vibrations to the bodyshell.
• The newly added cup does not rotate together
with the strut. As this stationary cup holds the
bump stopper, Therefore, the friction on the top
surface of the bump stopper can be suppressed,
thus eliminating sources of noise.
• The extended dust cover bellows suppresses
dust intrusion through absorber oil seal.
• The newly designed barrel-shaped springs
reduce weight.
FRONT SUSPENSION
33-3
GENERAL INFORMATION
CONSTRUCTION DIAGRAM
Coil spring and strut assembly
Strut insulator assembly
(Cup for stopper fixation)
Strut bearing
Upper spring pad
Bump stopper
Coil spring
Lower spring pad
Coil spring
Strut
Stabilizer link
Strut assembly
Coil spring
Stabilizer bar
Strut assembly
Lower arm assembly
Front axle No.1 crossmember
ACC00556 AB
SPECIFICATIONS
SUSPENSION SYSTEM
Item
Specification
Suspension type
MacPherson strut with coil spring
WHEEL ALIGNMENT
Item
Specification
Camber
0°20'
Caster
2°35'
Kingpin inclination
12°45'
33-4
FRONT SUSPENSION
GENERAL INFORMATION
Item
Toe-in
Toe-in angle (per wheel)
Specification
At the centre of tyre tread mm
1
0°02'
34-1
GROUP 34
REAR SUSPENSION
CONTENTS
GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . .
34-2
34-2
REAR SUSPENSION
GENERAL INFORMATION
GENERAL INFORMATION
M2340000101657
• New designed blade suspension has a slight passive toe-steer effect and provides safer handling.
• Extended toe control links provide smooth suspension stroke feeling and enhance ride comfort.
• The fine-tuned voided bushes pressed in the
blade trailing arm reduce harshness and absorb
vibration.
New blade multi-link rear suspension is an evolution
of the current rear suspension to enhance stability
and save unsprung weight. Springs and shock
absorbers are optimised and fine-tuned for well- balanced handling, stability and ride comfort.
MAIN FEATURES
• Newly designed stamping arms reduce unsprung
weight which offer greater handling and ride comfort.
SPECIFICATIONS
SUSPENSION SYSTEM
Item
Specification
Suspension type
Trailing arm type multi-link
WHEEL ALIGNMENT
Item
Specification
Camber
−0°30'
Toe-in mm
3
REAR SUSPENSION
34-3
GENERAL INFORMATION
CONSTRUCTION DIAGRAM
<2WD>
Shock absorber assembly
Upper arm
Coil spring
Shock absorber assembly
Upper arm
Stabilizer bar
Coil spring
Trailing arm
Control link
Rear suspension
crossmember
Trailing arm
ACB05753 AB
<4WD>
Shock absorber assembly
Upper arm
Coil spring
Shock absorber assembly
Upper arm
Stabilizer bar
Coil spring
Trailing arm
Control link
Rear suspension
crossmember
Trailing arm
ACB05754AB
35-1
GROUP 35
SERVICE BRAKE
CONTENTS
BASIC BRAKE SYSTEM
ANTI-SKID BRAKING SYSTEM (ABS)
ACTIVE STABILITY CONTROL SYSTEM (ASC)
35A-1
GROUP 35A
BASIC BRAKE
SYSTEM
CONTENTS
GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . .
CONSTRUCTION DESCRIPTION . . .
35A-2
35A-3
MASTER CYLINDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
35A-3
BRAKE BOOSTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
35A-3
FRONT BRAKE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
35A-3
REAR BRAKE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
35A-4
BASIC BRAKE SYSTEM
35A-2
GENERAL INFORMATION
GENERAL INFORMATION
M2350000101755
Brake systems with higher reliability and durability
have achieved distinguished braking performance.
FEATURES
IMPROVEMENT OF BRAKING PERFORMANCE
• In addition to the 10-inch single brake booster,
the small and long stroke-type master cylinder
has been adopted to achieve the downsizing and
secure the assist force.
• The installation of 16-inch ventilated disc brake
on the front axle and 16-inch solid disc brake on
the rear axle achieves the secure braking force
and direct braking feeling.
IMPROVEMENT IN SAFETY
• Diagonal split (X-type) brake lines is adopted.
• Audible wear indicators are used on the front and
rear brake pads to warn the driver of wear limit.
CONSTRUCTION DIAGRAM
Brake booster
Reserve tank
Hydraulic unit
Master cylinder
Brake pedal
Front disc brake
Rear disc brake
ACC00001AB
SPECIFICATIONS
Item
Master cylinder
Brake booster
Specification
Type
Tandem type
I.D. (Inner diameter) mm
20.6
Type
Vacuum type, single
Size inch
10
Boost ratio
8.5
Rear wheel hydraulic control method
EBD (Electronic control braking force distribution)
BASIC BRAKE SYSTEM
35A-3
CONSTRUCTION DESCRIPTION
Item
Specification
Front disc brake
Type
Floating caliper, 1-piston, ventilated disc
Brake disc effective dia. × thickness 241.6 × 26
mm
Rear disc brake
Cylinder I.D. mm
57.1
Brake pad thickness mm
10.0
Clearance adjustment
Automatic adjustment
Type
Floating caliper with parking brake mechanism
integrated, 1-piston, solid disc
Brake disc effective dia. × thickness 259.8 × 10
mm
Cylinder I.D. mm
41.3
Brake pad thickness mm
9.0
Clearance adjustment
Automatic adjustment
Brake fluid
DOT3 or DOT4
CONSTRUCTION DESCRIPTION
MASTER CYLINDER
BRAKE BOOSTER
M2350001000673
The master cylinder is a tandem-type, with a structure that emphasizes safety.
M2350002000988
10-inch brake booster has been installed.
FRONT BRAKE
M2350003000947
<Brake pads>
Wear
indicator
Front brake (caliper assembly)
Brake disc (ventilate disc)
Inner pad
Outer pad
<Normal>
Brake disc
Pad
Wear indicator
<At wear limit>
Brake disc
Pad
Wear
indicator
• The outer disc type brake disc which can be tightened together with the wheel has been introduced for better serviceability.
• The 1-piston ventilate disc brake has been
adopted.
ACC00085AB
• The inner brake pads with audible wear indicator
are adopted which warn the driver of the wear
limit.
BASIC BRAKE SYSTEM
35A-4
CONSTRUCTION DESCRIPTION
REAR BRAKE
M2350004000917
<Brake pads>
Inner pad
Rear brake assembly
Outer pad
Brake disc
Wear
indicator
<Normal>
Brake disc
Pad
Wear indicator
• The outer disc type brake disc which can be tightened together with the wheel has been introduced for better serviceability.
• The 1-piston solid disc brake with parking brake
mechanism integrated has been adopted.
<At wear limit>
Brake disc
Pad
Wear
indicator
ACC00071AB
• The inner brake pads with audible wear indicator
are adopted which warn the driver of the wear
limit.
35B-1
GROUP 35B
ANTI-SKID
BRAKING SYSTEM
(ABS)
CONTENTS
GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . .
CONSTRUCTION DESCRIPTION . . .
35B-2
35B-7
SENSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
35B-7
ACTUATORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
35B-7
ABS-ECU. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
35B-8
ANTI-SKID BRAKING SYSTEM (ABS)
35B-2
GENERAL INFORMATION
GENERAL INFORMATION
M2351000101554
The 4ABS ensures directional stability and control
during hard braking.
This ABS uses a 4-sensor system that controls all
four wheels independently of each other.
• EBD *1control can obtain ideal rear wheel brake
force.
• The magnetic encoder for wheel speed detection
has been installed instead of the rotor as the
wheel speed sensor.
• For wiring harness saving and secure data communication, CAN *2 bus has been adopted as a
tool of communication with another ECU.
• Fail-safe function which ensures that safety is
maintained.
• Diagnostic function which provides improved
serviceability.
NOTE: .
• *1: EBD (Electronic Brake-force Distribution)
• *2: For more details about CAN (Controller Area
Network), refer to GROUP 54C .
Specifications
Item
Specifications
ABS control type
4 sensors
Wheel speed sensor
Magnetic encoder
Type
Front
86 (N pole: 43, S pole: 43)
Rear
96 (N pole: 48, S pole: 48)
Semiconductor
ANTI-SKID BRAKING SYSTEM (ABS)
35B-3
GENERAL INFORMATION
CONSTRUCTION DIAGRAM
<Standard meter>
<High contrast meter>
7
8
8
9
6
6
10
4, 5, 11
3
<4WD>
1
1
1
2
2
2
ACB06010 AC
MAIN COMPONENTS AND FUNCTIONS
Name of part
Num Outline of function
ber
Sensor
Wheel speed sensor
1
Outputs the frequency signal in proportion to the rotation speed
of each wheel to ABS-ECU.
Magnetic encoder for
wheel speed detection
2
When the magnetic encoder for wheel speed detection (a plate
on which north and south pole sides of the magnets are
arranged alternately) rotates, the wheel speed sensor outputs
frequency pulse signal in proportion to each wheel speed.
Stop lamp switch
3
Outputs the signal indicating whether the brake pedal is
depressed or not to ABS-ECU.
G sensor <4WD>
4
Incorporated in ABS-ECU, and detects the longitudinal
acceleration of the vehicle.
ANTI-SKID BRAKING SYSTEM (ABS)
35B-4
GENERAL INFORMATION
Name of part
Num Outline of function
ber
Actuator Hydraulic unit
5
Drives the solenoid valve using the signal from ABS-ECU, and
controls the brake fluid pressure for each wheel.
ABS warning lamp
6
Informs the driver of the system status by illuminating, flashing,
or turning off the warning lamp according to the signal from
ABS-ECU.
ABS warning display
7
Informs the driver of the system status by illuminating or turning
off the warning display according to the signal from ABS-ECU.
Brake warning lamp
8
Used as the warning lamp for the parking brake, brake fluid
level, and EBD control. Informs the driver of the system status
by illuminating or turning off the warning lamp according to the
signal from ABS-ECU.
Brake warning display
9
Used as the warning display for brake fluid level, and EBD
control. Informs the driver of the system status by illuminating or
turning off the warning display according to the signal from
ABS-ECU.
Diagnosis connector
10
Outputs the diagnosis code and establishes the communication
with M.U.T.-III.
ABS-ECU
11
Controls actuators (described above) based on the signals
coming from each sensor.
Controls the self-diagnosis and fail-safe functions.
Controls the diagnosis function (M.U.T.-III compatible).
ANTI-SKID BRAKING SYSTEM (ABS)
35B-5
GENERAL INFORMATION
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM
FR solenoid valve (OUT)
Wheel speed sensor (FL)
FR solenoid valve (IN)
Wheel speed sensor (RL)
FL solenoid valve (OUT)
Wheel speed sensor (RR)
FL solenoid valve (IN)
RR solenoid valve (OUT)
Wheel speed sensor (FR)
Stop lamp switch
RR solenoid valve (IN)
ABS-ECU
RL solenoid valve (OUT)
RL solenoid valve (IN)
ABS-ECU power supply
G sensor
<4WD>
Combination meter and
multi information display
· ABS warning lamp
· Brake warning lamp
· ABS warning display
· Brake warning display
Diagnosis connector
CAN-BUS LINE
Front-right
wheel (FR)
CAN-BUS LINE
Rear-right
wheel (RR)
ETACS-ECU
Wheel
speed
sensor
(RR)
Wheel
speed
sensor
(FR)
Stop lamp switch
Hydraulic unit
Wheel
speed
sensor
(FL)
Front-left
wheel (FL)
Wheel
speed
sensor
(RL)
Rear-left
wheel (RL)
ACC00359AB
NOTE: Dashed lines indicate the CAN bus communication lines.
ANTI-SKID BRAKING SYSTEM (ABS)
35B-6
GENERAL INFORMATION
ABS ELECTRICAL DIAGRAM
Fusible
link No.4
Ignition
switch (IG1) or
OSS-ECU (IG1)
Fusible
link No.2
CAN drive
circuit
CAN drive
circuit
14
15A
OFF
11
Field Effect
Transistor
Interface
circuit
10A
ON
Interface
circuit
15
10A
Stop lamp
switch
ON
OFF
4WDECU
Diagnosis
connector
EngineECU
Hydraulic unit
Solenoid valve
Motor
Solenoid valve
power supply
Motor power supply
Motor power supply
Solenoid valve
power supply
G sensor <4WD>
ABS
BRAKE
CPU
Power supply
LED drive
circuit
GND
CAN transceiver
circuit
LCD
(ABS, BRAKE)
GND
Rheostat
Combination
meter
ABS-ECU
(FL)
(FR)
(RL)
Wheel speed sensor
(RR)
ACB05777 AB
ANTI-SKID BRAKING SYSTEM (ABS)
35B-7
CONSTRUCTION DESCRIPTION
CONSTRUCTION DESCRIPTION
SENSOR
M2351001001000
WHEEL SPEED SENSOR
FRONT
Front wheel speed sensor
REAR <2WD>
REAR <4WD>
Rear wheel
speed sensor
Rear wheel
speed sensor
Encoder for wheel
speed detection
Encoder for wheel
speed detection
Encoder for wheel
speed detection
ACC00565AB
The wheel speed detecting section is a kind of a
pulse generator. It consists of the magnetic encoder
for wheel speed detection (a plate on which north
and south pole sides of the magnets are arranged
alternately) which rotates at the same speed of the
wheel and the wheel speed sensor (semiconductor
sensor). This sensor outputs frequency pulse signals
in proportion to the wheel speed.
The front wheel speed detecting section consists of
the front wheel speed sensor mounted on the
knuckle and the magnetic encoder for wheel speed
detection which is press-fitted together with the oil
seal to the front wheel bearing. The rear wheel
speed sensor consists of the rear wheel speed sensor mounted on the trailing arm assembly and the
magnetic encoder for wheel speed detection which is
press-fitted together with the oil seal to the rear
wheel bearing.
G SENSOR <4WD>
The G-sensor is incorporated in ABS-ECU, and
detects longitudinal acceleration of a vehicle.
ACTUATORS
M2351002000486
ABS WARNING LAMP, BRAKE WARNING LAMP
The ABS system informs the driver to the ABS system status by illuminating, extinguishing, or flashing
the ABS warning lamp and brake warning lamp as
follows.
ABS warning lamp and brake warning lamp illumination or flashing pattern
State
ABS warning lamp
Brake warning lamp
Normal
Correct
−
−
Faulty
ABS failure
Illuminates
−
EBD failure
Illuminates
Illuminates
Actuator not operated
−
−
Actuator operated
Flash (2Hz)
−
After the actuator is
activated forcibly *
Illuminates*
Illuminates*
When M.U.T.-III is
connected
35B-8
ANTI-SKID BRAKING SYSTEM (ABS)
CONSTRUCTION DESCRIPTION
NOTE: .
• *: The ABS warning lamp and the brake warning lamp stay on until the ignition switch is turned to the
LOCK (OFF) position.
• When the brake fluid level in the brake fluid reservoir tank is lower than the specified value, or when the
parking brake lever is pulled, the brake warning lamp turns ON.
ABS-ECU
M2351003001028
• By integrating ABS-ECU into the hydraulic unit,
no wiring harness for sending drive signal of the
solenoid valve and pump motor is required,
assuring higher reliability.
• By incorporating the G-sensor <4WD>, no sensor
harness is required, enhancing the reliability.
• Self-diagnostic and memory functions are integrated into ABS-ECU. If any malfunction is
detected by the self-diagnostic function,
ABS-ECU activates a fail-safe function and illuminates the ABS warning lamp and brake warning
lamp*.
NOTE: *: The brake warning lamp is used as the
EBD control warning lamp.
• ABS-ECU detects vehicle speed from the signals
of the wheel speed sensor and its incorporated G
sensor <4WD>, recognizes the wheel rotation
status, estimates the wheel slip condition based
on the preprogrammed algorithm, and then controls the solenoid valve in the hydraulic unit so
that the wheels do not lock.
ANTI-SKID BRAKING SYSTEM (ABS)
35B-9
CONSTRUCTION DESCRIPTION
ABS fluid pressure control
ABS control cycle
Increase
Hold
Decrease
Wheel speed
Estimated vehicle speed
C
A
D
B
Actual vehicle speed
Brake pressure
a
e
d
b
c
AC506830AB
1. The ABS-ECU calculates the speed and deceleration of each wheel based on the signals from the
four wheel speed sensors and the G sensor
<4WD> incorporated in the ABS-ECU, and estimates the vehicle speed at that time.
2. When the brake pedal is depressed, the brake
fluid pressure applied to the wheel cylinder
increases, and the wheel speed decreases.
When the difference between the wheel speed
and vehicle speed increases, and the vehicle
deceleration goes below the specified value
(Point A), ECU determines that the wheels are
about to be locked. At this time, ECU reduces the
brake fluid pressure by outputting the pressure
decrease signal to the solenoid valves (IN, OUT).
(between a and b)
3. When the vehicle deceleration and wheel speed
begin recovery, and the vehicle speed reaches
the point B, ECU outputs the pressure hold signal
to maintain the wheel cylinder fluid pressure.
(between b and c)
4. When the wheel speed deceleration is further
recovered and overpasses the point C, ECU
determines that the wheel lock possibility has
been eliminated and increases the brake fluid
pressure by outputting the pressure increase signal again. (between c and d)
5. Brake fluid pressure is controlled by repeating the
increase and hold of the pressure. (between d
and e)
6. When the wheel deceleration goes below the
threshold again, ABS-ECU controls the brake
fluid pressure by repeating the cycle (Step 2 to 5).
35B-10
ANTI-SKID BRAKING SYSTEM (ABS)
CONSTRUCTION DESCRIPTION
EBD fluid pressure control
EBD control is activated in a range with lower slip
ratio where ABS is disabled. EBD calculates vehicle
deceleration and slip amount of the four wheels
based on the wheel speed sensor signal. If the rear
wheel speed differs from the vehicle speed by a cer-
tain level or more, EBD increases, holds, and
decreases the pressure at the rear wheel control
solenoid valve in the hydraulic unit, and then adjusts
rear wheel brake fluid pressure fairly close to an
ideal distribution curve.
EBD operating conceptual design
Braking force distribution
by EBD control
Ideal distribution curve when
seated by fixed persons
Rear braking force
Braking force distribution curve
by the existing proportioning valve
Ideal distribution curve when seated by one persons
Braking Force
Improved
Front braking force
AC208548AB
INITIAL CHECK
ABS-ECU performs the following initial checks using
the diagnostic functions. ABS-ECU illuminates the
ABS warning lamp for 3 seconds (including the initial
check) * after the ignition switch is turned ON. If any
malfunction is detected, ABS-ECU continues illuminating the ABS warning lamp and disables ABS control.
NOTE: *: The ABS warning lamp may stay on after
the ignition switch is turned ON until the startup vehicle speed reaches approximately 10 km/h. As far as
ABS-ECU memorizes any diagnosis code related to
the wheel speed sensor malfunction recorded during
the previous ignition ON status, ABS-ECU continues
illuminating the ABS warning lamp until it verifies that
the malfunction for that code is resolved (startup
check).
STARTUP CHECK
When the startup vehicle speed reaches approximately 10 km/h, ABS-ECU performs the following
checks.
1. Motor, solenoid valve check (Initial startup* only)
Turns ON the motor relay in ECU, and checks the
pump motor operation. At the same time,
ABS-ECU sequentially energizes each solenoid
valve in a very short period and checks the valve
operation.
NOTE: *: Initial startup indicates a first startup
after the system has started.
2. Wheel speed sensor check
ABS-ECU checks for any wheels that have not
received wheel speed sensor signal from the
startup.
CONSTANT CHECK
ABS-ECU constantly checks the following items.
1. ABS-ECU
(1) Performs self-diagnosis in ECU.
(2) Checks for abnormal output voltage of G
sensor, and detects open or short circuit in the
G sensor <4WD>.
(3) Checks the output voltage for G sensor, and
determines that the G sensor is stuck when
the output voltage exceeding the specification
continues for a certain period or more <4WD>.
2. ECU power supply
Checks if ECU power supply voltage stays within
the operational range.
3. Wheel speed sensor
(1) Monitors the output voltage of the sensor
signal wiring harness and checks for abnormal
output voltage (open/short circuit).
(2) Checks for any wheels that do not send pulse
signal while the vehicle is in motion.
ANTI-SKID BRAKING SYSTEM (ABS)
CONSTRUCTION DESCRIPTION
(3) Checks if wheel speed which is abnormally
higher or lower than the vehicle speed is input.
4. Pump motor, solenoid valve
35B-11
Checks that the ABS-ECU output signal and the
operating conditions of the pump motor and
solenoid valve agree with each other.
FAIL-SAFE FUNCTION
If any malfunction is detected by the self-diagnostic
function, ABS-ECU illuminates the ABS warning
lamp and brake warning lamp*, and it disables ABS
and EBD control.
NOTE: *: The brake warning lamp is used as EBD
control warning lamp.
DIAGNOSTIC FUNCTION
ABS-ECU has the following functions for easier system checks. The following items can be diagnosed
using M.U.T.-III.
• Diagnosis code set
• Service data output
• Actuator test
• Freeze frame data output
35C-1
GROUP 35C
ACTIVE STABILITY
CONTROL SYSTEM
(ASC)
CONTENTS
GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . .
CONSTRUCTION DIAGRAM. . . . . . .
SENSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
35C-2
ACTUATOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
35C-8
ASC-ECU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
35C-9
35C-8
35C-8
DESCRIPTION OF CONSTRUCTION AND
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35C-15
35C-2
ACTIVE STABILITY CONTROL SYSTEM (ASC)
GENERAL INFORMATION
GENERAL INFORMATION
M2355000100683
Active Stability Control System (ASC) has been
installed.
• The ASC system integrates the traction control
(TCL) function and stability control function.
• When TCL detects the slip of the driving wheel
(ex. during startup on low µ road), it automatically
applies the brakes to the slipping driving wheel.
At the same time, TCL reduces the engine output
and prevents the wheel spin when it determines
that the engine torque is too high for the road surface µ.
• When the ASC-ECU determines that the vehicle
is in a dangerous condition, it reduces the engine
output and applies brake force to four wheels
independently to control the vehicle behaviour,
avoiding the critical state.
• Hill Start Assist (HSA) function has been adopted
to hold and prevent the roll back of the vehicle
when the vehicle is on a slope and the foot is
transferred from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal <Vehicles with HSA>.
• The brake assist (BA) control determines an
emergency braking and increases the braking
force for the drivers who cannot depress the
brake sufficiently when the emergency brake is
applied. This shortens the distance to stop or
reduces the collision speed.
NOTE: By the integrated control with the anti-skid
brake system (ABS), the system stabilises the vehicle attitude and at the same time secures the driving
force.
ACTIVE STABILITY CONTROL SYSTEM (ASC)
35C-3
GENERAL INFORMATION
CONSTRUCTION DIAGRAM
<Standard meter>
<High contrast meter>
11
14
14
13, 15
11
9
12
10
15
13
9
13, 15
16
4, 7, 8, 20
3
5
<4WD>
17
6
1
2
2
18
1
2
1
19 <4WD>
ACB06012AB
ACTIVE STABILITY CONTROL SYSTEM (ASC)
35C-4
GENERAL INFORMATION
MAIN COMPONENTS AND FUNCTIONS
Name of part
Number Functional description
Sensor
Actuator
Wheel speed sensor
1
Outputs the frequency signal in proportion to the rotation
speed of each wheel to ASC-ECU.
Magnetic encoder for
wheel speed detection
2
The wheel speed sensor is a pulse generator. When the
magnetic encoder for wheel speed detection (a plate on
which north and south pole sides of the magnets are
arranged alternately) rotates, it outputs frequency pulse
signal in proportion to each wheel speed.
Stop lamp switch
3
Outputs the signal indicating whether the brake pedal is
depressed or not to ASC-ECU.
G & yaw rate sensor
4
Is integrated in the ASC-ECU, detects the yaw rate and
longitudinal and lateral acceleration of a vehicle, and sends
a signal to the ASC-ECU.
Steering wheel sensor
5
Detects the steering angle of the steering wheel, and
outputs signal to ASC-ECU via the CAN bus line.
ASC OFF switch
6
Outputs the ON/OFF signal for ASC to ASC-ECU.
Brake fluid pressure
sensor
7
Integrated into the hydraulic unit, and outputs the signal for
the brake fluid pressure in the master cylinder to ASC-ECU.
Hydraulic unit
8
Drives the solenoid valve using the signal from ASC-ECU,
and controls the brake fluid pressure for each wheel.
ABS warning lamp
9
Informs the driver of the system status by illuminating,
flashing, or turning off the ABS warning lamp according to
the signal from ASC-ECU.
ABS warning display
10
Informs the driver of the system status by illuminating or
turning off the ABS warning display according to the signal
from ASC-ECU.
Brake warning lamp
11
Used as the brake warning lamp for the parking brake,
brake fluid level, and EBD control. Informs the driver of the
system status by illuminating or turning off the brake
warning lamp according to the signal from ASC-ECU.
Brake warning display
12
Used as the brake warning display for the brake fluid level,
and EBD control. Informs the driver of the system status by
illuminating or turning off the brake warning display
according to the signal from ASC-ECU.
ASC operation display
and lamp*1
13
Informs the driver of the system status by flashing when the
system operates according to the signal from ASC-ECU.
ASC OFF lamp
14
Informs the driver of the system shutdown by illuminating by
the signal from ASC-ECU. Informs the driver that the brake
system overheats and the brake TCL stops by flashing the
ASC OFF lamp for the duration of approximately 2 Hz.
ASC warning display
and lamp*1
15
TCL function and stability control function, HSA function use
the same display and lamp*1. Depending on the signal from
ASC-ECU, the ASC warning display and lamp*1 informs the
driver of the system status by illuminating when the system
has malfunction (When the ASC warning display and lamp*1
is illuminated, the HSA function does not operate).
ACTIVE STABILITY CONTROL SYSTEM (ASC)
GENERAL INFORMATION
35C-5
Name of part
Number Functional description
Diagnosis connector
16
Sets the diagnosis code and establishes the communication
with M.U.T.-III.
Engine-ECU
17
Controls the engine output based on the signal from
ASC-ECU.
CVT-ECU
18
CVT-ECU performs integrated control with ASC-ECU.
Output the gear position to ASC-ECU.
4WD-ECU*2
19*2
Outputs the drive status to ASC-ECU.
4WD-ECU performs integrated control with ASC-ECU.
ASC control unit (ASC-ECU)
20
Controls the actuators (hydraulic unit) based on the signals
sent from sensors.
Controls the self-diagnostic function and fail-safe function.
Controls diagnostic function (Compatible with M.U.T.-III).
NOTE: .
•
*1
•
*2:
: Colour liquid crystal display
4WD
ACTIVE STABILITY CONTROL SYSTEM (ASC)
35C-6
GENERAL INFORMATION
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM
Combination meter and multi
information display
· ABS warning lamp and display
· Brake warning lamp and display
· ASC operation lamp and display
· ASC OFF lamp
· ASC warning display and lamp
Wheel speed sensor (FL)
Wheel speed sensor (RL)
Parking brake
switch
Diagnosis
connector
Wheel speed sensor (RR)
FR suction valve
Wheel speed sensor (FR)
FL suction valve
Master cylinder pressure sensor
FR cut valve
FL cut valve
ASC-ECU power supply
ASC-ECU
FR solenoid valve (OUT)
Steering wheel sensor
FR solenoid valve (IN)
Stop lamp switch
FL solenoid valve (OUT)
FL solenoid valve (IN)
ASC OFF switch
RR solenoid valve (OUT)
Engine-ECU
CVT-ECU
4WD-ECU*
RR solenoid valve (IN)
RL solenoid valve (OUT)
G and yaw rate
sensor
RL solenoid valve (IN)
4WD-ECU*
Steering wheel sensor
Front-right wheel (FR)
ETACS-ECU
Rear-right wheel (RR)
ASC OFF
switch
Wheel
speed
sensor
(FR)
Engine
-ECU
Hydraulic
unit
Wheel
speed
sensor
(FL)
Front-left wheel (FL)
CVT-ECU
Wheel
speed
sensor
(RR)
Stop lamp switch
Wheel
speed
sensor
(RL)
Rear-left wheel (RL)
ACB06003 AB
ACTIVE STABILITY CONTROL SYSTEM (ASC)
35C-7
GENERAL INFORMATION
NOTE: .
• Dashed lines indicate the CAN bus line.
• *: 4WD
ASC ELECTRICAL DIAGRAM
Ignition switch (IG1) or
OSS-ECU (IG1)
Fusible link No.2
ETACSECU
No.14
15A
Field Effect
Transistor
CAN drive
circuit
No.11
10A
IG1
relay
OFF
Interface
circuit
Stop lamp
switch
CAN drive
circuit
ON
Interface
circuit
No.15
10A
Steering
wheel
sensor
ON
OFF
4WD-ECU
<4WD>
Diagnosis
connector
CAN
transceiver
circuit
OFF
ON
ASC OFF
switch
Fusible link
No.4
CVT-ECU
BRAKE
CPU
ABS
ASC
ASC
OFF
LED drive circuit
Rheostat
Interface
circuit
LCD
(ABS, ASC OFF,
ASC OPERATION,
ASC WARNING, BRAKE)
Combination meter
Engine-ECU
ASC-ECU
Motor power supply
ASC-ECU power supply
G and yaw
rate sensor
Solenoid valve power supply
(LH)
(RH)
(LH)
Parking
brake
ON
switch
OFF
(RH)
Solenoid valve
Front wheel speed sensor
Rear wheel speed sensor
Hydraulic unit
ACB06005 AB
ACTIVE STABILITY CONTROL SYSTEM (ASC)
35C-8
CONSTRUCTION DIAGRAM
CONSTRUCTION DIAGRAM
SENSOR
M2355001100471
WHEEL SPEED SENSOR
The steering wheel sensor is attached to the column
switch, and detects the rotational angle of the steering wheel.
Refer to GROUP 35B − Sensor .
ASC OFF SWITCH
G & YAW RATE SENSOR
ASC OFF switch
ASC-ECU
ACB04992AB
ACB06006AB
The G & yaw rate sensor is integrated in the
ASC-ECU, and detects the yaw rate and longitudinal
and lateral acceleration of a vehicle.
STEERING WHEEL SENSOR
Steering wheel sensor
The ASC OFF switch is installed on the side air outlet
(driver’s side). ASC functions can be disabled by
pressing this switch for 3 seconds (The HSA and BA
function operates even when the ASC system is
turned OFF with the ASC OFF switch). Pressing this
switch again resumes the ON status. As a countermeasure for the stuck of the ASC OFF switch, pressing the ASC OFF switch for 15 seconds resumes the
system to the ON status.
When the ignition switch is turned from "LOCK"
(OFF) to ON position, ASC functions are constantly
in the ON status.
ACB04993AB
ASC OFF SWITCH OPERATION AND SYSTEM OPERATION
ASC OFF switch operation
TCL
Brake control
Engine control
Stability
control
HSA
BA
Not operated
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Operated (Press and hold for 3
seconds)
Prohibited
Prohibited
Prohibited
Enabled
Enabled
NOTE: The stability control is available when the
vehicle speed is 15 km/h or more.
ACTUATOR
M2355001200445
HYDRAULIC UNIT
The hydraulic unit incorporates the ABS control and
ASC control. The cut valve, pressure relief valve,
suction valve, suction damper, G & yaw rate sensor
and pressure sensor have been added to the unit for
the ASC control.
NOTE: For the internal hydraulic circuit of the
hydraulic unit, refer to P.35C-15.
ACTIVE STABILITY CONTROL SYSTEM (ASC)
35C-9
CONSTRUCTION DIAGRAM
ASC OPERATION DISPLAY AND LAMP,
ASC WARNING DISPLAY AND LAMP, ASC
OFF lamp
ASC operation display and lamp
• Flashes in 2 Hz (display)/4 Hz (lamp) during the
ASC control.
The ASC system illuminates or flashes the ASC
operation display and lamp, ASC warning display
and lamp or ASC OFF lamp in the following operation patterns, and informs the driver of the ASC system status.
ASC warning display and lamp
• Turns ON when the system malfunction occurs.
ASC OFF lamp
• ASC-ECU detects the overheat of the brake
pads. When the brake TCL control is prohibited,
the ASC OFF lamp flashes in approximately 2
Hz.
ASC operation display and lamp, ASC warning display and lamp, ASC OFF lamp illumination and
flashing patterns
State
ASC operation
ASC warning display ASC OFF lamp
display and lamp
and lamp
Normal
−
−
−
Stability control
operated
Flashing (display: 2
Hz, lamp: 4 Hz)
−
−
TCL operated
Flashing (display: 2
Hz, lamp: 4 Hz)
−
−
HSA operated
−
−
−
ASC is disabled ASC disabled
by ASC OFF
switch
−
−
Illuminates
When the brake
pad
temperature is
high
ASC-ECU informs −
the driver that the
brake TCL does
not function.
−
Flashing (2 Hz)
Abnormal
Stability control
malfunction
−
Illuminates
Illuminates
TCL malfunction
−
Illuminates
Illuminates
HSA malfunction
−
Illuminates
−*
Actuator not
operated
−
−
−
Actuator operated
−
Illuminates
Illuminates
Normal
M.U.T.-III
connection
NOTE: * Illuminates if the TCL function or stability control function is defective when the HSA function is
defective. (HSA control prohibited)
ASC-ECU
M2357000100515
This ECU incorporates the ABS function, EBD function, HSA function, stability control function and TCL
function, brake assist control.
The hydraulic units of the ASC and TCL systems
employ the automatic pressurisation function. These
systems also incorporates G and yaw rate sensor
(integrated with ASC-ECU), steering wheel sensor,
and master cylinder pressure sensor (integrated with
hydraulic unit).
ACTIVE STABILITY CONTROL SYSTEM (ASC)
35C-10
CONSTRUCTION DIAGRAM
STABILITY CONTROL DESCRIPTION
ASC-ECU detects vehicle movement based on information from various sensors and calculates a model
of ideal vehicle movement. ASC-ECU compares the
actual vehicle movement with the ideal vehicle
model, and manages the brake of the specific wheel
so that the actual vehicle movement gets close to the
ideal vehicle mode. It also controls the understeer or
oversteer condition by creating the yaw moment in
the vehicle.
Example of Stability Control function
<Generation of rotating force>
<Generation of counter-rotating force>
Large braking
force
Large braking
force
AC604152AB
The Stability Control manages the vehicle attitude by
creating a yaw moment from altering the balance
between the cornering force and each wheel's braking mechanism.
Example of the effect of control
Suppression of front wheel side slip
Prevents the vehicle
from getting out of course
by front wheel side slip
Suppression of rear wheel side slip
Prevents spinning
caused by
rear wheel side slip
AC604154AB
ACTIVE STABILITY CONTROL SYSTEM (ASC)
35C-11
CONSTRUCTION DIAGRAM
For example, on a slippery surface, if the vehicle
tends to be under-steered contrary to the driver’s
intention, a yaw moment (a rotational moment) is
created to restrain the under-steering by increasing
the rear-inside braking force. On the other hand,
when the vehicle tends to be oversteered, a yaw
moment (a restorative moment) is created to restrain
the oversteering by increasing the front-outside
wheel braking force. Furthermore, when it is determined that the vehicle is over-speeding, safe and
stable cornering is enabled by deceleration from
reducing the engine output.
Joint control
ASC-ECU transmits data necessary for control of
ABS and TCL, performing joint control.
Control system
Control content
ABS
Even during ABS operation, ABS performance is improved from the joint
operation of the stability control.
TCL
During acceleration, engine output is governed through joint operation with
stability control.
Example of TCL function
2WD
Slippery surface
Brake force
Direction of
driving
Slipping wheel
Driving
force
AC705575AB
4WD
Slippery surface
Brake force
Direction of
driving
Slipping wheel
Driving
force
Driving
force
Brake force
Slipping wheel
Slippery surface
AC706148 AB
ACTIVE STABILITY CONTROL SYSTEM (ASC)
35C-12
CONSTRUCTION DIAGRAM
When the driving wheels slip on the slippery road
surface, TCL applies the brake automatically, sends
the signal requesting engine speed reduction to the
engine-ECU, and prevents the loss of the driving
force resulting from the slippage of the driving wheel.
Hill START ASSIST (HSA) FUNCTION
System configuration
Hydraulic unit
Wheel speed sensor
Engine-ECU
FL
ASC-ECU
engine related information
CVT-ECU
HSA control
gear position information
ETACS-ECU
G and yaw rate
sensor
FR
Brake fluid
currently
supplied to each
wheel cylinder
is controlled.
RL
Combination meter
Parking brake switch
Master cylinder
pressure sensor
RR
: Hardwire-line
: CAN line
: Brake-line
ACB06022AB
When the vehicle has completely stopped on a steep
uphill by the service brake, ASC-ECU judges
whether or not start the HSA function control in
accordance with the signals (ETACS-ECU,
CVT-ECU, G & yaw rate sensor, brake fluid pressure
sensor, engine-ECU, wheel speed sensor).
ACTIVE STABILITY CONTROL SYSTEM (ASC)
35C-13
CONSTRUCTION DIAGRAM
HSA function state transition diagram (Overview)
HSA function control
not activated
- Steep uphill
- The vehicle has been stopped by depressing the brake during uphill driving
- The accelerator pedal is not depressed
When the conditions above are met
HSA function
control activated
Release of depressed brake pedal
The fluid pressure hold mode is kept for
approx. two seconds
Fluid pressure
hold mode
Forcible termination
mode
Depressurization is
complete
The accelerator pedal
is depressed
The start mode is continued for
approx. 1.5 seconds
Start mode
Depressurization is
complete
AC809431AC
NOTE: .
• ASC-ECU judges the inclination angle of the slope according to the G and yaw rate sensor output.
• When either of the following conditions is satisfied, the mode is shifted to the forcible termination mode,
and HSA function control is terminated.
• The parking brake operation is detected.
• The shift lever operation to the shift or selector position other than the uphill direction driving is
detected (Forward uphill driving: shift or selector position other than "D"*, Reverse uphill driving: shift
or selector position other than "R").
• The accelerator pedal and brake pedal are depressed at the same time.
• The wheel speed sensor pulse is generated (When the vehicle moved)
• The engine is stopped by engine stall, etc.
*:When uphill driving, if shift position is "N" position, HSA function is operated
HSA function control activated
FLUID PRESSURE HOLD MODE
ASC-ECU judges that the HSA operation condition is
satisfied. When the driver releases the brake pedal,
ASC-ECU maintains the brake wheel cylinder pressure and waits.
By closing the cut valve, ASC-ECU maintains the
brake wheel cylinder pressure of the time when the
brake pedal is depressed, to prevent the vehicle from
moving backward.
35C-14
ACTIVE STABILITY CONTROL SYSTEM (ASC)
CONSTRUCTION DIAGRAM
START MODE
FORCIBLE TERMINATION MODE
ASC-ECU releases the brake wheel cylinder pressure maintained by the cut valve, depending on the
engine torque generated by depressing the accelerator pedal.
ASC-ECU immediately releases the brake wheel cylinder pressure maintained by the cut valve and terminates HSA function control.
BRAKE ASSIST (BA) CONTROL
Operation description
• If an emergency brake is determined by the brake
pedal depression speed and force, the brake
assist works to increase the braking force the
drivers produce. [The braking force is not
increased more than the brake performance (the
friction force between the road surface and the
tyres) .]
• The brake assist is completed when the brake
pedal is released or the vehicle is stopped.
fail-safe function
The brake assist mechanism does not work when the
ABS warning lamp illuminates.
Brake assist operation
Brake pedal
depression force
Emergency brake (determined)
Elapsed time
Braking force
With brake assist
Without brake assist
Elapsed time
AC903511AC
FAIL-SAFE AND DIAGNOSTIC FUNCTIONS
ASC-ECU constantly monitors the input and output
signals. If an error is detected in the system,
ASC-ECU sends a fail signal and the corresponding
indicator lamp is illuminated or blinks. Various controls are processed depending on the cause of malfunction as shown below.
ASC-ECU has the following functions for easier system checks.
• Diagnosis code set
• Service data output
• Actuator test
• Freeze frame data output
All the above items can be diagnosed using
M.U.T.-III.
CALIBRATION
After the steering wheel sensor and hydraulic unit
(integrated with ASC-ECU and G & yaw rate sensor)
have been replaced with new ones, calibration must
be performed using M.U.T.-III*.
NOTE: .
• M.U.T.-III uses the ABS data list.
• *: For calibration, refer to Workshop Manual.
ACTIVE STABILITY CONTROL SYSTEM (ASC)
35C-15
DESCRIPTION OF CONSTRUCTION AND OPERATION
DESCRIPTION OF CONSTRUCTION AND OPERATION
M2355002000563
STABILITY CONTROL OPERATION
ASC-ECU receives various kinds of information from
the engine-ECU, 4WD-ECU, ETACS-ECU,
CVT-ECU, steering wheel sensor, G & yaw rate sensor, and wheel speed sensor. When ECU determines
the vehicle runs in the oversteer or understeer direction based on the signal sent from these sensors,
ASC-ECU drives each valve and pump motor and
controls the braking force to be applied to the
wheels.
When the system increases the fluid pressure automatically, it closes the cut valve to shut off the pressure line to the suction valve, and drives the pump
motor. For example, when the vehicle runs in the
oversteer direction while turning to the right,
ASC-ECU supplies the brake fluid from the pump to
the front left wheel to apply the braking force on it.
ASC-ECU, the engine ECU, and 4WD-ECU communicate with each other via CAN. When the accelerator pedal is depressed too far, the signal requesting
the engine output reduction is sent to the engine
ECU. Depending on the situation, 4WD control
amount limitation signal is sent to the ASC-ECU to
secure the ASC controllability.
When brake fluid pressure decreases during ABS operation
Master cylinder
Hydraulic unit
Outlet valve
Inlet valve
Wheel
cylinder
(Front)
Cut valve
Suction valve
Outlet valve
Inlet valve
Suction
damper
Pressure sensor
Pump
Damping
chamber
Wheel
cylinder
(Rear) Brake fluid flow
Low pressure
accumulator
Motor
ACC00363AB
The brake fluid supplied from the wheel cylinder is
stored in the low pressure accumulator. Then, the
stored brake fluid is returned to the master cylinder
by driving the pump using the motor.
ACTIVE STABILITY CONTROL SYSTEM (ASC)
35C-16
DESCRIPTION OF CONSTRUCTION AND OPERATION
VALVE CONDITION
Item
Power status
Open/Close
Cut valve
OFF
Open
Suction valve
OFF
Closed
Inlet valve
ON
Closed
Outlet valve
ON
Open
When brake fluid pressure is held by ABS
Master cylinder
Hydraulic unit
Outlet valve
Inlet valve
Wheel
cylinder
(Front)
Suction valve
Cut valve
Outlet valve
Inlet valve
Suction
damper
Pressure sensor
Pump
Wheel
cylinder
(Rear)
Damping
chamber
Brake fluid flow
Low pressure
accumulator
Motor
ACC00363AC
The system closes the inlet valve and outlet valve to
hold the brake fluid pressure in the wheel cylinder. If
the brake fluid is stored in the low pressure accumulator, the brake fluid is returned to the master cylinder
by driving the pump using the motor.
VALVE CONDITION
Item
Power status
Open/Close
Cut valve
OFF
Open
Suction valve
OFF
Closed
Inlet valve
ON
Closed
Outlet valve
OFF
Closed
ACTIVE STABILITY CONTROL SYSTEM (ASC)
35C-17
DESCRIPTION OF CONSTRUCTION AND OPERATION
When brake fluid pressure is increased by normal braking or ABS
Master cylinder
Hydraulic unit
Outlet valve
Inlet valve
Cut valve
Suction valve
Brake fluid flow
Wheel
cylinder
(Front)
Outlet valve
Inlet valve
Suction
damper
Pressure sensor
Pump
Damping
chamber
Wheel
cylinder
(Rear)
Low pressure
accumulator
Motor
ACC00363AD
The system opens the inlet valve while closing the
outlet valve to increase the brake fluid pressure in
the wheel cylinder.
VALVE CONDITION
Item
Power status
Open/Close
Cut valve
OFF
Open
Suction valve
OFF
Closed
Inlet valve
OFF
Open
Outlet valve
OFF
Closed
ACTIVE STABILITY CONTROL SYSTEM (ASC)
35C-18
DESCRIPTION OF CONSTRUCTION AND OPERATION
When brake fluid pressure is increased by stability control (or increased by TCL)
Master cylinder
Hydraulic unit
Outlet valve
Inlet valve
Wheel
cylinder
(Front)
Cut valve
Suction valve
Outlet valve
Inlet valve
Suction
damper
Pressure sensor
Pump
Wheel
cylinder
(Rear)
Damping
chamber
Brake fluid flow
Low pressure
accumulator
Motor
ACC00363AE
The system closes the cut valve to block the passage from the pump outlet to the master cylinder,
and opens the suction valve, connecting the passage
from the master cylinder to the pump inlet. The brake
fluid from the master cylinder is supplied to the wheel
cylinder.
VALVE CONDITION
Item
Power status
Open/Close
Cut valve
ON
Closed
Suction valve
ON
Open
Inlet valve*
OFF
Open
Outlet valve*
OFF
Closed
NOTE: * The inlet valve and the outlet valve close or
open depending on driving conditions to control the
brake fluid pressure at each wheel.
ACTIVE STABILITY CONTROL SYSTEM (ASC)
35C-19
DESCRIPTION OF CONSTRUCTION AND OPERATION
When brake fluid pressure is held by stability control, TCL or HSA (Hill Start Assist)
function
Master cylinder
Hydraulic unit
Outlet valve
Inlet valve
Wheel
cylinder
(Front)
Cut valve
Suction valve
Outlet valve
Inlet valve
Suction
damper
Pressure sensor
Pump
Wheel
cylinder
(Rear)
Damping
chamber
Brake fluid flow
Low pressure
accumulator
Motor
ACC00363AF
The system closes the cut valve, suction valve and
outlet valve to hold the brake fluid pressure in the
wheel cylinder.
VALVE CONDITION
Item
Power status
Open/Close
Cut valve
ON
Closed
Suction valve
OFF
Closed
OFF
Open
OFF
Closed
Inlet
valve*
Outlet valve*
NOTE: * The inlet valve and the outlet valve close or
open depending on driving conditions to control the
brake fluid pressure at each wheel.
ACTIVE STABILITY CONTROL SYSTEM (ASC)
35C-20
DESCRIPTION OF CONSTRUCTION AND OPERATION
When brake fluid pressure is decreased by stability control (or decreased by TCL)
Master cylinder
Hydraulic unit
Outlet valve
Inlet valve
Wheel
cylinder
(Front)
Cut valve
Suction valve
Outlet valve
Inlet valve
Suction
damper
Pressure sensor
Pump
Wheel
cylinder
(Rear)
Damping
chamber
Brake fluid flow
Low pressure
accumulator
Motor
ACC00363AG
The system opens the outlet valve while closing the
inlet valve to store the brake fluid filled in the wheel
cylinder in the low pressure accumulator. The brake
fluid stored in the low pressure accumulator returns
to the master cylinder through the suction valve.
VALVE CONDITION
Item
Power status
Open/Close
Cut valve
OFF
Open
Suction valve
OFF
Closed
Inlet valve*
ON
Closed
Outlet valve*
ON
Open
NOTE: * The inlet valve and the outlet valve close or
open depending on driving conditions to control the
brake fluid pressure at each wheel.
TCL OPERATION
ASC-ECU receives various kinds of information from
the engine-ECU, 4WD-ECU, steering wheel sensor,
G & yaw rate sensor, CVT-ECU, and wheel speed
sensor. When ASC-ECU determines that the driving
wheel is slipping, it suppresses the wheel slippage.
At this time, ASC-ECU controls the brake fluid pres-
sure of the driving wheel determined to be slipping
so that the torque is transferred to another driving
wheel. Basically, the operations of ABS solenoid
valve and ASC valve are the same. ASC-ECU, the
engine-ECU, and CVT-ECU communicate with each
ACTIVE STABILITY CONTROL SYSTEM (ASC)
DESCRIPTION OF CONSTRUCTION AND OPERATION
35C-21
other via the CAN bus line. When the accelerator
pedal is depressed too far, the signal requesting the
engine speed reduction is sent to the engine-ECU.
The ASC-ECU performs joint control with CVT-ECU
and secures the TCL controllability.
HSA OPERATION
ASC-ECU receives various kinds of information from
the engine ECU, G & yaw rate sensor, CVT-ECU,
ETACS-ECU and wheel speed sensor. When the
vehicle has been completely stopped on a slope by
the service brake, the ASC-ECU activates the HSA.
The HSA maintains the brake wheel cylinder pres-
sure by closing the cut valve to prevent the vehicle
from sliding down the slope when the brake pedal is
released at startup. It also adjusts the brake wheel
cylinder pressure depending on the engine torque to
prevent the vehicle from moving backward during
startup.
36-1
GROUP 36
PARKING BRAKES
CONTENTS
GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . .
36-2
PARKING BRAKES
36-2
GENERAL INFORMATION
GENERAL INFORMATION
M2360000101165
A parking brake lever is used to operate the mechanical rear-wheel acting type parking brake.
CONSTRUCTION DIAGRAM
<2WD>
Parking brake lever
Parking brake rear cable
ACB04927AB
37-1
GROUP 37
ELECTRIC POWER
STEERING (EPS)
CONTENTS
GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . .
37-2
STEERING WHEEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
37-3
STEERING SHAFT AND COLUMN. .
37-4
ELECTRIC POWER STEERING. . . . .
37-5
GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . .
37-5
MOTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
37-7
TORQUE SENSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
37-8
ELECTRIC POWER STEERING-ECU (EPS-ECU)
......................................
37-8
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
37-9
ELECTRIC POWER STEERING (EPS)
37-2
GENERAL INFORMATION
GENERAL INFORMATION
M2370000102158
An electrical power steering system has been
adopted.
FEATURES
• 3-spoke type steering wheel integrated with an
SRS air bag has been adopted.
• Shock absorbing mechanism has been adopted
with the steering column shaft assembly.
• Improved fuel consumption by reduction of
engine load, and weight saving by decrease of
the number of parts have been achieved with the
introduction of the electric power steering system.
SPECIFICATIONS
Item
Specification
Steering wheel
Type
3-spoke type
Outside diameter mm
370
Maximum number of turns
3.3
Power steering type
Steering gear
Steering angle
Electrical powered type
Type
Rack and pinion type
Stroke ratio (Rack stroke/Steering
wheel maximum number of turns)
mm/rev
43.69
Rack stroke mm
144
Inner wheel
38° 50'
Outer wheel (reference value)
32° 20'
CONSTRUCTION DIAGRAM
Steering column shaft assembly
Steering wheel assembly
Motor
Electric power steering-ECU (EPS-ECU)
Torque sensor
Steering gear and linkage
Front axle crossmember
ACA00055AC
ELECTRIC POWER STEERING (EPS)
37-3
STEERING WHEEL
STEERING WHEEL
M2370001001474
<Urethane steering wheel>
A
Bezel cover
<Leather steering wheel>
Bezel cover
A
Section A - A
Driver's air bag
module
Inflator
Steering wheel
remote control
switch
Cruise control switch
A
A
Driver's air bag module
Driver's air bag module
ACB05486 AB
The steering wheel is designed to improve operability, safety and maintainability and has the following
features:
• The 3-spoke type has been adopted. The steering wheel made of urethane or leather has been
adopted.
• Steering wheel remote control switch (steering
wheel audio remote control switch, steering
wheel voice control switch) and cruise control
switch are available on some models.
• It incorporates an SRS airbag to protect the driver
in the event of a frontal collision (single inflator).
ELECTRIC POWER STEERING (EPS)
37-4
STEERING SHAFT AND COLUMN
STEERING SHAFT AND COLUMN
M2370002001046
Motor
Torque sensor
Steering column shaft
Intermediate shaft
A
Tilt lever
Contracting mechanism
View A
One-way capsule
ACB05495AB
The steering shaft and column, which informs the
EPS-ECU of steering effort on the steering wheel,
consist of a torque sensor and motors, etc. They are
designed to improve safety, and has the following
features:
• Shock absorbing mechanism has been adopted
to the steering column which absorbs the impact
energy at collision and provides safety to the
driver.
• Collapsible steering column has been employed.
During a collision, the steering wheel moves forward.
• The adoption of the collapsible steering column
construction prevents the fallaway sections from
being affected by the impact at primary collision,
and stabilises the shock absorbing capability.
Also, the secondary collision impact is partially
absorbed by the collapsible steering column construction, enhancing the collapse performance.
IMPACT-ABSORBING MECHANISM
PRIMARY COLLISION
Before collision
Intermediate shaft (A)
Intermediate shaft (B)
After collision
Intermediate shaft (A)
Intermediate shaft (B)
ACB05496AB
ELECTRIC POWER STEERING (EPS)
37-5
ELECTRIC POWER STEERING
When a vehicle crash occurs and the intermediate
shaft is loaded from the gearbox side, the intermediate shaft (A) is forced into the intermediate shaft (B)
to absorb an impact load. By this, a rearward outthrusting of steering column is prevented.
SECONDARY COLLISION
Before collision
Resin pin
Column
bracket
Column
pipe inner A
One-way
capsule
A Column
pipe outer
Sectional view A - A
After collision
B
B
Sectional view B - B
ACB03550 AB
When the driver's body falls against the steering
wheel via the deployed air bag, the column bracket
moves forwards by deforming the rivet pin of the
one-way capsule.
ELECTRIC POWER STEERING
GENERAL INFORMATION
M2370000102169
Vehicle-speed sensitive electric power steering
(whole range type) has been adopted. This system
allows a light steering force during stationary steering manoeuvre or low speed driving, and a moderate
steering force during medium or high speed driving.
For vehicles with this system, the EPS-ECU controls
the motor current according to the vehicle speed and
steering force of the steering wheel.
CAN* communication has been adopted in order to
communicate with another ECUs for obtaining necessary information related to this control, achieving
wiring harness saving and secure data communication.
NOTE: *: For more information about CAN (Controller Area Network), refer to GROUP 54C, General
Information .
SPECIFICATIONS
Item
Motor
Specification
Type
Permanent magnetic field type
Rated voltage V
DC 12
Rated current Arms
82
Torque sensor
Type
Noncontact type hole IC type
EPS-ECU
Control type
Microcomputer control (32 bit)
Rated voltage V
DC 12
ELECTRIC POWER STEERING (EPS)
37-6
ELECTRIC POWER STEERING
GENERAL DESCRIPTION ON SYSTEM
Motor
EPS-ECU
Torque sensor
ACB05501AB
To improve operational reliability, the dual-circuit system has been adopted for the torque sensor. If any
malfunction occurs in the electric power steering system, the fail-safe function of the EPS-ECU is activated, and the output current of the EPS-ECU
applied to the motor is turned off. At the same time,
the steering system enters manual mode, and
informs a driver of the system malfunction by illuminating the warning lamp on the combination meter.
The warning lamp illuminates when the following
malfunctions occur: open circuit in the electric power
steering system wiring harness, poor connection,
malfunctions in the EPS-ECU, motor, or sensors.
ELECTRICAL PARTS AND FUNCTIONS
Parts name
Sensor
Actuator
EPS-ECU
Description about function
Wheel speed sensor (ABS-ECU
or ASC-ECU)
The vehicle speed signal is sent from the ABS-ECU or
ASC-ECU to the EPS-ECU via the engine-ECU.
Torque sensor
Detects a steering force, converts it into the voltage signal,
and then sends the signal to the EPS-ECU.
Motor
Generates assist torque by the steering operation to the
column shaft using the signals sent from the EPS-ECU.
Electric power steering warning
lamp (in combination meter)
Warns a driver of the system malfunction using the signal
sent from the EPS-ECU.
Control the actuator (motor) based on the signal sent from
sensor.
Controls the self-diagnostic function and fail-safe function.
Controls diagnostic function (Compatible with M.U.T.-III).
ELECTRIC POWER STEERING (EPS)
37-7
ELECTRIC POWER STEERING
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
Output current value
EPS-ECU Power supply
Ignition switch
Engine speed
Engine-ECU
Vehicle speed
Earth
EPS warning lamp
EPS-ECU
Odometer
(distance information)
Diagnosis code allowed
to be stored
ETACS-ECU
Combination
meter
Additional Torque
AWC-ECU
Torque sensor signal (main)
Diagnosis code output
Diagnosis
connector
Torque sensor signal (sub)
Torque sensor
Motor current
Motor
Steering column
shaft assembly
NOTE:
line indicates the CAN communication.
ACB05502 AB
MOTOR
M2370001100122
Motor
A
Worm shaft
A
Reduction gear
Sectional view A - A
ACB05503AB
The EPS motor receives the control current from the
EPS-ECU, and rotates in accordance with steering
operation. The rotational force generated by the EPS
motor is transmitted via the worm shaft and the
reduction gear to the column shaft.
ELECTRIC POWER STEERING (EPS)
37-8
ELECTRIC POWER STEERING
TORQUE SENSOR
M2370001600020
Torque sensor
Torque sensor characteristic chart
Output voltage (V)
Main
5
Torque sensor
Sub
2.5
Input shaft
Neutral
Torsion bar
Lower shaft
ACB05508AB
ELECTRIC POWER STEERING-ECU
(EPS-ECU)
The torque sensor is mounted on the column shaft,
and detects the steering force. When the steering
wheel is turned, the phase relationship between the
input shaft and the lower shaft will be changed due to
distortion of the torsion bar. The torque sensor will
detect the distortion angle and send two voltage signals (main and sub) to the EPS-ECU in accordance
with it.
M2370000800195
The EPS-ECU includes an input interface circuit, a
microprocessor, an output drive circuit, a power relay
and a motor line relay. It also integrates a self-diagnostic function, and illuminates the warning lamp on
the combination meter when a trouble occurs. At the
same time, it sends diagnosis code(s) to the diagnosis connector.
CAN communication
The EPS-ECU communicates with the other ECUs
and other units through CAN communication to control the steering system.
Input signals
Sent to
Engine-ECU
AWC-ECU
Combination
meter (via the
ETACS-ECU)
ETACS-ECU
Engine speed
•
−
−
−
Vehicle speed
•
−
−
−
Additional torque
•
Distance information (diagnosis −
additional information)
−
•
−
−
−
−
•
Vehicle information (diagnosis
control)
NOTE: Indicates items which send and receive data
through CAN communication.
ELECTRIC POWER STEERING (EPS)
37-9
ELECTRIC POWER STEERING
Output signal name
Received by
Engine-ECU
Combination meter
(via the ETACS-ECU)
Diagnosis connector
Motor current signal
•
−
−
EPS warning lamp illumination
request signal
−
•
−
Diagnosis code signal
−
−
•
Service data output signal
−
−
•
NOTE: Indicates items which send and receive data
through CAN communication.
Fail-safe function
If the EPS-ECU detects any malfunction, it illuminates the EPS warning lamp, deactivates the EPS
functions, and then switches the steering system into
manual mode.
DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION
The EPS-ECU has the following functions to make
system checks easier.
• Diagnosis code set
• Service data output
All the above items can be diagnosed using MUT-III.
Diagnosis code set
There are 29 diagnostic items. Since all the diagnostic results are recorded in volatile memory (EEPROM*), they are stored in the memory even though
the battery terminals are disconnected.
Engine-ECU
Engine speed
Service data output
Using M.U.T.-III, the input data sent from the sensors
and motors can be read.
NOTE: For service data items, refer to Workshop
Manual.
OPERATION
M2370000700217
IGNITION SWITCH ON
Ignition supply voltage is applied to the EPS-ECU,
and the ECU enters standby mode.
Electric power
steering-ECU
500 r/min
Engine speed
NOTE: .
• *EEPROM (Electrical Erasable & Programmable
ROM): Special type of memory that can be programmed or erased electrically.
• For diagnosis items, refer to Workshop Manual.
Motor current signal
Motor
ON
OFF
Maximum limit value (82Arms)
Motor output
OFF
min 0.6 second
Determination of motor
control start
0.8 second
Temporary increase of motor
assist limit value
1. When the engine is started, the engine speed signal sent from the engine-ECU is input to the
EPS-ECU.
AC611649AJ
2. After starting the engine, the EPS-ECU judges
the engine status "ENGINE SPEED ON" when
the engine speed reaches 500 r/min, then the
power assist function is ready.
ELECTRIC POWER STEERING (EPS)
37-10
ELECTRIC POWER STEERING
STEERING WHEEL OPERATION
Torque sensor signal (main)
Torque sensor
Torque sensor signal (sub)
EPS-ECU
Motor current
Motor
ACB05506AB
1. When the steering wheel is operated, the torque
sensor integrated into the column shaft detects
the steering torque and outputs the torque sensor
signal (main and sub), which varies with the
steering force, to the EPS-ECU.
2. The EPS-ECU outputs the current in proportion to
the torque sensor signal to the motor.
3. The motor outputs the rotational torque (assist
torque) in proportion to the current intensity and
assists the power steering gear.
FAIL-SAFE FUNCTION OPERATION
During the fail-safe mode, the electric power steering
operates as a manual steering system.
42-1
GROUP 42
BODY
CONTENTS
BODY
KEYLESS OPERATION SYSTEM (KOS)
42A-1
GROUP 42A
BODY
CONTENTS
GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . .
42A-2
KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM <Vehicles without keyless
operation system> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42A-12
MAIN BODY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
42A-3
POWER WINDOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
42A-16
BODY PANELLING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
42A-3
ELECTRIC TAILGATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
42A-17
BODY SHELL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
42A-4
WEATHERSTRIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
42A-32
QUIETNESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
42A-7
BODY COLOUR CHARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . .
42A-7
WINDOW GLASS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42A-33
HOOD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
42A-8
SUNROOF. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42A-34
DOOR AND TAILGATE . . . . . . . . . . .
42A-9
LOOSE PANELS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42A-37
DOOR AND TAILGATE LOCK . . . . . . . . . .
42A-9
CUSTOMISE FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . 42A-37
BODY
42A-2
GENERAL INFORMATION
GENERAL INFORMATION
M2420000102064
FEATURES
LIGHT WEIGHT, HIGH RIGIDITY,
ANTI-CORROSIVE
• High-tensile steel plates and anti-corrosion steel
plates have been adopted.
• The ring structure for the side structure reinforcement has been adopted.
• A front floor side member has been adopted.
REDUCTION IN VIBRATION AND NOISE
• Sound dampening foam material and urethane
foam have been adopted.
IMPROVEMENTS IN SAFETY
• The one-touch power window (operative after
ignition switch is turned OFF) with safety mechanism has been installed.
• The direct combination key cylinder and inside
lock cables for the front doors have been adopted
to improve door opening operation upon impact.
• RISE (Reinforced Impact Safety Evolution) has
been adopted for the main body.
• The side door beam has been adopted.
• The crush box structure has been adopted to the
front end of front sidemember .
• The front end side panel under the engine compartment absorbs impact energy during frontal
collision more effectively than the predecessor.
• The impact-absorbing structure has been utilised
on the fender, and the cowl top to improve the
pedestrian protection capability.
• The fender bracket padding structure has been
adopted.
IMPROVEMENTS IN OPERATION
PERFORMANCE
• The central door locking system which can
lock/unlock all the doors and tailgate has been
adopted.
• The override function which allows to open the
driver's door by pulling the driver's inside handle
when all the doors are locked has been adopted.
• Electric tailgate lock release handle that requires
only the slightest operating force has been
adopted.
• The electric tailgate with safety mechanism has
been installed as an option.
IMPROVEMENTS IN MARKETABILITY
AND APPEARANCE
• By improving an audible clicking sound when the
door latch and striker are engaged, the door locking sound quality has been enhanced.
• The high rigidity pressed door has been adopted
to improve the rigidity of the door sash bottom
section.
• The wiper deicer has been added to the windshield as an option <Optional>
• The privacy glasses for the rear door window
glass, quarter window glass and tailgate window
glass have been adopted as an option.
• The latch cover has been installed to the hood
latch front section to deter thieves.
• The sunroof with safety mechanism has been
installed as an option.
IMPROVEMENTS IN FUNCTIONALITY
• The fuel filler cap holder has been installed to the
fuel lid in order to prevent the fuel cap from being
left open.
BODY
42A-3
MAIN BODY
MAIN BODY
BODY PANELLING
M2420002001554
*
*
*
*
**
*
*
**
*
*
**
*
*
*
*
*
*
**
*
*
*
*
**
*
NOTE:
*
: Anti-corrosion steel panels
: High-tensile steel panels (*: Indicates 590MPa-high-tensile steel panels.)
(**: Indicates 980MPa-ultra-high-tensile steel panels.)
*
*
ABC00060 AC
BODY
42A-4
MAIN BODY
• RISE (Reinforced Impact Safety Evolution) has
been adopted for the main body in order to
improve all-round impact safety at high level.
• The applications of anti-corrosion steel plates
have been expanded to the hood, doors, inner
panel of the tailgate and reinforcements to
improve the anti-corrosive properties of the main
body.
• Some high-tensile steel panels in 590 MPa-class
and 980 MPa-class have been adopted to
improve the rigidity and weight reduction of the
panel.
• The sealer application area has been extended to
the entire flange folded edge of the doors, hood,
and tailgate, and the panel joints at the bottom of
the front floor and the rear floor, in order to
improve rust resistance.
BODY SHELL
M2420003001320
IMPACT SAFETY BODY RISE (REINFORCED IMPACT SAFETY EVOLUTION)
3
2
1
A
4
ABB00849AB
D
B
C
ABC00042AB
BODY
42A-5
MAIN BODY
1 View A
3 View B
Crush box
Front floor
sidemember
3 View C
4 Section D - D
Front floor
sidemember
Cowl top
outer panel
Cowl top stay
ABC00043AB
The front and rear structures to absorb high energy,
and the highly tough cabin structure are adopted to
reduce the risk of passenger injuries at front-, rear-,
and side-impact collisions, secure the space for life
protection, and facilitate rescuing passengers. These
structures also have the following features:
1. The crush box structure has been adopted to the
front end of the front sidemember to improve the
characteristics at a minor frontal collision.
2. The ring structure of the side structure reinforcement has been adopted to improve the collision
characteristics and the rigidity of the whole vehicle.
3. A front floor sidemember is located in and under
the front floor to improve frontal collision safety.
4. The padding structure of the cowl top is designed
to have a crushable structure in order to efficiently absorb energy upon impact, thus improving the pedestrian protection capability.
42A-6
BODY
MAIN BODY
STEEL PLATE WITH UNEVEN THICKNESS
Front door inner panel
Thickness is thicker on the forward
part of the vehicle from this line.
ABB00850AB
The uneven thickness steel panels* (in uneven thickness integrated structure) have been adopted for the
parts shown in the figure to improve safety upon
impact and reduce weight.
NOTE: *: A steel sheet of varying thickness that is
welded into one steel sheet.
BODY
42A-7
MAIN BODY
QUIETNESS
M2420004000911
1
1
1
2
1
ABB00855AB
1. The sound dampening foam material has been
adopted to the upper and lower sections of the
front pillar, roof side rail section, centre pillar
lower section, wheel house arch, and rear end
inside to shield from external noise.
2. Urethane foam has been inserted into the centre
pillar lower section to shield from external noise.
BODY COLOUR CHARTS
M2420005002891
Two types of colour variation have been introduced;
the colour suggesting the great nature or the colour
providing the sporty and tough impression. Colour
names have been modified for easy recognition. The
colour recipe is the same as the conventional one.
BODY COLOUR TABLE
Colour
Colour Colour
code
number
Colour name
Coating film Composition of film
structure
SILVER
A31
CMA10031 Cool Silver Metallic
2M
Metallic
REDDISH BROWN
C07
CMC10007 Copper Metallic
2M
Metallic
DARK BLUE
D14
CMD10014 Cosmic Blue Mica
2P
Interferenced Pearl
GREY
U17
CMU10017 Titanium Grey Metallic
2M
Metallic
BLUISH SILVER
U21
CMU10021 Technical Silver Metallic 2M
Metallic
BODY
42A-8
HOOD
Colour
Colour Colour
code
number
Colour name
WHITE
W13
CMW10013 White Pearl
3P
Pearl
WHITE
W37
CMW10037 White Solid
2S
Solid
BLACK
X42
AC11342
2P
Interferenced Pearl
Black Mica
Coating film Composition of film
structure
NOTE: .
• The coating film structure indicates top coating only (2S: 2 coat solid, 2M: 2 coat metallic, 2P: 2 coat pearl,
3P: 3 coat pearl).
• For painting, inner panel colours should be similar to the outer panel colours.
HOOD
M2420023000738
HOOD LATCH
The latch cover has been installed to the front of the
hood latch to deter thieves.
Hood latch
Latch cover
ACB04934AB
BODY
42A-9
DOOR AND TAILGATE
DOOR AND TAILGATE
DOOR AND TAILGATE LOCK
M2420001100317
CENTRAL DOOR LOCKING
<Front door>
<Rear door>
Outside handle
Outside handle
Inside lock cable
Key cylinder
(Driver's side only)
Inside lock cable
Inside lock knob
Inside lock knob
Door check
Door latch
assembly
Door check
Door latch
assembly
Door lock
actuator
Door lock
actuator
Inside handle cable
Inside handle cable
Inside handle
Inside handle
ACB05642AB
<Tailgate upper (Except vehicles with electric tailgate)>
Tailgate lock
release handle
Location of the door lock switch
Driver's side
Tailgate lock actuator
Door lock switch
ACB04935
Tailgate latch assembly
ACB05432
• The central door locking system that
locks/unlocks all the doors and tailgate using the
driver's side door lock switch has been installed.
ACC00210AB
• The child protection function has been introduced
to prevent the rear doors from being opened accidentally during driving.
• The key-in prevention function has been introduced.
BODY
42A-10
DOOR AND TAILGATE
• The selector "P" position-linked door unlocking
function has been introduced.
• The ignition switch "LOCK (OFF)" position-linked
door unlocking function has been introduced.
• The direct combination key cylinder mechanism
has been adopted.
DESCRIPTION OF CONSTRUCTION AND
OPERATION
CENTRAL DOOR LOCKING
• When the driver's door lock switch is pushed to
the lock position with all doors closed, all the
doors and tailgate will be locked. With the driver's
door opened, the driver's door lock switch cannot
be operated (blocking mechanism).<Driver's side
only>
• The function that allows the driver's door to be
opened by pulling the driver's door inside handle
even when the driver's door inside lock knob is in
the lock position is called "override function". All
the doors and tailgate can be unlocked at the
same time.
•
ON
Lock switch
SELECTOR "P" POSITION-LINKED DOOR
UNLOCKING FUNCTION
• When the selector lever is shifted to the "P" (parking) position with the ignition switch turned ON,
all the doors will be unlocked automatically,
improving passengers' convenience for getting
out. Using a customise feature, the selector "P"
position-linked door unlocking function can be
changed (Refer to P.42A-37).
•
Inhibitor switch "P"
ON
OFF
Unlock relay output
ON
OFF
t
t: 0.25 second
AC900907AB
When the selector lever is shifted to the P position
with the ignition switch turned ON, the inhibitor
switch "P" turns ON, ETACS-ECU turns the
unlock relay output ON for 0.25 second to unlock
all the doors.
OFF
Unlock switch
IGNITION SWITCH "LOCK (OFF)"
POSITION-LINKED DOOR UNLOCKING
FUNCTION
ON
OFF
Lock relay output
ON
OFF
Unlock relay output
t
ON
OFF
t: 0.25 second
t
AC101496AC
When the driver's door is locked, ETACS-ECU turns
the lock relay output ON for 0.25 second to lock
all the doors (including the tailgate). When the
driver's door is unlocked, ETACS-ECU turns the
unlock relay output ON for 0.25 second to unlock
all the doors (including the tailgate).
KEY-IN PREVENTION FUNCTION
When the driver's door inside lock knob is operated
to the lock position with the driver's door opened, the
driver's door cannot be locked, preventing it from
being locked with the key inside the vehicle.
• When the ignition switch is turned to the " LOCK
(OFF)" position, all the doors will be unlocked
automatically, improving passengers' convenience for getting out. Using a customise function,
the ignition switch " LOCK (OFF)" position-linked
door unlocking function can be changed (Refer to
P.42A-37).
•
Ignition switch
"LOCK (OFF)"
Unlock relay output
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
t
t: 0.25 second
AC900907AC
When the ignition switch is turned to the " LOCK
(OFF)" position, ETACS-ECU turns the unlock
relay output ON for 0.25 second to unlock all the
doors.
BODY
42A-11
DOOR AND TAILGATE
DIRECT COMBINATION KEY CYLINDER
MECHANISM
•
Direct combination
key cylinder mechanism
The electric tailgate lock release handle which
requires a small operating force and has no temperature dependency has been adopted to improve the
opening operation. The switch will be turned on by
pressing the arrow mark on tailgate lock release handle.
NOTE: If the tailgate cannot be opened from the outside of the vehicle due to any malfunction such as
discharged battery, it can be opened from the inside
of the vehicle using the following procedures:
.
1.
Tailgate trim
Key cylinder
Cover
Door latch
ACB05450AB
ACB05669AB
The structure in which an impact of a side collision is
not easily transferred to the door latch with the
doors unlocked has been established to facilitate
the door opening operation. (To prevent passengers from falling out of the vehicle)
• Even if any door key cylinder is attempted to be
tampered with the doors locked, the tampering
force is not easily transferred to the door latch to
deter thieves.
TAILGATE
TAILGATE LOCK RELEASE HANDLE
From the inside of the vehicle, remove the emergency lever cover installed to the tailgate trim.
2.
<Except electric tailgate>
Emergency lever
<Electric tailgate>
ACC00475
Tailgate lock release handle
Emergency lever
ACB05671AB
ACC00476
ACC00501AB
Operate the emergency lever to the direction of the
arrow.
3. Open the tailgate while pushing it up.
BODY
42A-12
DOOR AND TAILGATE
TAILGATE OPENER CONTROL
FUNCTION
Vehicle speed
0km/h
UNLOCK
Tailgate
When the tailgate lock release handle is operated to
open the tailgate (the tailgate lock release handle
switch turns ON) while the vehicle is parked and the
tailgate is unlocked, ETACS-ECU turns the unlock
relay output ON for 0.3 seconds, thus the tailgate
can be opened by the tailgate lock release handle.
LOCK
Tailgate lock
release handle
switch
Unlock relay output
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
t: 0.3 second
t
AC302457AB
KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM <Vehicles without keyless operation system>
M2420010001117
Receiver antenna
ACB05509
Radio frequency signal
Transmitter
ETACS-ECU
Lock switch
Electric signal
Unlock switch
AC402532
Door lock actuators (lock/unlock)
Tailgate latch assembly
Door mirror assembly (unfolding/folding)
The signal causes the hazard warning lamp to flash once when the doors are locked, or flash twice when unlocked (Initial setting).
The signal causes the room lamp to extinguish when the doors are locked, or come on for 15 seconds when unlocked.
ACC00258 AB
The keyless entry system is installed. There are the
following features.
• Transmitter has two switches (LOCK/UNLOCK).
• The power door locks with selective unlocking
has been adopted.
• The receiver antenna is equipped with the integral receiver and receiving antenna.
• Up to 8 encrypted codes (8 transmitters) can be
registered using M.U.T.-III.
• Answer-back function has been adopted.
• Using the LOCK/UNLOCK switches, all doors
(including tailgate) can be locked or unlocked.
BODY
DOOR AND TAILGATE
• By using the lock/unlock switches, the driver can
lock/unlock all the doors (including tailgate),
fold/unfold the door mirrors.
• NOTE: Using a customisation function, the operation of the door mirrors can be enabled or disabled (Refer to P.42A-37).
DESCRIPTION OF STRUCTURE AND
OPERATION
TRANSMITTER
•
<Front view>
Indicator lamp
Lock switch
Unlock switch
42A-13
The transmitter is integrated into the master key.
• When either switch is pressed, the transmitter
emits a radio signal representing a specific ID
code.
• There are two switches on the transmitter; the
lock switch and the unlock switch.
• An indicator lamp, which illuminates when signals
are transmitted, is added on the key grip. This
indicator lamp informs you of the signal transmission status and warns you of flat battery.
• A brilliant silver Three-diamond mark is stamped
on the back side of the key grip to improve
appearance.
• A signal transmission circuit (printed circuit) and
a battery are housed in one case. The case is
housed in the key grip, thus improving resistance
to water ingress.
• A coin type battery, CR1616 is used in the transmitter.
• The transmitter switch operation allows the system to operate as follows:
AC302207
<Rear view>
Three-diamond mark
AC309781
AC403982 AC
Function
Transmitter operation
System operation
Standard function
(lock/unlock)
Press the lock switch once.
All doors (including the tailgate) are
locked.
NOTE: If the retracting function of the
electric folding mirrors is added using a
customisation function, it can be retracted
in synchronisation with a lock operation.
Press the unlock switch once.
All doors (including the tailgate) are
unlocked.
NOTE: If the opening function of the
electrical folding mirrors is added as an
adjustment function, it can be opened in
synchronisation with an unlock operation.
BODY
42A-14
DOOR AND TAILGATE
Function
Transmitter operation
System operation
Multi mode
function
Press the lock switch once to lock all doors The door mirrors are retracted.
(including the tailgate), and within 30
seconds press the lock switch twice
consecutively.
Press the unlock switch once to unlock all The door mirrors return to the original
doors (including the tailgate), and within
position.
30 seconds press the unlock switch twice
consecutively.
Power door locks
with selective
unlocking
Press the unlock switch once to unlock the
driver’s door, and within 2 seconds, press
the unlock switch again to unlock the front
passenger’s door, rear doors and tailgate.
POWER DOOR LOCKS WITH SELECTIVE
UNLOCKING
• Responding to the adoption of power door locks
with selective unlocking, the anti-theft feature has
been improved.
• When the lock/unlock switch of front door
(driver's side) is pressed once, only the driver's
door is unlocked. When the lock/unlock switch of
front door (driver's side) is pressed once again
within 2 seconds after the driver's door is
unlocked, the front passenger's door, rear doors,
and the tailgate are unlocked.
• When the unlock switch on the transmitter is
pressed once, only the driver's door is unlocked.
When the transmitter unlock switch is pressed
once again within 2 seconds after the driver's
door is unlocked, the front passenger's door, rear
doors, and the tailgate are unlocked.
• Using a customisation function, the power door
locks with selective unlocking can be enabled or
disabled (Refer to ).
ENCRYPTED CODE
Power door locks with selective unlocking.
NOTE: Using a customisation function, the
power door locks with selective unlocking
can be enabled or disabled.
The figure shows the codes transmitted from the
transmitter. Every time the switch is pressed, the
data code is transmitted twice. The encrypted code
for user identification is a combination of 0 and 1,
and more than 1 million different combinations are
available. In addition to the encrypted code, the data
code contains a rolling code that changes at each
transmission, protecting transmission codes from
theft by coping.
RECEIVER ANTENNA
The receiver antenna receives the signal from the
transmitter and sends the signal to the ETACS.
ETACS-ECU
ETACS-ECU compares the signal the receiver
antenna received from the transmitter with the
encrypted code registered in it, and when they coincided, operates keyless entry function (door lock,
unlock, etc.). By connecting M.U.T.-III to the diagnosis connector, encrypted codes of up to eight transmitters can be registered.
FUNCTION FOR CONFIRMING
ETACS-ECU OUTPUT AND OPERATION
Transmitter lock or unlock button
ON
OFF
Data
code
AC508281AB
The ETACS-ECU outputs LOCK/UNLOCK signal
and informs the driver of the keyless entry system
operation by flashing the lamp (Answer-back). Using
a customisation feature, the flashing patterns for the
answer-back function can be changed according to
the table below. The initial setting at factory for the
answer-back function is as follows: "Hazard warning
lamp: LOCK, Flash once, UNLOCK, Flash twice /
Room lamp: LOCK, Flash once, UNLOCK, Stay on
for 15 seconds." Using a customisation feature, the
hazard answer-back function can be changed (Refer
to P.42A-37).
BODY
42A-15
DOOR AND TAILGATE
KEYLESS ENTRY HAZARD LAMP
ANSWERBACK FUNCTION
Keyless entry
transmitter
switch
When LOCK signal from the keyless entry transmitter is input to the ETACS-ECU, all doors (including
tailgate) are locked and the hazard warning lamp
flashes once. When UNLOCK signal is input, all
doors (including tailgate) are unlocked and the hazard warning lamp flashes twice.
LOCK
OFF
UNLOCK
ON
Lock relay output
KEYLESS ENTRY ROOM LAMP
ANSWER-BACK FUNCTION
OFF
ON
Unlock relay output
OFF
Illuminate
Hazard
warning lamp Extinguish
AC207001AB
ON
Unlock relay output
OFF
ON
Lock relay output
OFF
ON
Door lock switch
output
OFF
ON
Door unlock switch
output
OFF
Illuminate
Room lamp
Extinguish
b
a: 0.6 second
b: 1.2 seconds
c: 15 seconds
When the LOCK signal from the transmitter is input
to ETACS-ECU via the receiver antenna, all doors
(including tailgate) are locked, and the room lamp is
turned off in synchronisation with hazard lamp
answerback (when the room lamp is illuminated, the
lamp is turned off). Also, when the UNLOCK signal
from the transmitter is input to ETACS-ECU via the
receiver antenna, all doors (including tailgate) are
unlocked, and the room lamp is illuminated for 15
seconds in synchronisation with hazard lamp
answerback.
a
b
c
AC404883AB
KEYLESS ENTRY TIMER LOCK TIME
If any door is not opened or closed within 30 seconds
after the doors (including tailgate) are unlocked by
the keyless entry system, ETACS-ECU automatically
outputs the door lock signal to lock the doors (including tailgate). This function prevents the doors (including tailgate) from being unlocked unexpectedly by
operation errors. Using a customisation feature, the
keyless entry timer lock time can be changed (Refer
to P.42A-37).
OPERATION INHIBITION CONDITIONS
The operation of the keyless entry system is inhibited
in the following conditions.
• When the ignition key is inserted into the ignition
switch.
• When either door (including tailgate) is open (the
door switch: ON). (including door ajar)
BODY
42A-16
DOOR AND TAILGATE
POWER WINDOW
M2420022000735
<Rear door>
<Front door>
Door window glass
Door window glass
Power window motor
Power window regulator assembly
Power window motor
Power window regulator assembly
Power window main switch (Driver's side)
Power window switch
ACB05643
Power window
lock switch
ACB04936
ACC00214AB
The power window has the following features:
• The safety mechanism has been adopted.
• The power window timer function has been
adopted.
• The power window lock switch has been
adopted.
SAFETY MECHANISM
DESCRIPTION OF CONSTRUCTION AND
OPERATION
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
POWER WINDOW SWITCH
The power window switch has a waterproofing structure which prevents water (such as rain drops) entering from above. Should water enters, it is drained
through the hole located on the lower area of the
switch, and no water may be accumulated.
The power window with the safety mechanism has
been adopted. To enhance safety, if any obstacle
such as a hand or a head is detected to be pinched
during a window glass closing operation, the window
glass is opened by approximately 150 mm.
The power window switch has employed the
push-pull operation method to enhance safety. To
open a door window glass, press in the switch knob,
and to close, pull it up. The one-touch opening/closing mechanism has been adopted to the driver's
power window switch to fully open or close any door
window glass in a single operation.
BODY
42A-17
DOOR AND TAILGATE
POWER WINDOW TIMER FUNCTION
• The power window can be opened or closed after
the ignition switch is turned OFF by the timer
function. Using a customise feature, the timer
period can be changed. (Refer to P.42A-37.)
•
ON
OFF
Ignition switch
(IG1)
Driver's or front
passenger's
door switch
ON
(Open)
OFF
(Close)
Power window
relay
POWER WINDOW LOCK SWITCH
ON
OFF
t: 30 seconds
Even after the ignition is switched off, the
ETACS-ECU keeps the power window relay activated for approximately 30 seconds, enabling
raising or lowering of the power windows by using
the power window switches (timer function). After
approximately 30 seconds, the power window
relay is deactivated.
During this timer operation, if the driver’s or front
passenger’s door is opened, the power window
relay is deactivated from that moment.
t
ZC600258
AC607043AI
The driver power window switch is equipped with the
lock switch. This switch disables the opening/closing
operation of the door window glass using each passenger's power window switch. Using a customise
feature, the lock switch operation can be changed
(Refer to P.42A-37).
ELECTRIC TAILGATE
M2420001900078
Electric tailgate switch
Tailgate sensor
Electric tailgate main switch
Electric tailgate control unit
Keyless operation key
Tailgate lock
release handle
Lock switch
Unlock switch
ACB05433
Electric tailgate buzzer
Tailgate latch assembly
Electric tailgate close switch
Electric tailgate switch
ACB05461
The electric tailgate has been adopted as an option.
There are the following features.
ACC00271AB
• The electric tailgate can be opened and closed
automatically by using the electric tailgate switch
of the keyless operation key. (Refer to GROUP
42B − Keyless Entry Function .)
42A-18
BODY
DOOR AND TAILGATE
• The electric tailgate can be automatically opened
and closed using the electric tailgate switch.
• The electric tailgate can be closed fully by using
its close switch.
• The electric tailgate can be opened fully by using
its tailgate lock release handle.
• The safety mechanism has been adopted.
• A safety mechanism prevents the electric tailgate
from lowering.
• A mechanism, which prevents a sudden opening
and closing, has been adopted.
• The easy closer system has been adopted.
BODY
42A-19
DOOR AND TAILGATE
DESCRIPTION OF CONSTRUCTION AND
OPERATION
Electric tailgate control unit system circuit
Electric tailgate motor
Electromagnetic
clutch
Pulse
sensor
Tailgate motor
assembly
M
Electric tailgate
main switch
Electric tailgate
switch
Tailgate latch assembly
12
22
M
23
Latch
motor
11
Neutral switch
A/C-ECU
15
Full latch switch
4
OSS-ECU
Half latch switch
17
7
Combination
meter
Door-ajar switch
KOS-ECU
8
19
CPU
CVT-ECU
ABS-ECU
or
ASC-ECU
Electric tailgate
close switch
9
Tailgate lock
release handle
6
3
Ignition switch
ETACS-ECU
Electric tailgate
buzzer
13
5
1
26
Tailgate sensor (RH)
24
Tailgate sensor (LH)
25
2
Electric tailgate control unit
ACC00139AB
The electric tailgate control unit uses input signals
from switches to control the electric tailgate motor.
BODY
42A-20
DOOR AND TAILGATE
ELECTRIC TAILGATE CONTROL UNIT
Open
Arm
No.3 gear
No.2 gear
No.1 gear
Electric tailgate
motor assembly
Electric tailgate control unit
Close
The electric tailgate motor consists of an electric
motor assembly (incorporating an electromagnetic
clutch and gears), gears and arms. It is integrated in
the electric tailgate control unit. As the motor runs to
the open or close direction, the gears (No.1, No.2,
and No.3) will rotate in that order, thus turning the
arm.
ACB05624AB
BODY
42A-21
DOOR AND TAILGATE
TAILGATE LATCH
Neutral switch
OFF area
(Engaged side)
Latch motor
Lever
Neutral switch
ON area
(Disengaged side)
AC402604
Lever
ON
ON OFF
Half latch
switch
Door-ajar
switch
AC610260
OFF
Full latch
switch
OFF
AC402603
ON
AC610751 AB
The tailgate latch includes the latch motor and
switches. With each switch, ON and OFF is switched
by the lever movement.
• A half latch switch detects that the latch remains
ajar (not engaged fully). This prevents the electric
tailgate from opening unintentionally.
• A full latch switch detects that the electric tailgate
remains closed fully (overrun*).
NOTE: *: Overrun indicates that the striker is pulled
further to close side by the tailgate latch in order
to fully close the electric tailgate securely.
• A door-ajar switch detects the doors are closed
fully. In addition, the switch detects that the electric tailgate can be opened.
• A neutral switch detects the neutral position of
the latch motor.
BODY
42A-22
DOOR AND TAILGATE
TAILGATE SENSOR
When the electric tailgate main switch in the instrument panel is OFF, the electric tailgate cannot be
opened or closed automatically. This prevents the
electric tailgate from an unintentional operation
caused by the accidental pressing of electric tailgate
switch or electric tailgate close switch of the keyless
operation key.
NOTE: If you attempt to open or close the tailgate
automatically while the electric tailgate main switch is
off, the warning buzzer will sound four times to warn
that the electric tailgate cannot be operated.
ELECTRIC TAILGATE SWITCH
A
A
Tailgate sensor
Section A – A
ACB05468
Normal state
Pressure sensor
Electric tailgate switch
ACB05029AB
AC402600
Section A – A
Jammed state
Pressure sensor
When you press and hold the electric tailgate switch
on the instrument panel, the electric tailgate is automatically opened or closed to its full position.
ELECTRIC TAILGATE CLOSE SWITCH
Pressure
AC500572
ACC00272 AB
While the electric tailgate is being closed automatically, if pressure is applied to the tailgate sensors
located at the both sides of electric tailgate, the system determines that something is caught by the compression of pressure detection sensor.
ELECTRIC TAILGATE MAIN SWITCH
Electric tailgate main switch
Electric tailgate close switch
Tailgate latch
ACB05027AB
If you turn on the electric tailgate close switch inside
the tailgate while the tailgate is fully opened, it will be
closed automatically to its full position.
TAILGATE LOCK RELEASE HANDLE
The electric tailgate lock release handle which
requires a small operating force and has no temperature dependency has been adopted to improve the
opening operation. When the handle is operated, the
switch is turned ON or OFF. Refer to P.42A-9.
ACB05028AB
BODY
42A-23
DOOR AND TAILGATE
CONDITIONS FOR AUTOMATIC
OPERATION BY USING THE KEYLESS
OPERATION KEY, ELECTRIC TAILGATE
SWITCH, TAILGATE LOCK RELEASE
HANDLE, AND ELECTRIC TAILGATE
CLOSE SWITCH
• When the electric tailgate main switch is ON.
• When the tailgate is unlocked by using the central
door locking or keyless operation key.
• When the vehicle is stationary with the selector
lever at "P" (parking) position.
• When the electric tailgate is opened or closed
fully.
• When the system voltage is 11V or more
• When the ignition switch is in the LOCK (OFF) or
ACC position
• When the ignition switch is on and the vehicle is
stationary with the selector lever at park position.
• When the tailgate sensor is OFF
Opening and closing the electric tailgate by using the keyless operation key
Electric tailgate
position
Fully closed
Doorajar
Open
Fully open
Closed
Doorajar
Fully closed
Keyless operation ON
key (electric
tailgate switch) OFF
ON
Half latch switch
OFF
ON
Full latch switch
OFF
ON
Door-ajar switch
OFF
ON
Neutral switch
OFF
ON
Warning buzzer
OFF
ON
Hazard warning
lamps
OFF
Electro-magnetic
clutch
ON
OFF
Open
Tailgate motor
assembly
OFF
Close
Disengaged
side
OFF
Latch motor
Engaged
side
If the electric tailgate switch of the keyless operation
key is pushed twice, the warning buzzer will sound,
and then the electric tailgate will open or close.
When the electric tailgate is operated, the warning
buzzer operates as follows:
ACC00015AB
• When you are opening the electric tailgate, the
warning buzzer will sound four times to open it
fully.
• When you are closing the electric tailgate, the
warning buzzer will sound three times to close it
fully.
BODY
42A-24
DOOR AND TAILGATE
If the electric tailgate switch is operated If the electric tailgate switch is operated when
when the tailgate is being opened
the tailgate is being closed automatically, the
automatically, the tailgate will be closed. tailgate will be opened.
Electric tailgate
position
Open
Keyless operation key
(electric tailgate switch)
Fully closed or partially open
Fully open
ON
OFF
ON
Half latch switch
OFF
ON
Full latch switch
OFF
ON
Door-ajar switch
OFF
ON
Neutral switch
OFF
ON
Warning buzzer
OFF
Hazard warning lamps
ON
OFF
ON
Electro-magnetic clutch
OFF
OPEN
Tailgate motor assembly
OFF
CLOSE
Disengaged side
Latch motor
OFF
Engaged side
AC402929AI
When the electric tailgate switch of the keyless operation key is pushed once while the electric tailgate is
being closed or opened, the warning buzzer will
sound once, and then the electric tailgate will operate
in the opposite direction.
BODY
42A-25
DOOR AND TAILGATE
Opening and closing of electric tailgate using electric tailgate switch
Electric tailgate
position
Fully closed
Doorajar
Open
Fully open
Open
Doorajar
Fully closed
ON
Electric tailgate
switch
OFF
Half latch switch
ON
OFF
ON
Full latch switch
Door-ajar switch
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
Neutral switch
Warning buzzer
OFF
ON
OFF
Hazard warning ON
lamps
OFF
Electro-magnetic ON
clutch
OFF
OPEN
Tailgate motor
assembly
OFF
CLOSE
Disengaged side
Latch motor
OFF
Engaged side
ACC00016AB
When the electric tailgate switch is pressed and held,
the warning buzzer will sound, and then the electric
tailgate will open or close. When the electric tailgate
is operated, the warning buzzer operates as follows:
• When you are opening the electric tailgate, the
warning buzzer will sound four times to open it
fully.
• When you are closing the electric tailgate, the
warning buzzer will sound three times to close it
fully.
BODY
42A-26
DOOR AND TAILGATE
Electric tailgate position
Tailgate lock release handle
If the electric tailgate switch is operated If the electric tailgate switch is operated when
when the tailgate is being opened
the tailgate is being closed automatically, the
automatically, the tailgate will be closed. tailgate will be opened.
Open
Fully closed or partially open
Fully open
ON
OFF
ON
Half latch switch
OFF
ON
Full latch switch
OFF
ON
Door-ajar switch
OFF
ON
Neutral switch
OFF
ON
Warning buzzer
OFF
ON
Hazard warning lamps
OFF
Electro-magnetic clutch
ON
OFF
OPEN
Tailgate motor assembly
OFF
CLOSE
Disengaged side
Latch motor
OFF
Engaged side
AC402929AN
When the electric tailgate switch is pushed once
while the electric tailgate is being closed or opened,
the warning buzzer will sound once, and then the tailgate will operate in the opposite direction.
BODY
42A-27
DOOR AND TAILGATE
Opening the electric tailgate fully by using its tailgate lock release handle
Fully closed
Electric tailgate position
Tailgate lock release handle
Half latch switch
Doorajar
Open
Fully open
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
Full latch switch
Door-ajar switch
Neutral switch
Warning buzzer *¹
Hazard warning lamps *²
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
Electro-magnetic clutch
ON
OFF
Open
Tailgate motor assembly
OFF
Close
Latch motor
Disengaged
side
OFF
Engaged
side
If the tailgate lock release handle is pushed once, the
warning buzzer will sound four times, the hazard
warning lamps will flash twice, and then the tailgate
will open.
ACC00020AB
NOTE: .
• *1: The warning buzzer sounds only when the tailgate lock release handle is operated with all the
doors unlocked.
• *2: The hazard warning lamps flash only when the
tailgate lock release handle is operated with all
the doors locked.
BODY
42A-28
DOOR AND TAILGATE
Electric tailgate position
Tailgate lock release handle
If the electric tailgate switch is operated If the electric tailgate switch is operated when
when the tailgate is being opened
the tailgate is being closed automatically, the
automatically, the tailgate will be closed. tailgate will be opened.
Open
Fully closed or partially open
Fully open
ON
OFF
ON
Half latch switch
OFF
ON
Full latch switch
OFF
ON
Door-ajar switch
OFF
ON
Neutral switch
OFF
ON
Warning buzzer
OFF
ON
Hazard warning lamps
OFF
Electro-magnetic clutch
ON
OFF
OPEN
Tailgate motor assembly
OFF
CLOSE
Disengaged side
Latch motor
OFF
Engaged side
AC402929AN
If the tailgate lock release handle is pushed once
while the tailgate is being opened fully, the warning
buzzer will sound once, and then the tailgate will
close.
BODY
42A-29
DOOR AND TAILGATE
Closing the electric tailgate fully by using its close switch
Fully open
Electric tailgate position
Electric tailgate close switch
Half latch switch
Open
Doorajar
Fully closed
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
Full latch switch
Door-ajar switch
Neutral switch
Warning buzzer
Hazard warning lamps
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
Electro-magnetic clutch
ON
OFF
Open
Tailgate motor assembly
OFF
Close
Latch motor
Disengaged
side
OFF
Engaged
side
If the electric tailgate close switch is pushed once,
the warning buzzer will sound three times, and then
the tailgate will close.
ACC00017AB
BODY
42A-30
DOOR AND TAILGATE
Electric tailgate position
Electric tailgate close switch
If the electric tailgate switch is operated If the electric tailgate switch is operated when
when the tailgate is being opened
the tailgate is being closed automatically, the
automatically, the tailgate will be closed. tailgate will be opened.
Open
Fully closed or partially open
Fully open
ON
OFF
ON
Half latch switch
OFF
ON
Full latch switch
OFF
ON
Door-ajar switch
OFF
ON
Neutral switch
OFF
ON
Warning buzzer
OFF
ON
Hazard warning lamps
OFF
Electro-magnetic clutch
ON
OFF
OPEN
Tailgate motor assembly
OFF
CLOSE
Disengaged side
Latch motor
OFF
Engaged side
AC402929AJ
If the electric tailgate close switch is pushed once
while the tailgate is being closed fully, the warning
buzzer will sound once, and then the tailgate will
open.
BODY
DOOR AND TAILGATE
42A-31
SAFETY MECHANISM
If the tailgate bumps against something If something is jammed when the tailgate is
when it is being opened automatically, being closed automatically, it will be opened.
it will be closed.
Fully closed or
Electric tailgate position
Open
Fully open
partially open
When a jam is detected
ON
OFF
ON
Half latch switch
OFF
ON
Full latch switch
OFF
ON
Door-ajar switch
OFF
ON
Neutral switch
OFF
ON
Warning buzzer
OFF
Hazard warning lamps
ON
OFF
Electro-magnetic clutch
ON
OFF
Open
Tailgate motor assembly
OFF
Close
Disengaged side
Latch motor
OFF
Engaged side
AC402929AK
If a person or luggage is caught while the electric tailgate is being closed automatically, or your finger is
caught at one of the tailgate sensors located at both
sides of electric tailgate, the warning buzzer will
sound once and then the tailgate will operate to the
opposite direction.
NOTE: When the safety mechanism is activated consecutively for twice, the operation is changed to the
manual operation. If the operation is changed to the
manual operation, fully opening or closing the electric tailgate once enables the automatic operation.
MECHANISM PREVENTING ELECTRIC
TAILGATE FROM LOWERING
If the electric tailgate is opened automatically to the
full position and then the electric tailgate control unit
detects that the tailgate is being lowered due to additional equipment on the tailgate or other reasons, the
warning buzzer will sound to warn the driver and
then the system will close the tailgate automatically.
NOTE: The mechanism, which prevents electric tailgate from lowering, may also operate if the tailgate
gas spring is too deteriorated to support the tailgate.
A MECHANISM PREVENTING A SUDDEN
OPENING AND CLOSING
If a poor system voltage occurs while the electric tailgate is being opened or closed automatically, the
system will inhibit the automatic operation. This may
cause the electric tailgate to stop or move intermittently. With this feature, the mechanism will prevent
the electric tailgate from closing or opening suddenly.
BODY
42A-32
DOOR AND TAILGATE
EASY CLOSER SYSTEM
Electric tailgate
position
If the electric tailgate is closed to its ajar position, the
system will close the tailgate automatically to its full
position. This ensures safety by closing the tailgate
fully, and improves comfort by eliminating unpleasant
noise during slamming.
NOTE: The easy closer system can operate even if
the slide door power switch is OFF.
DoorOpen ajar
Fully closed
ON
Half latch switch
OFF
DATA LIST REFERENCE TABLE
Using M.U.T.-III, the input data sent from the sensors
and switches can be read. For service data items,
refer to Workshop Manual.
ON
Full latch switch
OFF
ON
Door-ajar switch
OFF
ON
Neutral switch
OFF
Disengaged
side
Latch motor
OFF
Engaged
side
WEATHERSTRIP
M2420020000513
AC402931AB
A
A
A
A
B
B
B
B
ACB04501
Section A – A
Section B – B
Door opening
weatherstrip
ACB05720
Door opening
weatherstrip
ACB05719
ACB06034 AB
The double weather strips have been installed along
the perimeter of the door window to improve the
sound-proof and water-proof performances.
BODY
42A-33
WINDOW GLASS
WINDOW GLASS
M2420015001640
VISIBLE RAY TRANSMISSIVITY RATE
FOR WINDOW GLASS
1
6
5
2
3
4
ACB05026 AB
Number Name
Type
Thickness
(mm)
Colour
Visible ray
transmissivity
rate (%)
1
Windshield
Laminated glass
4.76
Green
79
2
Front door window glass Tempered glass
4.0
Green
80
BODY
42A-34
SUNROOF
Number Name
Type
Thickness
(mm)
Colour
Visible ray
transmissivity
rate (%)
3
Tempered glass
3.1
Green
82
Dark grey (privacy
glass)
25
Green
82
Dark grey (privacy
glass)
25
Green
82
Dark grey (privacy
glass)
25
Dark grey
20
4
5
6
Rear door window glass
Quarter window glass
Tailgate window glass
Sunroof lid glass
3.5
NOTE: The visible ray transmissivity rate (%) is a reference value.
The laminated glass has been adopted for the wind• The privacy glasses for the rear door window
shield, and the tempered glass has been adopted for
glass, quarter window glass, and tailgate window
other windows. The window glass has the following
glass have been adopted <Optional>.
features.
SUNROOF
M2420016000877
Drain pipe
Sunroof lid glass
Drain pipe
Sunshade
Sunroof motor assembly
(integrated into sunroof-ECU)
Drain pipe
ACB05472AB
BODY
42A-35
SUNROOF
Close/down switch
Tilt-up switch
AC505240
Sunroof switch
AC505239
Open switch
AC506511AB
The electric sliding glass sunroof with tilt-up mechanism has been adopted as an option. This sunroof
has the following characteristics:
• A lightweight sunroofs has been adopted.
• The sunroof tilts up for approximately 30 mm to
improve ventilation performance.
• The integrated switch allows for all slide opening/closing, tilt up/down, and stop operations. All
operations are available at one touch.
• If external force is applied during slide closing or
tilt down operations that obstructs operations, the
sunroof lid glass will move in the reverse direction.
• During the safety mechanism activation, when
the sunroof close switch is operated, the sunroof
lid glass stops. By continuing the close switch
operation, the sunroof lid glass can be forcibly
closed without activating the safety mechanism
even when the obstacle is detected to be
pinched.
SUNROOF MOTOR ASSEMBLY
Sunroof motor
Sunroof ECU
DESCRIPTION OF CONSTRUCTION AND
OPERATION
SAFETY MECHANISM
• If any obstacle such as a hand or a head is
detected to be pinched during a sunroof lid glass
closing operation, the sunroof lid glass is opened
by approximately 200 mm or more.
• During the sunroof lid glass closing operation, by
continuing the sunroof close switch operation, the
sunroof can be forcibly closed without activating
the safety mechanism even when the obstacle is
detected to be pinched.
Drive gear
ACB05550AB
The sunroof motor assembly, which consists of the
motor main body, drive gear, and sunroof ECU, is
installed in front of the housing.
BODY
42A-36
SUNROOF
SUNROOF-ECU
ETACS-ECU
6
7
Ignition
switch
Driver
circuit
3
Tilt-up switch
Open switch
Close/Tilt-down
switch
4
M
Motor
Sunroof-ECU
5
Sensor
10
Sunroof switch
EEPROM
1
2
1 2 3 4 5
6 7 8 9 10
The sunroof-ECU incorporates a microcomputer and
controls motor operations with the sunroof switch
signals, depending on various conditions.
Sunroof motor assembly
ZC604430
AC609032
ZC604430
AC700720AB
BODY
LOOSE PANELS
42A-37
LOOSE PANELS
M2420000200418
Front end side panel
Front bumper reinforcement A
Front bumper reinforcement B
ACC00273AB
The front end side panel under the engine compartment absorbs impact energy during frontal collision
more effectively than the predecessor. In addition, an
impact-absorbing bumper minimises the risk of injury
to pedestrians, in particular to legs and head.
CUSTOMISE FUNCTION
M2420002500880
By operating the M.U.T.-III ETACS system or MMCS,
the following functions can be customised. The programmed information is held even when the battery
is disconnected.
BODY
42A-38
CUSTOMISE FUNCTION
Adjustment
item (M.U.T.-III
display)
Adjustment item
Adjusting content
(M.U.T.-III display)
Adjusting content
Hazard answer
back
Adjustment of the
number of keyless
hazard warning
lamp answer back
flashes
Lock:1, Unlock:2
LOCK: Flashes once, UNLOCK: Flashes
twice (initial condition)
Lock:1, Unlock:0
LOCK: Flashes once, UNLOCK: No flash
Lock:0, Unlock:2
LOCK: No flash, UNLOCK: Flash twice
Lock:2, Unlock:1
LOCK: Flash twice, UNLOCK: Flash once
Lock:2, Unlock:0
LOCK: Flash twice, UNLOCK: No flash
Lock:0, Unlock:1
LOCK: No flash, UNLOCK: Flash once
Lock:0, Unlock:0
No function
Disabled
Without function (initial condition)
Always (P pos)
With function: Operates when the shift
lever or the selector lever is moved to the
P position.
Always(Lock pos)
With function: Operates when the ignition
switch is moved to the LOCK (OFF)
position.
All Doors Unlock
Without function: The first operation of
keyless entry system or unlock operation
by KOS unlocks all doors (initial condition).
Dr Door Unlock
With function: The first operation of
keyless entry system or unlock operation
by KOS unlocks the driver's door only, and
the second unlock operation within 2
seconds after that unlocks all doors.
30 sec.
30 seconds (initial condition)
60 sec.
60 seconds
120 sec.
120 seconds
180 sec.
180 seconds
Auto door
unlock
Door unlock
mode
Adjustment of the
auto door unlock
function
Adjustment of
power door locks
with selective
unlocking
Timer lock timer Timer lock period
adjustment
Multi mode
Multi-mode keyless Disable
entry function
D/M: O&C
customisation
<Vehicles with
electric retractable
remote controlled
door mirrors>
No function
Door mirror fold/unfold operation only
(initial condition)
42B-1
GROUP 42B
KEYLESS
OPERATION
SYSTEM (KOS)
CONTENTS
GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . .
SYSTEM OPERATION. . . . . . . . . . . .
42B-2
42B-8
DOOR ENTRY FUNCTION. . . . . . . . . . . . .
42B-8
KEYLESS ENTRY FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . .
42B-14
OSS (ONE-TOUCH START SYSTEM) . . . .
42B-18
WARNINGS/ALARMS <Standard meter> . .
42B-23
WARNINGS/ALARMS <High contrast meter>
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42B-27
CUSTOMISATION FUNCTION. . . . . . 42B-31
42B-2
KEYLESS OPERATION SYSTEM (KOS)
GENERAL INFORMATION
GENERAL INFORMATION
M2421000100630
The keyless operation system (KOS) enables the
driver to lock or unlock all the doors (including the
tailgate) by just operating the lock/unlock switch on
the front door outside handles or operating the tailgate lock release handle (tailgate open switch, tailgate lock switch), without taking the keyless
operation key out from his/her pocket or bag when
he/she is carrying a keyless operation key which has
been registered in the vehicle's KOS-ECU (Door
entry function). The KOS also allows the driver to
start the engine without using the conventional
mechanical key (engine start function). Moreover, the
KOS incorporates the keyless entry function with
which, like the conventional keyless entry system, a
driver can perform the remote operation (opening/closing of all the doors and the tailgate) by using
the lock/unlock switch of the keyless operation key
and the immobilizer function that prohibits the starting of engine by using an unauthorised key. The
KOS has the following features:
• Each vehicle is provided with two keyless operation keys, and up to four keyless operation keys
can be registered in the vehicle's KOS-ECU.
• The keyless operation key also incorporates an
indicator lamp that enables the driver to check if
the signal is transmitted correctly or if the battery
in the key is discharged (Refer to P.42B-14).
• The keyless operation key incorporates an emergency key to lock/unlock the front doors in case
the battery in the keyless operation key is discharged or the keyless operation system is not
working normally.
NOTE: If the immobilizer related system failure
occurs, the engine may not start.
• The driver can customise KOS; enabling/disabling all the system functions, enabling the door
locking/unlocking function only, or enabling the
engine starting function only (Refer to P.42B-31).
• Engine start function: The system has been
changed to the engine start system that supports
OSS (one-touch start system).
NOTE: OSS (one-touch start system): System that
has the electrically actuated steering lock, and
that allows the engine to be started and the vehicle power to be switched via the operation of
engine switch.
• Engine starting method when keyless operation
key battery is discharged: A change has been
made to the control that does not use the emergency key and performs the control with the discharged keyless operation key inserted in the key
slot.
KEYLESS OPERATION SYSTEM (KOS)
42B-3
GENERAL INFORMATION
CONSTRUCTION DIAGRAM
Engine switch
ACB05528
Combination meter
Brake pedal
(Stop lamp switch)
KOS-ECU
OSS-ECU
Lock/Unlock switch
(Passenger's side)
Key slot
Engine-ECU
Exterior transmitter
antenna assembly
(Passenger's side)
Interior transmitter
antenna assembly
(Rear)
Tailgate lock
release handle
ETACS-ECU
Electric
steering lock
Lock/Unlock switch
(Driver's side)
Exterior transmitter
antenna assembly
(Tailgate)
Exterior transmitter
antenna assembly
(Driver's side)
Interior transmitter
antenna assembly
(Front)
Selector lever assembly
(P range detection switch)
ACB05578
Outer buzzer
Lock/Unlock switch (Driver's side)
Lock switch
Lock/Unlock switch
Tailgate
lock release handle
ACB05671
ACC00329AB
KEYLESS OPERATION SYSTEM (KOS)
42B-4
GENERAL INFORMATION
Combination meter
<Standard meter>
Keyless operation
Immobilizer/electric
steering lock warning lamp system indicator
<High contrast meter>
Multi information display
KEYLESS OPERATION
SYSTEM SERVICE
REQUIRED
ACB05440
Keyless operation key
ACB05441
ACC00331 AB
Indicator lamp
Lock switch
Unlock switch
Emergency key
Electric tailgate switch
<Vehicles with electric tailgate>
AC703227
ACB05931AB
Main components and functions
Parts name
Functional description
KOS-ECU
Controls KOS by using the following inputs/outputs and
communications.
• Input of front door lock/unlock switch, input of tailgate lock
release handle, and input of tailgate lock switch
• Communications with ETACS-ECU, OSS-ECU and
combination meter via CAN
• Wireless communication of keyless operation key via the
interior and exterior transmitter antennas as well as via the key
slot integrated antenna
• Output to the outer buzzer
• Output of actuator driving permission signal to electric steering
lock
Electric steering lock (incorporates
electric steering lock unit)
The steering lock mechanism incorporates a mechanism that can
electrically unlock the lock. When the lock is unlocked electrically,
the steering lock is unlocked approximately for 30 seconds by the
certification communication with OSS-ECU via LIN
communication, the power supply permission signal obtained via
wire communication, and the actuator driving permission signal
received via wire communication from KOS-ECU.
KEYLESS OPERATION SYSTEM (KOS)
GENERAL INFORMATION
42B-5
Parts name
Functional description
Keyless operation key (incorporates
emergency key)
• The keyless operation key receives signals sent from each
interior/exterior transmitter antenna, certifies the key ID code,
calculates the encrypted code, and sends the reply data signal
to KOS-ECU. If the integrated battery is discharged, the keyless
operation key receives signals sent from the key slot when it is
inserted in the key slot. Then, it certifies the key ID code,
calculates the encrypted code, and sends the reply data signal
to KOS-ECU via the key slot. Also, when the lock/unlock switch
on the keyless operation key is pressed, the corresponding
signal is sent to KOS-ECU.
• If two or more keyless operation keys registered in KOS-ECU
respond at the same time, their signals would interfere. To avoid
this interference, each signal from KOS-ECU is given the
priority* data, and the keyless operation keys respond in
accordance with this priority.
Lock/Unlock switch
Locks/unlocks all the doors and tailgate when the driver carrying
the keyless operation key presses the lock/unlock switch on the
front door outside handle.
Driver’s side
Passenger’s
side
Tailgate lock release handle
Unlocks all the doors and the tailgate when a driver carrying the
keyless operation key presses the tailgate lock release handle.
Tailgate lock switch
Locks all the doors and tailgate when the driver carrying the
keyless operation key presses the lock switch on the tailgate lock
release handle.
Exterior transmitter
antenna assembly
Driver’s side
Passenger’s
side
Tailgate
Interior transmitter
antenna assembly
Front
Rear
Converts the data output from KOS-ECU via wire into a signal, and
sends it to the keyless operation key (For more information on the
transmission/reception area, refer to the door entry function valid
area P.42B-8).
Converts the data output from KOS-ECU via wire into a signal, and
sends it to the keyless operation key (For more information on the
transmission/reception area, refer to the one-touch start system
valid area P.42B-18).
Outer buzzer
The outer buzzer sounds when:
• The doors are locked or unlocked by the door entry function.
• The keyless operation key is carried out of the vehicle when the
power supply mode is other than OFF, and the door is closed.
• The lock/unlock switch on the front door outside handle is
pressed when the power supply mode is other than OFF.
• The lock/unlock switch on the front door outside handle is
pressed when the keyless operation key is still located inside
the car.
• The lock/unlock switch on the front door outside handle is
pressed when the door is ajar.
• With the driver's door kept open, the keyless operation key is
not removed from the key slot located in the glove box.
Key slot
Converts the data output from KOS-ECU via wire into a signal,
sends it to the keyless operation key, and then sends the reply
data signal from keyless operation key to KOS-ECU.
42B-6
KEYLESS OPERATION SYSTEM (KOS)
GENERAL INFORMATION
Parts name
Functional description
OSS-ECU
Controls OSS by using the following inputs/outputs and
communications.
• Input from the engine switch
• Input from stop lamp switch
• Input from P range detection switch
• Input of monitoring signal for actuator driving permission of
electric steering lock via wire communication with KOS-ECU
• Output of KOS back-up power supply via wire communication
with KOS-ECU
• Power supply output to electric steering lock unit
• CAN communication with KOS-ECU, ETACS-ECU, engine
ECU, and combination meter
• LIN communication with electric steering lock
Engine switch
• Output of engine switch ON/OFF signal to OSS-ECU
• Input of LED signal from OSS-ECU
Combination meter (keyless operation
alarm display)
Communicates with KOS-ECU and OSS-ECU via CAN. Receives
the warning request or warning information from KOS-ECU and
OSS-ECU, and displays the warning.
ETACS-ECU
• Communicates with KOS-ECU via CAN. By the door
lock/unlock request or tailgate lock/unlock request from
KOS-ECU, ETACS-ECU outputs the lock/unlock signal. When
the door lock/unlock signal is output, the ETACS-ECU flashes
or illuminates the turn-signal lamps and the room lamp to notify
the driver that the doors are locked/unlocked. Furthermore, by
the multi-mode function of keyless entry, the folding/unfolding of
door mirrors is performed depending on the pattern of door
lock/unlock request from KOS-ECU.
• Communicates with OSS-ECU via CAN, and outputs the door
switch ON/OFF signal.
• Receives the ACC output signal or IG1 output signal sent from
OSS-ECU via wire communication, and drives the ACC relay or
supplies electrical current to the IG1 relay to drive the IG1 relay.
• Using the welcome light function, the headlamps and tail lamps
are illuminated by the door unlock request from KOS-ECU.
Engine-ECU
Communicates with OSS-ECU through ETACS-ECU via CAN.
Permits/inhibits the engine starting and controls the engine
operation.
NOTE: *: When registering the keyless operation
keys, KOS-ECU numbers each key (1 to 4) in the
order they are registered (initial priority). This priority
is renewed each time the doors are locked/unlocked
and the engine switch is pressed. For example, when
only keys 1 and 3 have responded to the signal sent
from KOS-ECU, the new priority of the keys would be
1-3-2-4. When keys 3 and 4 have responded, then
the priority of the keys becomes 3-4-1-2.
KEYLESS OPERATION SYSTEM (KOS)
GENERAL INFORMATION
42B-7
System configuration
Keyless operation key
(Lock/Unlock/Electric
tailgate <Vehicles with
electric tailgate>)
Frequency
signal
Frequency
signal
Interior transmitter
antenna assembly
(Front/Rear)
Frequency
signal
Exterior transmitter
antenna
(Driver's side/
Passenger's side/
Tailgate)
Outer buzzer
Door lock actuator
Tailgate lock actuator
Door mirrors
Room lamp
Turn-signal lamp
Tail lamp
Position lamp
Headlamp
Receiver
antenna
Key slot
KOS-ECU
CAN-C-Mid
communication
Lock/Unlock switch
(Driver's side/
Passenger's side)
Tailgate lock switch
Tailgate lock release
handle
ETACS-ECU
Each door switch
Electric steering lock
CPU
LIN communication
(Local)
CAN-C
communication
Engine-ECU
Engine switch
(ON signal)
Engine switch
(LED indicator)
OSS-ECU
Selector lever assembly
(P range detection switch)
Brake pedal
(Stop lamp switch)
Combination meter
ACB05960 AB
KEYLESS OPERATION SYSTEM (KOS)
42B-8
SYSTEM OPERATION
SYSTEM OPERATION
DOOR ENTRY FUNCTION
M2421009100411
DESCRIPTION OF CONSTRUCTION AND OPERATION
<Vehicles outside area>
Front door outside handle (passenger's side)
Tailgate lock release handle
Front door outside handle (driver's side)
ACB05583
Keyless operation key
AC608093
ACB05951 AB
Front door outside handle (driver's side, passenger's side)
A
Lock/unlock switch
Tailgate lock
release handle
AC505249
AC506192
ACB04499
View A
Tailgate lock release handle
Lock switch
Licence plate lamp
AC505247
AC904907
ACB05952 AB
KEYLESS OPERATION SYSTEM (KOS)
SYSTEM OPERATION
When a driver carrying a keyless operation key
presses the lock/unlock switch on the front door out
side handle (driver's side, front passenger's side) or
the lock switch of tailgate lock release handle, the
KOS-ECU communicates with the keyless operation
key to authorise* the keyless operation key. When
the KOS-ECU senses the registered keyless operation key within 70 cm in radius from the periphery of
the vehicle, it requests the ETACS-ECU to
lock/unlock the doors (If the keyless operation key is
too high/low or too close to the vehicle, the door
entry function may not function).
NOTE: *: In the communication for certification of the
keyless operation key, KOS-ECU judges if the keyless operation key ID (specified to keyless operation
key) contained in the response data from the keyless
operation key coincides with the ID that has been
stored in ECU by registration operation. The keyless
operation key sends the response to KOS-ECU only
when the KOS ID (specific to KOS-ECU) contained
in the received data coincided with the stored ID. In
the beginning of the communication for certification,
KOS-ECU creates an encrypted code calculation
factor in random number, and sends it to the keyless
operation key together with the transmit data. The
keyless operation key calculates the code by using
42B-9
the received factor, and sends the result to
KOS-ECU together with the response data.
KOS-ECU determines that the communication is
established only when the code calculation results of
both parties coincided.
LOCKING OPERATION OF DOOR ENTRY
FUNCTION
The keyless operation key certification communication is performed when the lock/unlock switch of front
door outside handle (driver's side, front passenger's
side) or the lock switch of tailgate lock release handle is turned ON. When KOS-ECU can certify the
registered keyless operation key outside the vehicle
only, it requests ETACS-ECU to lock all the doors
(including tailgate).
NOTE: .
• When a keyless operation key is located inside
the vehicle, KOS-ECU does not output a request
for locking all the doors.
• When a keyless operation key with discharged
battery is inserted in the keyless operation key
slot, the keyless operation key is not certified to
be located inside the vehicle.
KEYLESS OPERATION SYSTEM (KOS)
42B-10
SYSTEM OPERATION
CONTROL OF LOCKING OPERATION
Lock/unlock switch of
Jamming is not transmitted at
door outside handle (driver's
the time of tailgate operation.
side, passenger's side) or
ON
lock switch of tailgate lock
release handle
OFF
Outside transmission Transmission
antenna assembly
(operation side) No transmission
Outside transmission Transmission
antenna assembly
(opposite side)
No transmission
If there is no keyless operation key response,
retry that keyless operation key locates outside.
Inside transmission Transmission
antenna assembly No transmission
Keyless operation key Response
1 to 4 response
No response
a
b
i
c
i
d
e
f
g
g
h
j
k
l
m
n
CAN
Communication
No communication
a: Exterior data transmitting start: 0.03 to 0.04 sec
b: Interior data transmitting start: 0.03 to 0.05 sec
c: Keyless operation key 1 response onset time: 0.035 to 0.06 sec
d: Keyless operation key 2 response onset time: 0.08 to 0.115 sec
e: Keyless operation key 3 response onset time: 0.135 to 0.18 sec
f: Keyless operation key 4 response onset time: 0.2 to 0.26 sec
g: Reception-waiting time: It is variable by the registration number
(4 registration: 0.3 sec)
h: CAN communication onset time: It is variable by the registration
key number (4-key registration: 0.68 to 0.73 sec)*
i: Retry transference time (retry completed): 0.01 sec
Function completed time (retry failed): 0.02 to 0.03 sec
1. KOS-ECU detects the lock/unlock switch ON
signal of door outside handle (driver's side, front
passenger's side) or the lock switch ON signal of
tailgate lock release handle.
NOTE: When KOS-ECU detects the lock/unlock
switch ON signal of door outside handle (driver's
side, front passenger's side) or the lock switch ON
signal of tailgate lock release handle, KOS-ECU
judges the lock prohibition condition. When the
lock prohibition condition is met, the locking operation is terminated.
2. KOS-ECU transmits the exterior data from the
exterior transmitter antenna assembly on the
operation side.
j: CAN communication onset time: keyless operation key 1
priority order response time (4-key registration: 0.76 to 0.87 sec)*
k: CAN communication onset time: keyless operation key 2
priority order response time (4-key registration: 0.81 to 0.92 sec)*
l: CAN communication onset time: keyless operation key 3
priority order response time (4-key registration: 0.86 to 0.99 sec)*
m: CAN communication onset time: keyless operation key 4
priority order response time (4-key registration: 0.93 to 1.07 sec)*
n: Operation completed time: keyless operation key 4
priority order response time (4-key registration: 0.69 to 1.09 sec)*
Note:*: Including CAN communication onset time: to 0.03 sec
AC904852AB
3. After the exterior data are transmitted from the
exterior transmitter antenna assembly, the interior
data are transmitted from the interior transmitter
antenna assembly (front, rear).
4. After the specified time (varies with the number of
keyless operation keys registered in KOS-ECU)
has elapsed, a confirmation is made that there is
no keyless operation key located inside the
vehicle.
• When KOS-ECU receives the response from the
keyless operation key that received the interior
data, KOS-ECU terminates the process without
performing the locking operation.
5. KOS-ECU transmits the interior data from the
interior transmitter antenna assembly (front, rear).
KEYLESS OPERATION SYSTEM (KOS)
SYSTEM OPERATION
6. After the specified time (varies with the number of
keyless operation keys registered in KOS-ECU)
has elapsed, a confirmation is made if the lock
conditions are met.
• When KOS-ECU receives the response from the
keyless operation key that received the interior
data, KOS-ECU terminates the process without
performing the locking operation.
• When all the responses from the registered keyless operation key are the exterior data only,
KOS-ECU transmits the lock request to
ETACS-ECU. Also, KOS-ECU transmits the keyless operation key number to ETACS-ECU.
NOTE: When multiple keyless operation keys
responded, KOS-ECU transmits ETACS-ECU the
key number of keyless operation key that
responded first. As for the transmission sequence
to ETACS-ECU, the keyless operation key
number is transmitted first, and then the lock
request is output.
• If there is no response from the keyless operation
key, Step 6 is performed once.
7. KOS-ECU transmits the exterior data from the
exterior transmitter antenna assembly on the
operation side.
8. If the specified time (varies with the number of
keyless operation keys registered in KOS-ECU)
has not elapsed, a confirmation is made if the lock
conditions are met.
• After retry, when the responses from the registered keyless operation key are the exterior data
only, KOS-ECU transmits the lock request
(request to lock the applicable position) to
ETACS-ECU. Also, KOS-ECU transmits the keyless operation key number to ETACS-ECU.
NOTE: When multiple keyless operation keys
responded, KOS-ECU transmits ETACS-ECU the
key number of keyless operation key that
responded first. As for the transmission sequence
to ETACS-ECU, the keyless operation key
number is transmitted first, and then the lock
request is output.
• When the locking operation is performed on the
driver's side, the priority order of keyless operation key is updated.
42B-11
LOCKING OPERATION INHIBITION
CONDITIONS
In the following cases, the door locking operation is
inhibited.
• Any door or the tailgate is open (door switch is
ON). (including door ajar)
• Either of the exterior/interior transmitter antenna
assembly is being detected to be open, or it is
actually open.
• The wiring of exterior/interior transmitter antenna
assembly is contacting against the power supply
line.
• The engine switch is other than OFF.
• The lock and unlock signals are input at the same
time. (When the tailgate is operated)
• The door entry function is prohibited by the customisation function.
UNLOCKING OPERATION OF DOOR
ENTRY FUNCTION
The keyless operation key and KOS-ECU communicate to certify the keyless operation key when the
lock/unlock switch of front door outside handle
(driver’s side, front passenger's side) or the tailgate
lock release handle (open switch) is turned ON.
When KOS-ECU can certify the registered keyless
operation key outside the vehicle, it requests
ETACS-ECU to unlock all the doors (when a registered keyless operation key is certified outside the
vehicle, KOS-ECU requests ETACS-ECU to unlock
even when other registered keyless operation keys
are located inside the vehicle).
NOTE: When the driver's door limited unlocking
function is set to active using the customisation function, the operation can be performed using the
lock/unlock switch of front door outside handle
(driver's side). Within 2 seconds after the driver's
door is unlocked by pressing the lock/unlock switch
of front door outside handle (driver's side) once,
pressing the lock/unlock switch of front door outside
handle (driver's side) unlocks all the doors (including
tailgate).
KEYLESS OPERATION SYSTEM (KOS)
42B-12
SYSTEM OPERATION
CONTROL OF UNLOCKING OPERATION
Lock/unlock switch of
Jamming is not transmitted at
door outside handle (driver's
the time of tailgate operation.
side, passenger's side) or
ON
open switch of tailgate
lock release handle
OFF
Outside transmission
Transmission
antenna assembly
No transmission
operation side
If there is no keyless operation key
response, retry is performed once.
Outside transmission
Transmission
antenna assembly
No transmission
opposite side
Inside transmission
antenna assembly
Transmission
No transmission
Response
Keyless operation key
1 to 4 response
No response
c
a
b
h
d
h
e
f
g
i
j
k
l
m
n
o
p
q
CAN
Communication
No communication
a: Exterior data transmitting start: 0.015 to 0.04 sec
b: Interior data transmitting start: 0.03 to 0.05 sec
c: Keyless operation key 1 response onset time: 0.035 to 0.06 sec
d: Keyless operation key 2 response onset time: 0.08 to 0.115 sec
e: Keyless operation key 3 response onset time: 0.135 to 0.18 sec
f: Keyless operation key 4 response onset time: 0.2 to 0.26 sec
g: Reception-waiting time: It is variable by the registration number
(4 registration: 0.3 sec)
h: Retry transference time (retry completed): 0.01 sec
Function completed time (retry failed): 0.02 to 0.03 sec
i: CAN communication onset time: keyless operation key 1
priority order response time (4-key registration: 0.1 to 0.2 sec)*
j: CAN communication onset time: keyless operation key 2
priority order response time (4-key registration: 0.14 to 0.25 sec)*
Note:*: Including CAN communication onset time: to 0.03 sec
1. KOS-ECU detects the lock/unlock switch ON
signal of door outside handle (driver's side, front
passenger's side) or the tailgate lock release
handle (open switch) ON signal.
NOTE: When KOS-ECU detects the lock/unlock
switch ON signal of door outside handle (driver's
side, front passenger's side) or the tailgate lock
release handle (open switch) ON signal,
KOS-ECU judges the unlock prohibition condition.
When the unlock prohibition condition is met, the
unlocking operation is terminated.
4. For the specified time (varies with the number of
keyless operation keys registered in KOS-ECU),
k: CAN communication onset time: keyless operation key 3
priority order response time (4-key registration: 0.2 to 0.32 sec)*
l: CAN communication onset time: keyless operation key 4
priority order response time (4-key registration: 0.26 to 0.4 sec)*
m: CAN communication onset time: keyless operation key 1
priority order response time (4-key registration: 0.44 to 0.56 sec)*
n: CAN communication onset time: keyless operation key 2
priority order response time (4-key registration: 0.48 to 0.61 sec)*
o: CAN communication onset time: keyless operation key 3
priority order response time (4-key registration: 0.54 to 0.68 sec)*
p: CAN communication onset time: keyless operation key 4
priority order response time (4-key registration: 0.6 to 0.76 sec)*
q: Operation completed time: keyless operation key 4
priority order response time (4-key registration: 0.28 to 0.78 sec)*
AC904853AB
2. When KOS-ECU detects the lock/unlock switch
ON signal of front door outside handle (driver's
side, front passenger's side) or the tailgate lock
release handle (open switch) ON signal,
KOS-ECU transmits the exterior data from the
exterior transmitter antenna assembly on the
operation side.
3. After the exterior data are transmitted from the
exterior transmitter antenna assembly, the interior
data are transmitted from the interior transmitter
antenna assembly (front, rear).
the response from the keyless operation key
meeting the unlock condition is monitored.
KEYLESS OPERATION SYSTEM (KOS)
SYSTEM OPERATION
• When the registered keyless operation key
receives the exterior data only, KOS-ECU transmits the unlock request (request to unlock the
applicable position) to ETACS-ECU.
• Even after the specified time has elapsed, if
KOS-ECU receives no response that satisfies the
unlock, it performs a retry once. (When no
response after the retry, KOS-ECU terminates
the unlocking operation.)
• When the unlocking operation is performed on
the driver's side, the priority order of keyless
operation key is updated.
UNLOCKING OPERATION INHIBITION
TIME (WHEN THE TAILGATE IS
OPERATED)
Considering that the customer operates the lock
switch of tailgate lock release handle to make sure
the doors are locked, the unlocking operation is prohibited for 3 seconds after the locking operation is
performed by the lock switch of tailgate lock release
handle. Using the customisation function, the unlock
prohibition time can be changed.
UNLOCKING OPERATION INHIBITION
CONDITIONS
In the following cases, the unlocking operation is prohibited.
• Any door or the tailgate is open (door switch is
ON). (including door ajar)
• Inside lock knob position of driver's side and front
passenger's side is set to Unlock.
• The engine switch is other than OFF.
• The lock and unlock signals are input at the same
time. (When the tailgate is operated)
• The exterior/interior transmitter antenna assembly is being detected to be open, or it is open.
• The wiring of exterior/interior transmitter antenna
assembly is contacting against the power supply
line.
• During the unlocking operation inhibition time
(When the tailgate is operated)
• The door entry function is prohibited by the customisation function.
ANSWERBACK FUNCTIONS
When KOS-ECU sends a signal to ETACS-ECU,
ETACS-ECU outputs the lock/unlock signal and activates the hazard warning lamp to notify the driver the
doors are locked/unlocked.
Lock signal received
Unlock signal received
ETACS-ECU
Lock signal output
Unlock signal output
Hazard warning lamp
Flashes once (initial setting)
Flashes twice (initial setting)
KOS TIMER LOCK FUNCTION
When none of the doors are opened within 30 seconds after the doors are unlocked by KOS,
ETACS-ECU automatically outputs the door lock signal to lock the doors. This function prevents the
doors from being unlocked accidentally.
42B-13
KEYLESS OPERATION SYSTEM (KOS)
42B-14
SYSTEM OPERATION
KEYLESS ENTRY FUNCTION
M2421000400512
KOS-ECU
(incorporating receiver
and antenna)
ACB05509
Radio frequency signal
ETACS-ECU
Keyless operation key
Lock switch
Electric tailgate switch
<Vehicles with electric tailgate>
Electric signal
Unlock switch
Door lock actuators (lock/unlock)
Tailgate latch assembly
AC608093
Door mirror assembly (unfolding/folding)
Electric tailgate control unit <Vehicles with electric tailgate>
The signal causes the hazard warning lamp to flash once when the doors are locked, or flash twice when unlocked (Initial setting).
The signal causes the room lamp to extinguish when the doors are locked, or come on for 15 seconds when unlocked.
ACC00257 AB
This keyless entry function has the following features:
• A two switches keyless operation key with lock
and unlock switches is adopted <Vehicles without
electric tailgate>.
• A three switches keyless operation key with lock,
unlock and electric tailgate switches is adopted
<Vehicles with electric tailgate>.
• The power door locks with selective unlocking
has been adopted.
• The KOS-ECU incorporates a receiver and a
receiving antenna.
• Up to 4 security codes can be registered using
M.U.T.-III.
• Answerback functions
NOTE: The answerback function can be enabled/disabled using a customisation function (Refer to
P.42B-31).
• Using the lock/unlock switches, all doors (including tailgate) can be locked or unlocked, door mirrors can be retracted or opened <Vehicles with
electric-folding door mirrors>.
NOTE: Using the customisation function, a change
for multi-mode function (door mirrors) can be set.
(Refer to P.42B-31.)
• Keyless entry timer lock
NOTE: Timer of the keyless entry timer lock can be
enabled/disabled using a customisation function
(Refer to P.42B-31).
KEYLESS OPERATION SYSTEM (KOS)
SYSTEM OPERATION
DESCRIPTION OF CONSTRUCTION AND
OPERATION
KEYLESS OPERATION KEY
<Keyless operation key>
<Front view>
Lock switch
Unlock switch
Indicator lamp
Electric tailgate switch
<Vehicles with electric tailgate>
AC608093
Emergency key
<Rear view>
Emergency key
Three-diamond mark
AC608094
<Emergency key>
AC610747
ACB05934 AB
42B-15
• The two switches <vehicles without electric tailgate> and three switches <vehicles with electric
tailgate> have been adopted for keyless operation key, and the specific encrypted code is transmitted as radio wave signal.
• A shining three-diamond mark on the back of the
keyless operation key gives it a classy look.
• Matt-plating is adopted for switches to improve
appearance.
• An indicator lamp, which illuminates when signals
are received, is added on the keyless operation
key. This indicator lamp informs you of the signal
transmission status and warns you of flat battery.
• The switch operation of the keyless operation key
allows the system to operate as follows:
KEYLESS OPERATION SYSTEM (KOS)
42B-16
Function
SYSTEM OPERATION
Keyless operation key operation
Standard function Press the lock switch once.
(lock/unlock/electri
c tailgate <vehicles
with electric
tailgate>)
System operation
All doors (including the tailgate) are
locked.
NOTE: If the retracting function of the
electric folding mirrors is added using a
customisation function, it can be retracted
in synchronisation with a lock operation.
Press the unlock switch once.
All doors (including the tailgate) are
unlocked.
NOTE: If the opening function of the
electrical folding mirrors is added as an
adjustment function, it can be opened in
synchronisation with an unlock operation.
While the tailgate is unlocked, press the
electric tailgate switch twice within two
seconds.
The electric tailgate is opened or closed.
(Refer to GROUP 42A − Electric Tailgate .)
Multi mode
function <Vehicles
with
electric-folding
door mirrors>
Press the lock switch once to lock all doors The door mirrors are retracted.
(including the tailgate), and within 30
seconds press the lock switch twice
consecutively.
Power door locks
with selective
unlocking
Press the unlock switch once to unlock the
driver’s door, and within 2 seconds, press
the unlock switch again to unlock the front
passenger’s door, rear doors and tailgate.
Press the unlock switch once to unlock all The door mirrors return from the retracted
doors (including the tailgate), and within
position.
30 seconds press the unlock switch twice
consecutively.
POWER DOOR LOCKS WITH SELECTIVE
UNLOCKING
• Responding to the adoption of power door locks
with selective unlocking, the anti-theft feature has
been improved.
• When the lock/unlock switch of front door
(driver's side) is pressed once, only the driver's
door is unlocked. When the lock/unlock switch of
front door (driver's side) is pressed once again
within 2 seconds after the driver's door is
unlocked, the front passenger's door, rear doors,
and the tailgate are unlocked.
NOTE: When the lock/unlock switch of front door
(driver's side) is pressed once, only the driver's
door is unlocked. When the lock/unlock switch of
front door (driver's side) is pressed once again
more than 2 seconds after the driver's door is
unlocked, the driver's door only is unlocked.
ENCRYPTED CODE
Power door locks with selective unlocking.
NOTE: Using a customisation function, the
power door locks with selective unlocking
can be enabled or disabled.
• When the unlock switch on the keyless operation
key is pressed once, only the driver's door is
unlocked. When the keyless operation key unlock
switch is pressed once again within 2 seconds
after the driver's door is unlocked, the front passenger's door, rear doors, and the tailgate are
unlocked.
NOTE: When the keyless operation key unlock
switch is pressed once, only the driver's door is
unlocked. When the keyless operation key unlock
switch is pressed once again more than 2 seconds after the driver's door is unlocked, the
driver's door only is unlocked.
• Using a customisation function, the power door
locks with selective unlocking can be enabled or
disabled (Refer to P.42B-31).
KEYLESS OPERATION SYSTEM (KOS)
42B-17
SYSTEM OPERATION
KEYLESS ENTRY HAZARD LAMP
ANSWERBACK FUNCTION
Transmitter lock or unlock button
ON
OFF
Keyless entry
transmitter
switch
LOCK
OFF
UNLOCK
Lock relay output
Data
code
ON
OFF
Unlock relay output
ON
OFF
AC508281AB
Four data codes are transmitted when a switch is
operated once. The encrypted code for user identification is a combination of 0 and 1, and more than 1
million different combinations are available. To prevent theft by copying signal codes, the data code
includes a rolling code with the encrypted code. The
rolling code changes each time a signal is sent.
RECEIVER
The receiver is incorporated into the KOS-ECU
together with the receiving antenna. The receiver
compares the signal which the antenna received
from the keyless operation key with the registered
encrypted code and the stored code of the receiver,
and when they coincided, outputs a signal from the
KOS-ECU. By connecting M.U.T.-III to the diagnosis
connector, up to four encrypted codes of keyless
operation keys can be registered.
Illuminate
Hazard
warning lamp Extinguish
AC207001AB
The hazard answerback function that allows checking the lock/unlock state of the door easily even in
the daytime is installed. When the LOCK signal from
the keyless operation key is input to ETACS-ECU, all
doors (including tailgate) are locked and the hazard
warning lamp flashes once. When UNLOCK signal is
input, all doors (including tailgate) are unlocked and
the hazard warning lamp flashes twice. Using a customisation function, the hazard answerback can be
enabled/disabled (Refer to P.42B-31).
KEYLESS ENTRY ROOM LAMP ANSWER-BACK FUNCTION
ON
Lock relay output
a
OFF
ON
Unlock relay output
a
OFF
ON
Lock switch output
OFF
Unlock switch output
ON
OFF
Illuminate
Hazard
warning lamp
b
b
b
Extinguish
Illuminate
Room lamp
Extinguish
a: 0.25 second d: 3 seconds
b: 0.72 second e: 15 seconds
c: 2 seconds
d
c
d
e
AC612545AB
42B-18
KEYLESS OPERATION SYSTEM (KOS)
SYSTEM OPERATION
When the LOCK signal from the keyless operation
key is input to ETACS-ECU, all doors (including tailgate) are locked, and the room lamp is turned off in
synchronisation with hazard lamp answerback (when
the room lamp is illuminated, the lamp is turned off).
Also, when the UNLOCK signal from the keyless
operation key is input to ETACS-ECU, all doors
(including tailgate) are unlocked, and the room lamp
is illuminated for 15 seconds in synchronisation with
hazard lamp answerback.
KEYLESS ENTRY TIMER LOCK TIME
When none of the doors is opened within 30 seconds
after the doors are unlocked by the keyless entry
system, ETACS-ECU automatically outputs the door
lock signal to lock the doors. This function prevents
the doors (including the tailgate) from being unlocked
unexpectedly by operation errors. Using a customisation function, the timer lock period can be changed
(Refer to P.42B-31).
OPERATION INHIBITION CONDITIONS
The operation of the system is inhibited when:
• Any door or the tailgate is open (door switch is
ON). (including door ajar) <Lock function only>
OSS (ONE-TOUCH START SYSTEM)
M2421001200027
With the one-touch start system, when the engine
switch mounted inside the vehicle is operated,
OSS-ECU receives the stop lamp switch input signal
from the brake pedal, the P range detection switch
input signal from the selector lever assembly, and
performs the certification communication with keyless operation key using KOS-ECU, the certification
communication with electric steering lock, and the
engine start certification communication with
engine-ECU. Only when the input signals and certification communications are valid, the one-touch start
system performs the power supply changeover control, the electric steering lock locking/unlocking control, and the engine start control.
KEYLESS OPERATION SYSTEM (KOS)
42B-19
SYSTEM OPERATION
ONE-TOUCH START SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
Key slot
KOS-ECU
Receiver antenna
Interior/Exterior
transmitter antenna
assembly
Frequency
signal
Frequency
signal
CAN-C-Mid
Permission
signal for
actuator
activation
CAN-C-Mid
Keyless operation key
Combination meter
Electric
steering lock
Back-up
power supply
for KOS-ECU
Power supply
LIN
for electric
(Local) steering lock unit
activation
OSS-ECU
CAN-C-Mid
Engine switch
ETACS-ECU
CAN-C
Engine-ECU
(ACC Output)
Brake pedal
(Stop lamp switch)
(IG1 Output)
IG1 relay
(Starter Output)
Selector lever assembly
(P range detection switch)
Starter relay
drive circuit
ACB05954AB
ONE-TOUCH START SYSTEM VALID
AREA
The one-touch start system can be activated by the
pressing of engine switch only when the keyless
operation key is located within the interior antenna
receiving area.
KEYLESS OPERATION SYSTEM (KOS)
42B-20
SYSTEM OPERATION
Interior transmitter antenna assembly (Front) Interior transmitter antenna assembly (Rear)
Antenna receiving area
ACB05584AB
NOTE:
Centre panel box
Key slot
Keyless operation key
ACB05527AB
If the keyless operation key battery is discharged, the
one-touch start system (power supply changeover,
engine start/stop) becomes available when the keyless operation key is inserted into the key slot
located in the floor console. When inserting the keyless operation key to the key slot, easy locking of the
key can be performed by inserting the key from the
emergency key side.
Power supply changeover control (Operation description)
Keyless
operation
key
<2>
<3>
or
Key slot
KOS-ECU
Keyless
operation
key
<4>
<2>
OSS-ECU
<1> <7> <8>
Engine switch
<8>
<5>
Electric steering lock
<6> <7> <8>
ETACS-ECU
Selector lever
assembly
AC905170AD
KEYLESS OPERATION SYSTEM (KOS)
SYSTEM OPERATION
42B-21
Flow of power supply changeover control
<1>
Under the power OFF status, operate the engine switch without depressing the brake pedal.
<2>
By the operation of engine switch, OSS-ECU sends KOS-ECU the certification request via CAN,
and at the same time, supplies the electric steering lock unit power to the electric steering lock.
<3>
In accordance with the certification request from OSS-ECU, KOS-ECU performs the certification
communication with the keyless operation key.
<4>
KOS-ECU sends the key certification result to OSS-ECU via CAN. OSS-ECU compares its
certification result with the KOS-ECU certification result, and goes to <5> when the results agree
with each other.
<5>
OSS-ECU performs the certification communication with the electric steering lock via LIN (local
LIN). The electric steering lock compares the certification result with that of OSS-ECU, and
unlocks the steering lock when the results agree with each other.
<6>
After the certification communication with the electric steering lock, OSS-ECU sends the ACC
output to ETACS-ECU. Then, ETACS-ECU drives the internal ACC relay to turn the power to
ACC.
<7>
With the power supply set to ACC, when the engine switch is operated again without depressing
the brake pedal <CVT vehicle>, OSS-ECU sends the IG1 output. Then, the current is supplied to
the IG1 relay in ETACS-ECU, thus driving the IG1 relay and turning the power ON. (At this time,
OSS-ECU also communicates with engine-ECU to certify the engine start.)
<8>
With the power supply set to ON, when the engine switch is operated again without depressing
the brake pedal, the power of the CVT vehicle is turned OFF when the selector lever is in the P
position, or the power is turned to ACC when in other than the P position. When the vehicle
speed information, which is received via CAN, cannot be received or when the vehicle speed is 3
km/h or more, any standard engine switch operations will not be accepted. However, the power
can be turned to ACC by the emergency stop operation*.
NOTE: *: The emergency stop operation refers to the operation to press and hold the engine
switch for 3 seconds or longer, or to repeatedly press the engine switch 3 times or more within 1
second. After the emergency stop operation, OSS-ECU will not accept the engine switch
operation for 2 seconds.
Electric steering lock locking/unlocking control (Operation description)
<2> <4>
KOS-ECU
OSS-ECU
<3>
Electric steering lock
<1> <5>
AC905172 AC
Flow of electric steering lock unlocking control
•
Lock status of electric steering lock
<1>
KOS-ECU outputs the actuator driving permission signal to the electric steering lock.
KEYLESS OPERATION SYSTEM (KOS)
42B-22
SYSTEM OPERATION
Flow of electric steering lock unlocking control
<2>
By the operation of engine switch, OSS-ECU sends KOS-ECU the certification request via CAN,
and at the same time, supplies the electric steering lock unit power to the electric steering lock.
•
Matching of certification results with KOS-ECU (Refer to Step <1> to <4> of power supply
changeover control.)
<3>
OSS-ECU performs the certification communication with the electric steering lock via LIN (local
LIN). The electric steering lock compares the certification result with that of OSS-ECU, and
unlocks the electric steering lock by driving the internal actuator when the results agree with each
other.
<4>
After the electric steering lock is unlocked, OSS-ECU stops the supplying of electric steering lock
unit power to the electric steering lock. (Subsequently, OSS-ECU sends the ACC output to
ETACS-ECU. Then, ETACS-ECU drives the internal ACC relay to turn the power to ACC.)
<5>
After the engine is started, KOS-ECU stops the actuator driving permission signal for the electric
steering lock.
<2> <3>
KOS-ECU
OSS-ECU
<2>
Electric steering lock
<1>
<2>
ETACS-ECU
AC905174AB
Flow of electric steering lock locking control
•
Unlock status of electric steering lock
<1>
KOS-ECU supplies the actuator driving power to the electric steering lock.
<2>
With the power supply set to OFF, OSS-ECU receives the door status change (excluding tailgate)
from ETACS-ECU via CAN. Using the door status change from "Open to Close to Open" as a
trigger*, OSS-ECU supplies the electric steering lock unit power to the electric steering lock, and
then performs the certification communication via LIN (local LIN). The electric steering lock
compares the certification result with that of OSS-ECU, and locks the steering lock by driving the
internal actuator when the results agree with each other.
NOTE: *: The trigger also includes the operation of lock/unlock button on keyless operation key
as well as the door locking/unlocking by the operation of keyless operation switch.
<3>
After the electric steering lock is locked, OSS-ECU stops the supplying of electric steering lock
unit power to the electric steering lock.
KEYLESS OPERATION SYSTEM (KOS)
42B-23
SYSTEM OPERATION
Engine start control (Operation description.)
<2>
OSS-ECU
<1>
Engine switch
<2> <4>
<3>
ETACS-ECU
Engine-ECU
<3>
<1>
Brake pedal
AC905173AD
Flow of engine start control
<1>
With the power supply set to OFF, operate the engine switch while depressing the brake pedal.
•
Matching of certification results with KOS-ECU and electric steering lock (Refer to Step <2> to
<5> of power supply changeover control.)
<2>
At the same time with the transmission of certification request to engine-ECU via CAN, OSS-ECU
also sends the starter output to engine-ECU.
<3>
Engine-ECU supplies current to the starter relay to perform cranking. Also, engine-ECU
compares its own certification result with the OSS-ECU certification result, and starts the engine
when the results agree with each other. (If the certification results do not agree with each other,
engine-ECU stops the supplying of current to the starter relay and injector. Also, OSS-ECU stops
the starter output.)
<4>
After the engine start is complete, OSS-ECU stops the starter output.
WARNINGS/ALARMS <Standard meter>
M2421009300426
KOS WARNING AND WARNING INDICATOR LIST
When the KOS fails or operates improperly, the
KOS-ECU warns the driver of this by setting off the
outer buzzer and by displaying the keyless operation
warning by the indicator lamp in the combination
meter.
Item
Indicator
State
Keyless
operation key
battery low
voltage
warning
AC809615
Warning operation Warning cancellation
condition (when any of
the condition met)
The keyless operation Warning indicator
key with low battery
flashes for 30
voltage is detected
seconds.
when the engine
switch is pressed.
• Power supply mode
OFF is detected.
• 30 seconds have
passed after the
warning output started.
KEYLESS OPERATION SYSTEM (KOS)
42B-24
Item
Keyless
operation key
take out
warning
Door lock
does not
operate
(keyless
operation key
is located
inside the
vehicle).
Door lock
does not
operate (door
open).
SYSTEM OPERATION
Indicator
AC809615
AC809615
AC809615
State
Warning operation Warning cancellation
condition (when any of
the condition met)
The keyless operation
key is carried out of
the vehicle when the
power supply mode is
in other than OFF,
and the door is
closed.
• The warning
indicator flashes
for 5 minutes.
• Outer buzzer
sounds for 5.69
seconds in
pattern 2.
• Power supply mode
OFF is detected.
• KOS-ECU has
detected a keyless
operation key inside
the vehicle.
• 5 minutes have passed
when the power supply
mode is in ACC.
The lock/unlock
switch on the front
door outside handle
(driver's side, front
passenger's side) or
the tailgate lock
release handle
(tailgate open switch,
tailgate lock switch)
are pressed when the
keyless operation key
is still located inside
the car.
• Warning
indicator flashes
for 5 seconds.
• Outer buzzer
sounds for 2.96
seconds in
pattern 1.
• The lock/unlock switch
on the front door
outside handle (driver's
side, front passenger's
side) or tailgate lock
release handle (tailgate
open switch, tailgate
lock switch) are
pressed again.
• 5 seconds have passed
after the warning output
started.
The lock/unlock
switch on the front
door outside handle
(driver's side, front
passenger's side) or
the tailgate lock
release handle
(tailgate open switch,
tailgate lock switch)
are pressed when the
door is ajar.
• Warning
indicator flashes
for 5 seconds.
• Outer buzzer
sounds for 2.96
seconds in
pattern 1.
• All doors are closed.
• 5 seconds have passed
after the warning output
started.
KEYLESS OPERATION SYSTEM (KOS)
SYSTEM OPERATION
Item
Indicator
State
System error
AC809615
42B-25
Warning operation Warning cancellation
condition (when any of
the condition met)
Engine switch is
The warning
pressed when an
indicator illuminates
error has been
for 5 minutes.
detected in EEPROM
of KOS-ECU.
5 minutes have passed
after the alarm is output,
also the power supply
mode is OFF
Engine switch is
pressed when a
transmission antenna
has an open circuit or
short to power supply.
Open circuit or short
to earth is detected in
the key slot.
An error is detected,
and the power supply
mode is other than
OFF.
No keyless
operation key
detected
inside the car
AC809615
Key reminder
AC809615
Engine switch
reminder
AC809615
No keyless operation The warning
key is detected inside indicator flashes for
the car when the
5 seconds.
engine switch is
pressed.
• Power supply mode
OFF is detected.
• 5 seconds have passed
after the warning output
started.
With the driver's door
kept open, the
keyless operation key
is not removed from
the key slot located in
the floor console.
• The warning
indicator flashes
for 1 minute.
• Outer buzzer
sounds for 2.96
seconds in
pattern 1.
• Key is removed from
the key slot in the floor
console.
• 1 minutes have passed
after the warning output
started.
The lock/unlock
switch on the front
door outside handle
(driver's side, front
passenger's side) or
the tailgate lock
release handle
(tailgate open switch,
tailgate lock switch)
are pressed when the
power supply mode is
other than OFF.
• Warning
indicator flashes
for 5 seconds.
• Outer buzzer
sounds for 2.96
seconds in
pattern 1.
• Power supply mode
OFF is detected.
• 5 seconds have passed
after the warning output
started.
KEYLESS OPERATION SYSTEM (KOS)
42B-26
SYSTEM OPERATION
<Sound pattern 1>
<Sound pattern 2>
T7
T3
T3
T1
T4
T3
T4
T3
T4
T1
T2
T1 : 0.08 ± 0.01 second
T2 : 2.96 seconds
T5
T6
T5
T6
T5
T6
T5
T3 : 1.01 seconds
T4 : 0.55 second
T5 : 0.17 ± 0.01 second
T6 : 0.11 ± 0.01 second
T7 : 5.69 seconds
AC501053AE
OSS WARNING AND WARNING INDICATOR LIST
When the OSS fails or operates improperly, the
OSS-ECU warns the driver of this by displaying the
one-touch start system warning by the indicator lamp
in the combination meter.
Item
Indicator
Factor
Immobilizer error
AC904253
Steering turn
indication
AC904253
Warning operation
• Displayed when the
certification
communication fails with
KOS, electrical steering
lock, or engine-ECU.
• Displayed when the power
supply mode is turned ON
while the keyless operation
key is judged to be brought
outside the vehicle with the
power supply mode in
ACC, or when the engine
starting operation is
performed after such a
status.
• Displayed when the
electrical steering lock
cannot be locked because
there is a P detection
switch malfunction.
• The warning indicator
illuminates.
Displayed when the steering
lock is not unlocked because
the steering force is applied.
• The warning indicator
flashes.
• Buzzer sounds.
KEYLESS OPERATION SYSTEM (KOS)
42B-27
SYSTEM OPERATION
Item
Indicator
Electrical steering
lock malfunction
Factor
Warning operation
Displayed when a malfunction
occurs to the steering lock
system.
• The warning indicator
illuminates.
• Buzzer sounds.
The door is open with the
steering lock not locked.
Buzzer sounds.
Displayed when an error
occurs to the power supply
system.
• The warning indicator
illuminates.
• Buzzer sounds.
The door is open with the
power supply mode in ON or
in ACC.
Buzzer sounds.
AC809615
Steering lock not
locked
−
Power supply
system error
AC809615
Power OFF
indication
−
WARNINGS/ALARMS <High contrast meter>
M2421009300415
KOS WARNING AND WARNING INDICATOR LIST
When KOS failed or operated improperly, KOS-ECU
warns the driver of this by setting off the outer buzzer
and the keyless operation warning indicator on the
multi information display in the combination meter.
Item
Display content
State
Keyless
operation
key battery
low voltage
warning
Keyless
operation
key take out
warning
KEY
BATTERY
LOW
AC809614
AC809615
Warning
operation
Warning cancellation
condition (when any
of the condition met)
The keyless
Warning
operation key with indicator display
low battery voltage for 30 seconds.
is detected when
the engine switch
is pressed.
• Power supply mode
OFF is detected.
• 30 seconds have
passed after the
warning output
started.
• The warning
indicator
display for 5
minutes.
• Outer buzzer
sounds for
5.69 seconds
in pattern 2.
• Power supply mode
OFF is detected.
• KOS-ECU has
detected a keyless
operation key
inside the vehicle.
• 5 minutes have
passed when the
power supply mode
is in ACC.
KEY NOT
The keyless
DETECTED operation key is
carried out of the
vehicle when the
power supply
mode is in other
than OFF, and the
door is closed.
KEYLESS OPERATION SYSTEM (KOS)
42B-28
Item
Door lock
does not
operate
(keyless
operation
key is
located
inside the
vehicle).
Door lock
does not
operate
(door open).
SYSTEM OPERATION
Display content
AC809615
State
Warning
operation
Warning cancellation
condition (when any
of the condition met)
KEY STILL The lock/unlock
IN VEHICLE switch of the front
door outside
handle is pressed
when the keyless
operation key is
still located inside
the car.
• Warning
indicator
display for 5
seconds.
• Outer buzzer
sounds for
2.96 seconds
in pattern 1.
• Lock/unlock switch
of the front door
outside handle is
pressed again.
• 5 seconds have
passed after the
warning output
started.
CHECK
DOORS
The lock/unlock
switch on the front
door outside
handle is pressed
when the door is
ajar.
• Warning
indicator
display for 5
seconds.
• Outer buzzer
sounds for
2.96 seconds
in pattern 1.
• All doors are
closed.
• 5 seconds have
passed after the
warning output
started.
KEYLESS
OPERATIO
N SYSTEM
SERVICE
REQUIRED
Engine switch is
pressed when an
error has been
detected in
EEPROM of
KOS-ECU.
The warning
indicator display
for 5 minutes.
5 minutes have
passed after the
engine switch is
pressed, also the
power supply mode is
OFF.
No keyless
The warning
operation key is
indicator display
detected inside the for 5 seconds.
car when the
engine switch is
pressed.
• Power supply mode
OFF is detected.
• 5 seconds have
passed after the
warning output
started.
AC809615
System
error
AC809615
Engine switch is
pressed when a
transmission
antenna has an
open circuit or
short to power
supply.
Open circuit or
short to earth is
detected in the key
slot.
An error is
detected, and the
power supply
mode is other than
OFF.
No keyless
operation
key detected
inside the
car
AC904250
KEY NOT
DETECTED
INSERT
KEY INTO
KEY SLOT
KEYLESS OPERATION SYSTEM (KOS)
42B-29
SYSTEM OPERATION
Item
Display content
Key
reminder
State
Warning
operation
Warning cancellation
condition (when any
of the condition met)
REMOVE
KEY FROM
KEY SLOT
With the driver's
door kept open,
the keyless
operation key is
not removed from
the key slot.
• The warning
indicator
display for 1
minute.
• Outer buzzer
sounds for
2.96 seconds
in pattern 1.
• Key is removed
from the key slot.
• 1 minutes have
passed after the
warning output
started.
−
The lock/unlock
switch on the front
door outside
handle (driver's
side, front
passenger's side)
or the tailgate lock
release handle
(tailgate open
switch, tailgate
lock switch) are
pressed when the
power supply
mode is other than
OFF.
• Warning
indicator
display for 5
seconds.
• Outer buzzer
sounds for
2.96 seconds
in pattern 1.
5 minutes have
passed after the
engine switch is
pressed, also the
power supply mode is
OFF.
AC904251
Engine
switch
reminder
AC904252
<Sound pattern 1>
<Sound pattern 2>
T7
T3
T3
T1
T4
T3
T4
T3
T4
T1
T2
T1 : 0.08 ± 0.01 seconds
T2 : 2.96 seconds
T5
T6
T5
T6
T5
T6
T5
T3 : 1.01 seconds
T4 : 0.55 seconds
T5 : 0.17 ± 0.01 seconds
T6 : 0.11 ± 0.01 seconds
T7 : 5.69 seconds
AC501053AC
OSS WARNING AND WARNING INDICATOR LIST
When OSS failed or operated improperly, KOS-ECU
warns the driver to that effect by displaying the
one-touch start system warning on the multi information display in the combination meter.
42B-30
Item
KEYLESS OPERATION SYSTEM (KOS)
SYSTEM OPERATION
Display contents
Immobilizer error
Factor
IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM
SERVICE REQUIRED
AC904253
Steering turn
indication
• Displayed when the
certification communication
fails with KOS, electrical
steering lock, or
engine-ECU.
• Displayed when the power
supply mode is turned ON
while the keyless operation
key is judged to be brought
outside the vehicle with the
power supply mode in ACC,
or when the engine starting
operation is performed after
such a status.
• Displayed when the
electrical steering lock
cannot be locked because
there is a P detection switch
malfunction.
PUSH ENGINE SWITCH Displayed when the steering
WHILE TURNING
lock is not unlocked because
STEERING WHEEL
the steering force is applied.
AC904254
Electrical steering
lock malfunction
STEERING LOCK
SERVICE REQUIRED
Displayed when a malfunction
occurs to the steering lock
system.
SHIFT TO P POSITION
Displayed if the shift lever is in
other than "P" range when the
engine is not running.
STEERING WHEEL
UNLOCKED
Displayed when the door is
open with the steering lock not
locked.
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
SERVICE REQUIRED
Displayed when an error occurs
to the power supply system.
AC904255
Shift P indication
AC904256
Steering lock not
locked
AC904257
Power supply
system error
AC904260
KEYLESS OPERATION SYSTEM (KOS)
42B-31
CUSTOMISATION FUNCTION
Item
Display contents
Engine starting
method
Factor
PRESS BRAKE PEDAL
TO START ENGINE
Displayed when the shift lever
is in other than "P" range or "N"
range at the engine start, or
when the engine switch is
pressed without the brake
pedal depressed.
−
Displayed when the door is
open with the power supply
mode in ON or in ACC.
AC904258
Power OFF
indication
AC904252
CUSTOMISATION FUNCTION
M2421000300548
By operating the M.U.T.-III ETACS system, the following functions can be customised. The programmed information is held even when the battery
is disconnected.
Adjustment
Adjustment item
Adjusting content
item (M.U.T.-III
(M.U.T.-III display)
display)
Hazard answer
back
Adjustment of the
number of keyless
hazard warning
lamp answer back
flashes
Adjusting content
Lock:1, Unlock:2
LOCK: Flashes once, UNLOCK: Flashes
twice (initial condition)
Lock:1, Unlock:0
LOCK: Flashes once, UNLOCK: No flash
Lock:0, Unlock:2
LOCK: No flash, UNLOCK: Flash twice
Lock:2, Unlock:1
LOCK: Flash twice, UNLOCK: Flash once
Lock:2, Unlock:0
LOCK: Flash twice, UNLOCK: No flash
Lock:0, Unlock:1
LOCK: No flash, UNLOCK: Flash once
Lock:0, Unlock:0
No function
Auto fold mirror Electric folding door
mirror automatic
unfolding function
<vehicles with
electric retractable
remote controlled
door mirrors>
Not Auto
No synchronised operation
Open Vehicle SPD
Vehicle speed-dependent operation
Open/Close by IG
Ignition switch linked operation
OPN/CLS Keyles
Keyless entry linked operation (initial
condition)
Auto door
unlock
Disabled
Without function (initial condition)
Always (P pos)
With function: Operates when the shift
lever or the selector lever is moved to the
P position.
Always(Lock pos)
With function: Operates when the ignition
switch is moved to the LOCK (OFF)
position.
Adjustment of the
auto door unlock
function
KEYLESS OPERATION SYSTEM (KOS)
42B-32
CUSTOMISATION FUNCTION
Adjustment
item (M.U.T.-III
display)
Adjustment item
Adjusting content
(M.U.T.-III display)
Adjusting content
Door unlock
mode
Adjustment of
power door locks
with selective
unlocking
All Doors Unlock
Without function: The first operation of
keyless entry system or unlock operation
by KOS unlocks all doors (initial condition).
Dr Door Unlock
With function: The first operation of
keyless entry system or unlock operation
by KOS unlocks the driver's door only, and
the second unlock operation within 2
seconds after that unlocks all doors.
30 sec.
30 seconds (initial condition)
60 sec.
60 seconds
120 sec.
120 seconds
180 sec.
180 seconds
Timer lock timer Timer lock period
adjustment
Multi mode
Multi-mode keyless Disable
entry function
D/M: O&C
customisation
<Vehicles with
electric retractable
remote controlled
door mirrors>
No function
Door mirror fold/unfold operation only
(initial condition)
KOS key detect With/without KOS
out from window key exterior
detection function
<Vehicles with
KOS>
Enable
No function
Disable
With function (initial condition)
KOS feature
Both enable
All KOS functions are enabled (initial
condition).
Door Entry enable
Only door entry function is enabled.
ENG strt enable
Only engine starting function is enabled.
Both disabled
All KOS functions are disabled.
0 sec.
0 second
3 sec.
3 seconds (Initial condition)
5 sec.
5 seconds
KOS unlock
disable time
Outer buzzer
volume
KOS function
adjustment
<Vehicles with
KOS>
Adjusts the door
unlock inhibition
period after door
lock is activated.
<Vehicles with
KOS>
Volume adjustment Volume 1
for the KOS outer
Volume 2
buzzer
Volume 3
Gate auto open Opening operation
by Handle SW by using the gate
handle switch
Quieter than the standard
Standard volume (Initial condition)
Louder than the standard
Disable
No function
Enable
With function (Initial condition)
51-1
GROUP 51
EXTERIOR
CONTENTS
GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . .
BUMPER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AERO PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GARNISHES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
WIPER AND WASHER . . . . . . . . . . .
51-2
WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHER . . . .
51-7
REAR WIPER AND WASHER . . . . . . . . . .
51-14
HEADLAMP WASHER <OPTIONAL>
51-16
WIPER DEICER <OPTIONAL> . . . . .
51-17
OUTSIDE MIRROR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
51-17
CUSTOMISATION FUNCTION. . . . . .
51-20
51-3
51-5
51-6
51-7
EXTERIOR
51-2
GENERAL INFORMATION
GENERAL INFORMATION
M2510000103148
FEATURES
BETTER APPEARANCE
1. Newly designed front bumper and radiator grille
2. The windshield washer nozzles are located at the
rear end under the hood.
BETTER AERODYNAMIC CHARACTERISTICS
3. Aerodynamic front bumper
4. Front side air dam (Refer to )
5. Overfender
6. Roof drip moulding (Refer to )
BETTER USER-FRIENDLINESS
7. Electric folding remote-controlled door mirrors
<Some models>
8. Heated door mirrors
9. Door mirrors with built-in side turn-signal lamps
<Some models>
10 Roof rails <Optional>
BETTER PRODUCT PACKAGE
11. Front bumper to reduce the severity of an injury
in an accident with pedestrians. (Refer to )
12. Vehicle speed sensitive intermittent windshield
wiper system
13. Rain sensitive AUTO wiper <Optional >
14. Wiper deicer <Optional >
15.Headlamp washer <Optional>
SUPPORT RECYCLING OF RESOURCES
Aggressively uses PP (polypropylene) materials that
are easy to recycle and easy to stamp material symbols on the plastic (resin) parts.
6
2,12,13,14
7,8,9
1
10
6
3
5
11
15
4
5
ACB05806 AB
EXTERIOR
51-3
BUMPER
BUMPER
M2510001300566
FRONT BUMPER
CONSTRUCTION DIAGRAM
Front bumper
reinforcement
Front bumper face
Front bumper
side bracket
Splash shield
front
Bulge
ACC00353AB
• Impact-absorbing structure
The front bumper reinforcement has been installed
behind the front bumper assembly and
energy-absorbing material has been adopted to
reduce a risk of injury to pedestrian's legs upon a
collision.
• With the front bumper reinforcement remaining
on the body, the front bumper can be removed as
a unit.
• front side air dam
The front side air dams have been adopted in front of
the left and right tyres to suppress the airflow
against the tyres.
• Resin-made front bumper side brackets have
been adopted to improve the alignment with the
body.
EXTERIOR
51-4
BUMPER
REAR BUMPER
CONSTRUCTION DIAGRAM
Rear bumper face
support bracket
Rear bumper face
ACB05705AB
• Resin-made rear bumper face support brackets
have been adopted to improve the alignment with
the body.
EXTERIOR
AERO PARTS
51-5
AERO PARTS
M2510003001348
CONSTRUCTION DIAGRAM
Roof drip moulding
Door mirror
Front side air dam
Overfender
shape
Overfender
shape
ACC00450AB
Aerodynamic performance has been improved by the
optimised shape of the following parts.
• Front side air dam: Refer to .
• Overfender shape: Overfender shape from the
front bumper to the fender and from the quarter
panel to the rear bumper keeps the off-road vehicle image as an SUV, at the same time the optimised shape of the related parts improves
aerodynamic performance.
• Roof drip moulding: Groove in the roof moulding
is eliminated in order to reduce wind noise and
aerodynamic drag.
• Door mirror
51-6
EXTERIOR
GARNISHES
GARNISHES
M2510008300675
CONSTRUCTION DIAGRAM
Tailgate garnish
ACB05464AB
The following tailgate garnish have been installed on
the body to improve the appearance and marketability.
EXTERIOR
WIPER AND WASHER
51-7
WIPER AND WASHER
WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHER
M2510007001458
CONSTRUCTION DIAGRAM
Lighting control sensor (rain sensor)
<Optional>
Windshield wiper
blade
Windshield washer hose
Windshield wiper
arm
Windshield
washer nozzle
Wiper link
assembly
Windshield
wiper motor
Windshield washer tank
ACC00345AB
• 2-speed (low/high speed) windshield wiper has
been adopted.
• The intermittent wiper features a vehicle
speed-dependent variable intermittent time function*.
• For the windshield auto wiper, the rain sensitive
AUTO wiper function* has been
adopted.<Optional>
• Wiper motor torque has been increased to
improve kinetic performance of the wiper in the
snowfall. Wiper blade pressure has been
increased to improve the wiping performance
while driving at high speed.
• The mist wiper is turned ON by operating the mist
switch in the opposite direction of the wiper
switch for easy operation. The mist wiper is
equipped with the function that quickly wipes
raindrops away at high speed when the mist
switch is ON, and when the mist switch is OFF, at
low speed until the stop position is reached.
When the mist switch is briefly turned ON, the
wiper operates once at low speed.
• The windshield washer nozzles are located at the
rear end under the hood in order to improve
appearance.
• The windshield washer is a 2-nozzle and 6-jet
type.
• The windshield washer nozzle with the integral
check valve has been adopted to prevent the
washer fluid from running down, and to improve
the response to switch operation.
EXTERIOR
51-8
WIPER AND WASHER
• The washer motor for both of a windshield
washer motor and a rear washer motor has been
installed to reduce the weight.
• Washer-linked wiper function* has been adopted.
The washer fluid can be injected without operating the wiper. When the ignition switch is turned
ON while the washer switch is ON, the washer
motor operates but the wiper does not.
• The delayed finishing wipe function* has been
adopted to the windshield wiper. When the wiper
operation is stopped after spraying the washer
fluid, the wiper operates once to wipe out the
washer fluid ran down.
NOTE: *: Using the customise function, the vehicle
speed-dependent variable intermittent time function,
rain sensitive AUTO wiper function, washer-linked
wiper function and the delayed finishing wipe function can be selected (Refer to ).
DESCRIPTION OF CONSTRUCTION AND OPERATION
turns OFF. When the intermittent time T1 calcuIntermittent control (Vehicle
lated by step 1 has elapsed after the windshield
speed-dependent variable type) <Initial
wiper relay ON, the windshield wiper relay turns
condition: with function>
ON again, and the above-mentioned operation is
repeated.
Change in intermittent time by variable
intermittent wiper control switch
(when vehicle is stationary)
30
Windshield ON
wiper autostop signal
OFF
Intermittent
time T1
(seconds)
ON
0
Windshield
wiper relay
T1
T1
T1
SLOW
FAST
Variable intermittent wiper
control switch position
AC101493AH
Change in intermittent time according
to vehicle speed
30
Intermittent
time T1
(seconds)
When at SLOW position
Windshield mist
wiper switch
When at FAST position
100
0
Mist wiper control
Windshield wiper
auto-stop signal
Vehicle speed (km/h)
AC101502 AC
1. ETACS calculates the windshield intermittent
wiper interval T1 from the position of the windshield intermittent wiper switch on the column
switch and the vehicle speed signal (sent from
the combination meter to ETACS via CAN communication).
NOTE: Using the customise function, the vehicle
speed-dependent variable intermittent time function can be invalidated (Refer to ).
2. When ETACS receives the ON signal of the windshield intermittent wiper switch, it turns the windshield wiper relay ON. When the wiper reaches
the stop position, the windshield wiper auto-stop
signal turns OFF, and the windshield wiper relay
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
Windshield wiper
relay
Windshield wiper
speed switching
relay
ON
OFF
ON (HIGH)
OFF (LOW)
AC207004AH
When the windshield wiper mist switch on the column switch is turned ON while the ignition switch is
in ACC or ON position, the column switch turns the
windshield wiper relay ON. At the same time, the
wiper speed switching relay turns ON (HI). When the
windshield mist wiper switch is ON, the windshield
wiper operates at high speed.
EXTERIOR
51-9
WIPER AND WASHER
Low speed wiper and high speed wiper control
ON
Windshield low-speed
wiper switch
OFF
ON
Windshield high-speed
wiper switch
OFF
ON
Windshield wiper auto-stop
signal
OFF
ON
Windshield wiper
relay
Windshield wiper speed
switching relay
OFF
(HI) ON
(LO) OFF
Low speed operations
High speed operations
AC506610AF
When the windshield low speed wiper switch on the
column switch is turned ON while the ignition switch
is in ACC or ON position, the column switch turns the
windshield wiper relay ON. Also, the wiper speed
switching relay turns OFF (LO), and the windshield
wiper operates at low speed.
When the windshield high speed wiper switch is
turned ON, the windshield wiper relay turns ON.
Also, the wiper speed switching relay turns ON (HI),
and the windshield wiper operates at high speed.
Windshield wiper linked with washer function <Initial condition: with function>
Windshield washer switch
ON
OFF
Windshield washer relay
ON
t
OFF
Windshield wiper
auto stop signal
Windshield wiper relay
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
T
Windshield wiper
switch in off position
T
Windshield wiper switch in
intermittent operation position
t: Less than 0.35 seconds
T: Windshield wiper operation time
AC802704 AE
EXTERIOR
51-10
WIPER AND WASHER
Wiper switch
Washer switch ON time (t)
Windshield wiper operation time
(T)
OFF position
Less than 0.35 second
0 second
0.35 second to less than 0.5
second
1 second
0.5 second or more
3 seconds
Less than 0.35 second
1 second
0.35 second to less than 0.5
second
1 second
0.5 second or more
3 seconds
Less than 0.35 second
1 second
0.35 second to less than 0.5
second
0 second
0.5 second to less than 0.75
second
1 second
0.75 second or more
3 seconds
-
3 seconds
INT position
AUTO position
LO, HI, MIST position
When the windshield washer switch on the column
switch is turned ON while the ignition switch is in
ACC or ON position, ETACS turns the windshield
washer relay ON.
When the windshield washer switch is kept ON for
0.35 second or longer, the windshield wiper relay
(the wiper relay output time varies depending on the
conditions. For details, see the table.) is turned ON,
and the windshield wiper operates at high speed.
The windshield wiper is turned OFF with 3 seconds
delay after the windshield washer switch is turned
OFF.
Even when the windshield washer switch is turned
ON while the windshield wiper is operating intermittently, the intermittent action starts again after the
linked operation is finished.
If the ignition switch is turned to ACC position while
the windshield washer switch is ON, the windshield
washer relay turns ON, but the windshield wiper
does not perform the linked operation. When the
windshield washer switch is turned OFF and then
ON, the windshield wiper starts the linked operation.
NOTE: .
• Using the customise function, the washer linked
windshield wiper function can be invalidated
(Refer to ).
• Using the customise function, when the washer
linked windshield wiper function is invalidated,
only the washer operates. It is useful to melt ice
from the frozen windshield.
Comfort washer function <Initial condition: without function>
The table below shows the switch operations of the
comfort washer.
Wiper
Washer-linked wiper: Enable
switch
Washer-linked wiper: Disable
Vehicle speed less
than 130km/h
Vehicle speed
130km/h or more
Vehicle speed less
than 130km/h
Vehicle speed
130km/h or more
OFF
Intermittent washer
and wiping
1-second washer and 1-second washer
wiping
1-second washer
INT
Intermittent washer
and wiping
1-second washer and 1-second washer
wiping
1-second washer
AUTO
Intermittent washer
and wiping
1-second washer and Intermittent washer
wiping
and wiping
1-second washer and
wiping
EXTERIOR
51-11
WIPER AND WASHER
Wiper
switch
Washer-linked wiper: Enable
Washer-linked wiper: Disable
LO
Intermittent washer
and wiping
0.5-second washer
Intermittent washer
and wiping
0.5-second washer
HI or MIST
1-second washer
1-second washer
1-second washer
1-second washer
NOTE: .
• The comfort washer function can be enable by
the customise function.(Refer to .)
• When the windshield wiper switch is operated
while the comfort washer function is activated,
the comfort washer function will be suspended.
Intermittent washer and wiping
Windshield washer switch
ON
OFF
t
Windshield wiper auto
stop signal
Windshield washer relay
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
Windshield wiper relay
T
ON
OFF
t: Less than 0.35 seconds
T: 1.0 second
T1: 3.0 second
The intermittent washer and wiping operate as follows:
1. Turn on the windshield washer switch for less
than 0.35 second.
2. The windshield washer operates for 0.5 seconds.
3. The windshield washer operates intermittently 4
to 6 times, and the windshield wipers operate,
linked with the windshield washer operation.
4. The windshield wipers operate for 3 seconds.
T1
AC802531AC
NOTE: .
• If the windshield washer switch is turned ON for
less than 0.35 second when the windshield
washer is injecting washer fluid for 0.5 seconds
and when the windshield washer is injecting
washer fluid intermittently 4 to 6 times, the intermittent washer and wiping will stop.
• If the windshield washer switch is turned ON for
less than 0.35 second when the windshield wipers are operating for 3 seconds, the windshield
washer operates intermittently 4 to 6 times again.
EXTERIOR
51-12
WIPER AND WASHER
1-second washer and wiping
ON
Windshield washer switch
OFF
t
ON
Windshield washer relay
OFF
T
ON
Windshield wiper relay
OFF
T1
t: Less than 0.35 seconds
T: 1.0 second
T1: 3.0 second
When the windshield washer switch is turned ON for
less than 0.35 second, the windshield washer operates for 1 second. The windshield washer operates
for 1 second, and then the windshield wipers operate
for 3 seconds.
NOTE: .
• If the windshield washer switch is turned ON for
less than 0.35 second when the windshield wipers are operating for 3 seconds, the windshield
washer operates for 1 second again.
0.5-second washer
Windshield washer
switch
When the windshield washer switch is turned ON for
less than 0.35 second, the windshield washer operates for 0.5 second.
1-second washer
Windshield
washer switch
ON
ON
t: Less than 0.35 seconds
T: 0.5 second
OFF
ON
OFF
t: Less than 0.35 seconds
T: 1.0 second
OFF
OFF
ON
t
Windshield
washer relay
t
Windshield washer
relay
AC802442 AC
T
AC802444 AC
T
AC802443AC
When the windshield washer switch is turned ON for
less than 0.35 second, the windshield washer operates for 1 second.
EXTERIOR
51-13
WIPER AND WASHER
Rain sensitive AUTO wiper function <Optional>
Dry windshield
Windshield
Lighting control sensor
Optical
element
High
intensity
Infrared rays
Emitter diode
Wet windshield
Raindrop
Receiver diode
Windshield
Optical
element
Reduced
intensity
Windshield
Emitter diode
Infrared rays
Receiver diode
ACB05683AB
• Lighting control sensor (rain sensor) has been
installed in the upper part of the windshield to
sense the raindrops and windshield wiper can be
operated when the ignition switch is at ON and
wiper switch is at AUTO position.
• The lighting control sensor detects the raindrops
on the windshield surface using the optical element, and it automatically switches the windshield wiper operation, depending on the amount
of rainfall, to the intermittent or LO/HI operation.
• The lighting control sensor detects the raindrops
using the reflections of infrared rays, and
depending on the amount of rainfall, it automatically adjusts the wiping speed.
• Dry windshield: All infrared rays emitted from the
emitter diode are reflected by the windshield and
directed to the receiver diode as they are.
• Wet windshield: Part of the infrared rays emitted
from the emitter diode are transmitted to outside
of the windshield through the raindrops, and the
infrared rays with reduced intensity are directed
to the receiver diode.
NOTE: Using the customise function, the rain sensitive AUTO wiper function can be invalidated (Refer to
).
Delayed finishing wipe function <Initial condition: with function>
1. When the washer lever of the column switch is
operated for 0.5 seconds or longer with the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position, or when
the comfort washer function is enable, the
washer fluid is sprayed and the wiper is operated.
6 seconds after stopping the wiper operation, the
wiper operates once to wipe out the washer fluid
ran down.
NOTE: Using the customise function, the delayed finishing wipe function can be invalidated (Refer to ).
51-14
EXTERIOR
WIPER AND WASHER
REAR WIPER AND WASHER
M2510008000748
CONSTRUCTION DIAGRAM
Rear washer
nozzle
Rear wiper hose
Rear wiper blade
Rear wiper arm
Rear wiper
motor
ACC00126AB
• Resin wiper arm has been adopted to achieve
weight reduction and integration of the arm and
blade.
• Fixed interval type intermittent wiper* has been
adopted to provide a clear rear view in rainy
weather.
• The washer tank is shared with the windshield
washer.
• Washer-linked wiper function* has been adopted.
Washer fluid can be optionally injected without
operating the wiper optionally. When the ignition
switch is turned ON while the washer switch is
ON, the washer motor operates but the wiper
does not.
• Reverse gear-linked rear wiper function (automatic rear window wiper operation with reverse
gear engaged)* has been adopted. In this function, the rear wiper performs continuous
low-speed operation for 3 cycles approximately 1
second after the selector lever is shifted to "R"
position while the front or rear wiper switch is in
the intermittent position, and then proceed with
the intermittent operation.
NOTE: *: Using the customise function, the fixed
interval type intermittent wiper, reverse gear-linked
rear wiper function and the washer-linked wiper function can be adjusted (Refer to ).
EXTERIOR
51-15
WIPER AND WASHER
DESCRIPTION OF CONSTRUCTION AND OPERATION
Rear wiper control <Initial condition: Front or rear wiper switch ON>
ON
Rear wiper switch
OFF
Inhibitor switch
"R" position
ON
OFF
T3
T2
T2
t
T3
T3
ON
Rear wiper relay
OFF
T4 T2 T4
T1
T1
T4 T2 T4 T2 T4
T4: 0.6 second
T2: 7.4 seconds
T3: 8.0 seconds
t: 1.0 second
T1: 3.0 seconds
When the rear wiper switch on the column switch is
turned ON while the ignition switch is in ACC or ON
position, ETACS turns the rear wiper relay ON for 3
seconds (for approximately 2 cycles) and operates
the intermittent action in 8 seconds interval.
AC207474AO
When the selector lever is moved to R (reverse)
position during the front or rear wiper operation, the
inhibitor switch R (reverse) turns ON, and 1 second
after that, ETACS turns the rear wiper relay ON for 3
seconds (for approximately 3 cycles), and operates
the intermittent action in 8 seconds interval again.
NOTE: Using the customise function, the operation
with front/rear wiper ON can be switched to the operation with the rear wiper only ON. (Refer to .)
Washer-linked rear wiper function <Initial condition: with function>
Rear washer switch
ON
OFF
ON
Rear washer relay
OFF
T3
T2
Rear wiper relay
ON
OFF
t
t
t
T1
T1
T1
T4
t : 0.3 second
T1 : 3 seconds
T2 : 7.4 seconds
T3 : 8 seconds
T4 : 0.6 second
Rear wiper switch
in off position
When the rear washer switch on the column switch is
turned ON while the ignition switch is in ACC or ON
position, ETACS turns the rear washer relay ON.
The rear washer relay turns ON after the rear washer
switch has been ON for 0.3 seconds, then turns the
rear wiper relay ON to operate the rear wiper simultaneously. When the rear washer switch is turned
OFF, after 3 seconds the rear wiper is turned OFF.
T4
Rear wiper switch in on position
AC507498AE
If the rear washer switch is turned ON during the rear
wiper operation, 7.4 seconds after turning OFF the
rear wiper relay turns OFF, the intermittent action is
resumed in 8 seconds interval.
NOTE: Using the customise function, the washer
linked rear wiper function can be invalidated (Refer
to ).
EXTERIOR
51-16
HEADLAMP WASHER <OPTIONAL>
HEADLAMP WASHER <OPTIONAL>
M2510000500437
CONSTRUCTION DIAGRAM
Washer tank
Headlamp washer cover
Headlamp washer
cover
A
Headlamp washer motor
A
Washer hose
Section A – A <Headlamp washer operated>
Section A – A
Headlamp
Headlamp
washer
nozzle
Headlamp washer
actuator assembly
Front bumper
ACC00343 AB
• The headlamp washer can be operated with the
ignition switch at the ON or ACC position and the
headlamp switch at the ON position. Push the
headlamp washer button located at the end of the
lighting lever once and the washer will be
sprayed onto the headlamps.
• A headlamp washer mechanism that thrusts out
and retracts nozzles, utilizing the water pressure
produced by motors has been adopted as an
option. This mechanism contributes to better
appearances of vehicles when their washer nozzles are not in use.
• The headlamp washer tank used for this mechanism is also used for the windshield and rear window washers.
EXTERIOR
51-17
WIPER DEICER <OPTIONAL>
WIPER DEICER <OPTIONAL>
M2510008200184
CONSTRUCTION DIAGRAM
Windshield glass
Heated print
ACB05706AB
For the prevention measures for the wiper freeze-up
at the stop position, the wiper deicer has been
installed. The wiper is deiced by the heater element
integrated in the windshield to perform its operation.
In addition, the wiper deicer is linked with the rear
window defogger.
OUTSIDE MIRROR
M2510008101005
CONSTRUCTION DIAGRAM
Door mirror assembly
Mirror glass
Side turn-signal
lamp
Remote controlled Mirror folding/
unfolding switch
mirror switch
ACC00012 AB
Door mirrors have the following features:
• Electric folding remote-controlled door mirrors
have been adopted <Some models>.
• Heated mirrors have been adopted.
• Door mirrors with built-in side turn-signal lamps
have been adopted <Some models>.
• Low air resistance door mirror shape has been
introduced.
EXTERIOR
51-18
OUTSIDE MIRROR
• One of the optional functions, such as the vehicle
speed-dependent automatic unfolding function*,
ignition switch-linked function* or keyless
entry-linked function*, can be selected.
NOTE: *: Using the customise function, the vehicle
speed-dependent automatic unfolding function, ignition switch-linked function or the keyless entry-linked
function can be selected (Refer to ).
DESCRIPTION OF CONSTRUCTION AND OPERATION
Electric retractable remote controlled door mirror
Ignition switch
(ACC)
Remote controlled
mirror switch (folding/
unfolding switch)
Electric retractable remote
controlled mirror
(Unfolding)
Electric retractable remote
controlled mirror
(Folding)
ON
T1
T1
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
T2
T2
T2
OFF
t
t
ON
T2
T2
t
T2
OFF
t: 0.1 second
T1: 30 seconds
T2: 16 seconds
AC506503AB
When the folding/unfolding switch on the electric
remote control mirror switch is turned ON while the
ignition switch is in ACC or ON position, ETACS
turns either of the door mirror fold relay or unfold
relay ON for 16 seconds to fold or unfold the door
mirrors. Even after the ignition switch is turned OFF,
the door mirrors remain operable for 30 seconds.
If the folding/unfolding switch on the remote control
mirror switch is turned ON while one of the door mirror relays (fold/unfold) is in operation, the other operating relay is turned ON after 0.1 second.
NOTE: Whether the door mirrors are at the folding or
unfolding position is determined by ETACS according to the memory of the door mirror relay position
(fold/unfold) operated previously. For this reason, if
the mirrors are manually folded, they may not move
when the folding/unfolding switch is pressed next
time.
Automatic unfolding function <Initial condition: Keyless entry-linked
folding/unfolding function)
1. Vehicle speed-dependent unfolding
1.
Vehicle speed
Ignition switch
30 km/h
0 km/h
ON
OFF
Remote controlled mirror switch
(folding/unfolding switch)
Door mirror unfold relay
ON
OFF
ON
T
OFF
Door mirror fold relay
ON
T
OFF
Door mirror position
Unfolding
Folding
T : 16 seconds
AC207002AB
EXTERIOR
51-19
OUTSIDE MIRROR
When the vehicle speed reaches 30 km/h with the
ignition switch ON and the mirrors folded, ETACS
turns the door mirror unfold relay (ON) for 16 seconds to unfold the door mirrors. However, the
door mirrors do not return to their unfolded positions automatically if the ignition switch is turned
from OFF to ON, and then the folding/unfolding
switch on the remote control mirror switch is
operated.
2. Ignition switch-linked folding/unfolding function
1.
ON
Ignition switch
OFF
ON
Driver's door switch
OFF
Door mirror unfold relay
ON
T
T
OFF
ON
Door mirror fold relay
T
OFF
T
Unfolding
Door mirror position
Folding
T: 16 seconds
AC707463AB
When the ignition switch is turned ON with the mirrors folded, ETACS turns the door mirror unfold
relay (ON) to unfold the door mirrors. When the
door is opened with the ignition switch OFF
(LOCK), ETACS turns the door mirror fold relay
(ON) to fold the door mirrors.
3. Keyless entry-linked folding/unfolding function
1.
Keyless entry transmitter ON
unlock switch
OFF
Keyless entry transmitter ON
lock switch
OFF
ON
Door mirror unfold relay
Door mirror fold relay
T
T
OFF
ON
T
T
OFF
Unfolding
Door mirror position
Folding
T: 16 seconds
AC707464 AB
Linked with the keyless entry transmitter locking
operation,* ETACS turns the door mirror fold relay
ON to fold the door mirrors, and linked with the
keyless entry transmitter unlocking operation,
ETACS turns the door mirror unfold relay ON to
unfold the door mirrors.
51-20
EXTERIOR
CUSTOMISATION FUNCTION
NOTE: .
• *: For vehicles with KOS, the door mirrors are
folded linked with lock operation of KOS, and
unfolded linked with unlock operation.
• Using the customise, the functions 1, 2, and 3
can be selected or disabled (Refer to ).
• Whether the door mirrors are at the folding or
unfolding position is memorised and determined
by the previously operated door mirror relay
(fold/unfold). For this reason, if the mirrors are
manually folded, they are not unfolded automatically.
CUSTOMISATION FUNCTION
M2510001400820
By operating the M.U.T.-III ETACS system, the following functions can be customised. The programmed information is held even when the battery
is disconnected.
Adjustment
Adjustment item
Adjusting content
item (M.U.T.-III
(M.U.T.-III display)
display)
Front wiper
operation
Adjustment of the
Normal INT
intermittent
windshield wiper
Variable INT
operation <vehicles
without lighting
Speed Sensitive
control sensor>
Intermittent wiper interval is fixed to 4
seconds.
Adjustment of the
Normal INT
intermittent
windshield wiper
Variable INT
operation <vehicles
with lighting control
Speed Sensitive
sensor>
Intermittent wiper interval is fixed to 4
seconds.
Rain Sensitive
Front /rear
wiper washer
Adjusting content
Disabling or
Only Washer
enabling
Washer & Wiper
washer-linked wiper
function
With after wipe
Intermittent wiper interval is calculated only
by the wiper volume control.
Intermittent wiper interval is calculated
according to the intermittent wiper volume
control and vehicle speed (initial
condition).
Intermittent wiper interval is calculated only
by the wiper volume control.
Intermittent wiper interval is calculated
according to the intermittent wiper volume
control and vehicle speed.
Intermittent wiper interval is calculated
according to the intermittent wiper volume
control and lighting control sensor (initial
condition).
No function
With function: Without delayed finishing
wipe function <Initial condition>
With function: With delayed finishing wipe
function
EXTERIOR
CUSTOMISATION FUNCTION
Adjustment
item (M.U.T.-III
display)
Adjustment item
Adjusting content
(M.U.T.-III display)
Adjusting content
Intelligent/Comf With/without
ort washer
Comfort washer
function
Disable
No function (Initial condition)
Enable
With function
Intermittent time Adjustment of rear
of rear wiper
wiper interval
0 sec
No wiper interval
4 sec
4 seconds
8 sec
8 seconds (initial condition)
16 sec
16 seconds
51-21
Rear wiper Low Disabling or
Disable
speed mode
enabling rear wiper Enable
continuous
operation
No function
Rear wiper
(linked reverse
gear)
Enable(R wip.ON)
Operates only when the rear wiper switch
is ON.
Enable(R/F wip.)
Operates only when the front or rear wiper
switch is ON (initial condition).
Not Auto
No synchronised operation
Open Vehicle SPD
Vehicle speed-dependent operation
Open/Close by IG
Ignition switch linked operation
OPN/CLS Keyless
Keyless entry linked operation (initial
condition)
Adjustment of
automatic rear
window wiper
operation with
reverse gear
engaged
Auto fold mirror Electric folding door
mirror automatic
unfolding function
<vehicles with
electric retractable
remote controlled
door mirrors>
With function (initial condition)
52-1
GROUP 52
INTERIOR AND
SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT
SYSTEM (SRS)
CONTENTS
INTERIOR
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)
52A-1
GROUP 52A
INTERIOR
CONTENTS
GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . .
52A-2
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND FLOOR CONSOLE
.................................
52A-3
SEAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SEAT BELT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
52A-7
TRIMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
52A-8
INTERIOR TRIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
52A-8
DOOR TRIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
52A-9
52A-4
FRONT SEAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
52A-4
SECOND SEAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
52A-5
LUGGAGE ROOM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52A-10
HEADLINING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52A-11
INTERIOR
52A-2
GENERAL INFORMATION
GENERAL INFORMATION
M2520000101745
Functionality, interior comfort, and safety have been
emphasized, giving interior design for elegance and
relaxation space. Various measures have been taken
actively to protect the environment and recycle
resources.
FEATURES
Quality improvement
1. Full interior trim
2. The dual-action folding mechanism of the second
seat allows the driver to flip up the seat cushion
and then fold the seatback with easy operation.
Due to this, a lowered flat cargo space can be
achieved without any compromise to seating
comfort.
Usability improvement
1. Armrest (rear floor console, second seat, front
door trim, rear door trim)
2. Cup holder (front floor console, second seat armrest)
3. Bottle holder
4. Tonneau cover <Vehicles with tonneau cover>
5. Luggage hook
Convenient boxes
1. Glove box
2. Card holder (glove box)
3. Seatback pocket (front seat)
4. Centre lower tray
5.
6.
7.
8.
Rear console tray
Rear floor console box
Rear side box (lower quarter trim RH)
Door pocket (front door trim, rear door trim)
Safety enhancement
1. Front and rear collision protection seat mechanism (front seat)
2. ISO-FIX child seat fixing bar (second seat outside)
3. Tether anchorage (second seat outside)
4. ELR 3-point seat belt
5. Seat belt retractor with a driver's side pre-tensioner and force limiter
6. Seat belt retractor with a passenger’s side
pre-tensioner and force limiter
Consideration for the optimum driving position
1. Seat height adjustment (driver’s seat)
2. Headrestraint with height adjustment (front seat)
3. Seat slide adjustment (front seat)
Measures for resource recycling
1. Aggressively use PP materials that are easy to
recycle and easy to stamp material symbols on
the plastic (resin) parts.
2. Reduction of chemical material (formaldehyde*,
organic solvent)
NOTE: *: Clear and colourless, toxic, irritating odour
INTERIOR
52A-3
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND FLOOR CONSOLE
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND FLOOR CONSOLE
M2520001001462
Key box
Glove box assembly
Instrument centre panel
Decoration panel
Key box
Armrest
Console cup holder
Front floor console
Rear floor console
Console cup holder
USB adapter
Accessory
socket
ACC00465 AB
The instrument panel offers the following features:
• The division unit of each part has been enlarged,
also the gap and level difference between the
instrument panel has been minimised to achieve
the delicate quality.
INTERIOR
52A-4
SEAT
• A lamp has been added to the large-sized glove
box with card holder have been installed for the
improved convenience.
• To the lower part of centre panel, a centre lower
tray that can store up to 6 CDs has been installed
with which jumping out or dropping of stored
items during abrupt start is prevented.
• A console cup holder that can store two plastic
bottles or brick packs has been installed in the
front floor console.
• Rear console tray that can store a mobile phone,
cards, pens, and others has been installed to the
rear floor console, and additionally, rear floor console box that can store 10 CDs or 7 DVDs has
been installed to under the rear floor console.
• Simple and clear form by reducing separations on
the instrument panel.
• Soft pads attached around the upper part, thus
improving the sense of touch.
• Ergonomic layout where controls are arranged at
the centre of the dash board and face towards
the driver.
• High grossed black finish on the instrument centre panel.
• Decoration panels, which underline sportiness
(silver carbon) or luxury (wood grain tone), are
arranged optimally in the vicinity of front passenger. <wood grain tone: optional equipment>
• The engine can be started and power supply to
accessories can be turned on and off in the conventional manner by inserting a keyless operation
key into the key slot on the instrument panel centre lower (upper part of the front floor console).
SEAT
FRONT SEAT
M2520004001494
Seatback pocket
Headrestraint
adjustment
Reclining adjustment
<Front/rear collision protection seat
mechanism>
Headrestraint
Seatback
frame
Cross frame
Height adjustment
Slide adjustment
ACB05051AB
The front seat offers the following advantages:
• The seats are designed to be adjustable in the
reclining and sliding directions.
• Headrestraints with a vertical adjustment mechanism have been adopted.
• The seat height adjustment function has been
introduced to the driver’s seat. This function
raises and lowers the seat cushion together with
the seatback, thus the driver's waist position in
relation to the seatback is always kept constant,
INTERIOR
52A-5
SEAT
resulting in the improved riding comfort. By the
height adjustment amount up to 45 mm, the more
optimised driving position can be adjusted. The
pump type seat height adjustment lever has been
adopted for convenient use.
• For the driver's seat, 4 WAY power seat has been
adopted for better convenience. <Vehicles with
power seat>
• The driver's seat and passenger's seat have
seatback pockets for better convenience.
• The frontal and rear-end collision protection seat
structure (backward layout of seatback frame and
optimisation of headrestraint position) has been
adopted to enhance safety during a collision at
lower vehicle speed. The cross frame has been
installed below the seat cushion to reduce the forward travel distance of the passengers during a
frontal collision and has enhance safety.
• Glared fabric has been newly developed based
on fine and high-quality fabric has been adopted,
thus offering tailor-made smoothness.
• Lateral holding of the seatback has been
improved.
• The head restraints is in height than the predecessor, thus enhancing safety.
• The heated seat switch is relocated from the seat
to the front floor console, thus improving ease of
operation. <Vehicles with heated seats>
SECOND SEAT
M2520005000353
Reclining
adjustment
Dual-action
folding structure
Cup holder
<Dual-action folding structure>
: ISO-FIX child seat fixing bar positions
: Tether anchorage positions
ACC00464AB
The second seats offer the following features.
52A-6
• The dual-action folding mechanism of the second
seat allows to flip up the seat cushion and then
fold the seatback with easy operation. Due to
this, a lowered flat cargo space can be achieved
without any compromise to seating comfort.
• Reclining adjustment mechanisms have been
adopted to improve comfort.
• Armrests with a cup holder have been installed to
improve convenience.
INTERIOR
SEAT
• Headrestraints have been installed to the second
seats.
• The ISO-FIX child seat fixing bar is installed as
standard on the outer seats, and the tether
anchorage on outer seats, improving the versatility of child seat installation.
• The structure of the second seat frame has been
optimised and the centre seat belt retractor is
mounted on the roof, thus reducing its weight.
INTERIOR
SEAT BELT
52A-7
SEAT BELT
M2520010001277
Seat belt warning lamp
Seat belt warning lamp
(passenger's side)
Seat belt retractor
ELR 3-point seat belt
incorporated in seat
ELR 3-point seat belt (RH/LH)
ELR 3-point seat belt (RH/LH)
Seat belt retractor
with a pre-tensioner
and force limiter
(driver's side)
Seat belt retractor
(RH/LH)
Seat belt retractor
with a pre-tensioner
and force limiter (passenger's side)
ACB05996 AD
The seat belts offer the following features:
<Front seat belt>
• The 3-point seat belt with ELR has been adopted
together with a pre-tensioner and force limiter.
INTERIOR
52A-8
TRIMS
• A seat belt warning lamp has been included on
the combination meter to encourage the driver to
fasten the seat belt when the belt is not connected.
• A seat belt warning light has been included on
the centre panel to encourage the passenger to
fasten the seat belt when the belt is not connected.
<Second seat belt>
• 3-point seat belt with ELR has been installed.
• The seat belt tongue can be inserted into the
buckle easily as the self-standing buckles are
used for all seating positions.
TRIMS
INTERIOR TRIM
M2520012000883
Quarter trim upper
Upper centre pillar trim
Quarter trim
cover
Front pillar trim
Cowl side trim
Rear end trim
Rear scuff plate
Lower centre pillar trim
Lower quarter trim
Front scuff plate
ACB05046AB
• The interior trim is a full trim to improve quality.
• The collision energy absorbing structure that is
integrated with a trim has been adopted to the pillar trim. With the structure that reduces head injuries upon the secondary impact against the cabin
during a collision, the safety has been improved.
• Material codes are shown on trim to facilitate
recycling.
INTERIOR
52A-9
TRIMS
DOOR TRIM
M2520012300828
<Rear door trim>
<Front door trim>
Armrest
Armrest
Door pocket
Door pocket
Bottle holder
ACB05049 AB
The door trims offer the following features.
• Break-proof resin material has been used for trim
panels, improving safety.
• Bottle holders which can store a 500-ml plastic
bottle have been installed to the front door trim
and rear door trim to improve convenience. Also,
the bottle holding capability has been improved to
accommodate bottles with shapes that are difficult to keep upright.
• Door pockets have been installed to the front and
rear door trim panels. The front door pockets
have a large capacity that can hold A4-size
maps.
• For the armrests, the energy absorbing structure
has been adopted which reduces the mid section
injuries to passengers by collapsing. Also, with
one-piece forming of the cloth with a soft layer
added, the quality has been improved.
• Soft pads are attached to the front door trim
upper panels.
• Two types of decoration panels on the instrument
panel passenger side and the front door trim provide a continuous appearance. A luxurious but
moderate wood decoration panel is available for
high grade models. Carbon silver decoration
panel underlining sporty appearance quality
• To prevent your fingers from being slipped off
during door closing, the pull handle recess has
been modified.
• To accommodate various types of bottles, the
bottle holders are larger but clear in design.
INTERIOR
52A-10
LUGGAGE ROOM
LUGGAGE ROOM
M2520013000422
Tonneau cover
Rear side box
Luggage floor board
Luggage floor board
Luggage floor box
ACC00099AB
• The rear side box has been equipped to improve
usability.
• Luggage floor box has been equipped to the luggage room floor to improve usability.
• Adding a luggage floor box allows virtually flat
flooring from the second seat to the rear end. The
customer can load and unload even long object
much easier.
• The luggage floor box is approx. 100 cm long,
approx. 100 cm wide and approx. 15 cm deep
(total capacity: approx. 68 litre). It can accommodate the tonneau cover or a flat tyre repair kit
tidily by partitions.
• The luggage floor board is divided into two pieces
via hinges. This structure allows the driver to gain
access to the luggage floor box by opening a
respective separate lid only even when large
object is being stowed.
• The rear side box between the quarter trim and
the luggage floor box is useful for stowing a small
object. The customer can accommodate soft
objects such as plastic bags in the rear side box.
Furthermore, the customer can take out them
easily as the box has no lid.
INTERIOR
52A-11
HEADLINING
HEADLINING
M2520014000663
Headlining
ACB05042AB
Interior design with safe material has been adopted,
achieving more safe and comfortable interior.
• Headlining which absorbs and dissolves chemical substances has been adopted. This headlining efficiently absorbs and dissolves a smoking
smell, a life-smell, and formaldehyde*.
• Chemical substances such as formaldehyde and
organic solvent generated from the interior parts
have been minimised by the refined material and
method, improving amenity.
NOTE: *: Clear and colourless, toxic, irritating odour
52B-1
GROUP 52B
SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT
SYSTEM (SRS)
CONTENTS
GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . .
SYSTEM OPERATION. . . . . . . . . . . .
52B-2
52B-7
SIDE-AIRBAG MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
52B-10
CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE. . . . . . . . . . .
52B-10
FRONT IMPACT SENSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . .
52B-11
DUAL STAGE AIR BAGS AND SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SIDE IMPACT SENSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
52B-11
52B-7
SEAT BELT WITH PRE-TENSIONER. . . . .
52B-11
SIDE AND CURTAIN AIR BAGS . . . . . . . .
52B-8
PASSENGER'S AIR BAG CUT OFF SWITCH
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52B-12
SYSTEM CONSTRUCTION . . . . . . . .
DRIVER'S AIR BAG MODULE . . . . . . . . . .
52B-8
52B-8
PASSENGER'S (FRONT) AIR BAG MODULE
......................................
52B-9
KNEE AIR BAG MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . .
52B-9
PASSENGER'S AIR BAG ON/OFF INDICATOR LAMP
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52B-13
SRS-ECU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
52B-13
SRS AIR BAG SPECIAL CONNECTOR . . .
52B-14
52B-2
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)
GENERAL INFORMATION
GENERAL INFORMATION
M2521000102031
• To provide a better safety upon impact, the
driver's and front passenger's air bags have been
installed to all vehicles as standard. Furthermore,
the driver's SRS knee airbag, the SRS side airbags or the SRS curtain airbags have been
installed as standard or optional equipment
depending on model type.
• The SRS* air bag is a system that is effective with
the seat belt fastened, and it is designed as a
supplemental system of the seat belt.
• The driver's and front passenger's SRS air bag
are activated when an impact exceeding the
threshold is applied upon a frontal collision, and
the cushion air bag is instantaneously inflated to
protect the head and chest areas of the front seat
passengers.
• The passenger’s air bag cut off switch which can
enable and disable the passenger’s (front) air
bag has been equipped in the instrument panel of
passenger’s side.
• The side-airbag is activated when an impact
exceeds the threshold upon a side collision, and
the cushion air bag is instantaneously inflated to
protect the chest area of the front seat passengers.
• The curtain air bag is activated simultaneously
with the side-airbag upon a side collision to protect the heads of the front seat and second seat
passengers.
• For the inflator, the gas which is harmless to the
human body has been adopted.
• The seat belt pre-tensioner is activated simultaneously with the deployment of driver's and passenger's (front) air bags in case of a frontal
collision. Seat belts are pulled in to eliminate the
slack upon a collision, thus improving the initial
occupant restraint, and reducing the travel distance of the occupants. For the driver's seat, in
addition to the seat belt pre-tensioner for the
shoulder side, the lap pre-tensioner has been
installed on the outer seat belt lower anchor side
in order to improve the restraining performance
around the waist in addition to the chest area.
CAUTION
Do not disassemble the SRS air bag components
or seat belt with pre-tensioner. Also, do not apply
an impact.
NOTE: *: SRS (Supplemental Restraint System)
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)
52B-3
GENERAL INFORMATION
CONSTRUCTION DIAGRAM
<Standard meter>
<High contrast meter>
SRS warning lamp
ACB05440
SRS warning lamp
ACB05441
Passenger's (front)
air bag module
Driver's air bag module
Clock spring
Passenger's air bag ON indicator lamp
Passenger's air bag OFF indicator lamp
Passenger's air bag
cut off switch
ACB05561
SRS-ECU
ACB05560
Knee air bag module
Curtain air bag module
Side-airbag module
Seat belt
pre-tensioner
Side impact sensor
Front impact sensor
ACB05423
Seat belt
pre-tensioner
ACC00250 AB
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)
52B-4
GENERAL INFORMATION
CAUTION LABELS
The labels indicating the precautions for handling and maintenance of SRS air bags and seat belt with
pre-tensioner are attached to the locations shown in the figure. If the label is damaged or is dirty, replace with
the new label.
Driver's air bag module
Passenger's (front) air bag module
ACB05535
ACB03681
Sunvisor
Side-airbag module (right and left)
SRS-ECU
ACB05614
Seat belt pre-tensioner (right and left)
Curtain air bag module (right and left)
ACC00035
AC506241
ACB05525
Passenger's air bag cut off switch
Knee air bag module
ACB05536
ACB05526
ACC00073AB
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)
52B-5
GENERAL INFORMATION
SRS SYSTEM CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
Ignition switch (IG1) Fusible link
IG1
relay
SRS-ECU
OFF
ON
No.
16
7.5A
ETACS-ECU
17
Front impact sensor (LH)
22
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
Passenger's (front)
air bag module
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
Side-airbag module (LH)
OFF
Clock spring
ON
OFF
Driver's air bag module
*
ON
OFF
ON
*
Side-airbag module (RH)
ON
OFF
Lap pre-tensioner
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
Seat belt pre-tensioner
(Driver's side)
ON
OFF
Seat belt pre-tensioner
(Passenger's side)
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
Curtain air bag module
(LH)
Curtain air bag module
(RH)
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
*
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
*
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
*
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
*
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
*
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
*
ON
OFF
*
ON
OFF
*
*
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
Note
* : Connector lock switch
Connector connected: ON
Connector disconnected: OFF
6
5
8
27
18
Front impact sensor (RH)
28
41
7
Side impact sensor (LH)
42
40
39
64
56
65
Side impact sensor (RH)
57
23
Diagnosis connector
35
Diagnosis connector
34
55
29
30
54
CAN bus
line
Combination meter
(SRS warning lamp)
31
32
36
13
Air bag OFF indicator lamp
15
Air bag ON indicator lamp
37
25
60
Passenger's air bag
cut off switch
26
59
17
SRS-ECU Connector
ACB05977 AB
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)
52B-6
GENERAL INFORMATION
Number in system
circuit diagram
Circuit name
Universal harness
Wire size and
colour
1
Driver’s knee air bag (squib) (-)
L
2
Driver’s knee air bag (squib) (+)
R
5
Driver's air bag squib (-)
GR
6
Driver's air bag squib (+)
W-B
7
Passenger's (front) air bag squib (+)
P
8
Passenger's (front) air bag squib (-)
LG
13
Passenger’s air bag OFF indicator lamp
V
15
Passenger's air bag ON indicator lamp
BR
17
Left-side front impact sensor (+)
W
18
Right-side front impact sensor (+)
G
22
Ignition switch (IG1) power supply (fuse No. 16)
Y
23
Diagnosis connector
B-W
24
Earth
B
25
Passenger's air bag cut off switch (-)
B-L
26
Passenger's air bag cut off switch (+)
GR-G
27
Left-side front impact sensor (-)
R
28
Right-side front impact sensor (-)
Y
29
CAN-C_L
L
30
CAN-C_H
G
31
Passenger's seat belt pre-tensioner squib (+)
W-B
32
Passenger's seat belt pre-tensioner squib (-)
B-W
34
Passenger's seat belt lap pre-tensioner squib (-)
G
35
Passenger's seat belt lap pre-tensioner squib (+)
R
36
Left-side curtain air bag squib (+)
Y
37
Left-side curtain air bag squib (-)
BR
39
Left-side side-airbag squib (-)
P
40
Left-side side-airbag squib (+)
V
41
Left-side side impact sensor (+)
W
42
Left-side side impact sensor (-)
B
54
Driver's seat belt pre-tensioner squib (-)
Y
55
Driver's seat belt pre-tensioner squib (+)
BR
56
Right-side side-airbag squib (+)
L
57
Right-side side-airbag squib (-)
GR
59
Right-side curtain air bag squib (-)
G
60
Right-side curtain air bag squib (+)
R
64
Right-side side impact sensor (-)
P
65
Right-side side impact sensor (+)
V
NOTE: For how to read the harness wire diameter and wire colour, refer to the Electrical Wiring Diagram.
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)
52B-7
SYSTEM OPERATION
SYSTEM OPERATION
DUAL STAGE AIR BAGS AND SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER
M2521000700781
Front impact
sensor (LH)
Front impact
sensor (RH)
Air bags
Frontal collision against
another vehicle
Shock
above a
certain
level
or
Frontal collision against a
solid surface
SRS-ECU
G-sensor (Front air bag)
Ignition judgment
Ignition signal
Seat belt pre-tensioner
Passenger's air bag
cut off switch
Passenger's air bag
OFF indicator lamp
ACC00043AB
SRS-ECU uses data of the front impact sensor (in engine compartment) and G-sensor (in SRS-ECU) to calculate collision severity during frontal collision. SRS-ECU judges necessity of air bag based on the calculated
collision severity. In addition, the SRS-ECU also judges the operation of seat belt pre-tensioner after calculating collision severity. Alternatively, when the passenger’s air bag cut off switch is set to the air bag off position,
the SRS-ECU illuminates the passenger’s air bag OFF indicator lamp by disabling the deployment of passenger’s (front) air bag.
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)
52B-8
SYSTEM CONSTRUCTION
SIDE AND CURTAIN AIR BAGS
M2521000800573
Side-airbag modules
Side impact
sensor (RH)
Side impact against another
vehicle
Side impact
sensor (LH)
Shock
above a
certain
level
Ignition signal
Ignition judgment
G-sensor (Side-airbag,
curtain air bag)
AC802080
SRS-ECU
Curtain air bag modules
ACB05593
ACC00075AB
SRS-ECU uses data of the side impact sensor and
G-sensor (in SRS-ECU) to calculate collision severity, during side collision. SRS-ECU judges necessity
of side-airbag and curtain air bag based on the calculated collision severity.
SYSTEM CONSTRUCTION
DRIVER'S AIR BAG MODULE
M2521002000766
For items other than below, refer to GROUP 37 Steering Wheel .
Inflator
Squib
connectors
ACB03701AC
It incorporates an SRS airbag to protect the driver in
the event of a frontal collision.
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)
52B-9
SYSTEM CONSTRUCTION
The airbag module is equipped with an inflator that
does not contain sodium azide.
The air bag is made of nylon and is inflated by the
gas from the inflator. Then, as the air bag contacts
the passenger, the gas is discharged through two
openings of backside of air bag, thus deflating the air
bag to reduce the impact on the passenger.
PASSENGER'S (FRONT) AIR BAG MODULE
M2521003000628
Passenger's (front)
air bag module
Squib
connectors
Inflator
ACB05537
ACB05622
ACC00265 AB
The passenger’s (front) air bag module consists of
an air bag, and their fasteners.
The air bag is made from nylon and inflates by the
gas from the inflator. As a passenger is being
pressed to the air bag, it deflates, discharging gas
from two vents at the side of the air bag to reduce the
shock from the impact.
For the inflator, the gas which is harmless to the
human body has been used.
KNEE AIR BAG MODULE
M2521002600177
Section A – A
Inflator
Cover
A
Air bag
A
ACB05596
Knee air bag module
ACB05623
ACC00159AB
The knee air bag module consists of a cover, an air
bag, an inflator, and the fixing gear relating to those
parts, and is installed under the steering column.
Like the driver's and front passenger's air bags, the
knee air bag is inflated upon a frontal collision for
better protection of the driver.
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)
52B-10
SYSTEM CONSTRUCTION
For the inflator, the gas which is harmless to the
human body has been used.
SIDE-AIRBAG MODULE
M2521004000557
Air bag module
AC801674
ACC00074 AB
The side-airbag module consists of an air bag, air
bag cover, inflator and their fasteners. The modules
are installed in the outer side supports of the driver’s
and front passenger’s seatbacks. The side-airbags
help protect the occupants regardless of the seat
position and seatback angle.
The air bags are compactly folded and stored under
the cover. On the side of the air bag, there are holes
through which gas is partially released to alleviate
shock to the occupant when the air bag is deployed.
For the inflator, the gas which is harmless to the
human body has been used.
CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE
M2521000500431
Curtain air bag module
Inflator
ACB05422
ACC00251AB
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)
52B-11
SYSTEM CONSTRUCTION
The curtain air bag module consists of an air bag, an
inflator, and the fixing gear relating to those parts,
and is installed in the roof side sections (from the
driver's and the passenger's front pillars to the rear
pillars).
An inflator that does not contain sodium azide is
used.
• SRS-ECU performs the diagnostics of the front
impact sensor internal components. If a malfunction occurs, it sets the diagnosis code.
SIDE IMPACT SENSOR
M2521006000575
Side impact
sensor
FRONT IMPACT SENSOR
M2521005000646
Headlamp support
panel upper
Front seat belt
ACB05524AB
• The side impact sensors are installed to the lower
part of the centre pillars on both sides, and the
analogue G-sensor is housed in the side impact
sensor.
• The front impact sensor transmits the coded
acceleration data to SRS-ECU. Based on the
data, SRS-ECU determines the deployment of
the side-airbags and curtain air bags, then energises appropriate squib(s).
• SRS-ECU performs the diagnostics of the side
impact sensor internal components. If a malfunction occurs, it sets the diagnosis code.
Front impact
sensor
ACB05523AB
• The front impact sensor is installed on the headlamp support panel upper in the engine room,
and the analogue G-sensor is housed in the front
impact sensor.
• The front impact sensor transmits the coded
acceleration data to SRS-ECU. Based on the
data, SRS-ECU determines the deployment
stage of the front air bag, then energises appropriate squib.
SEAT BELT WITH PRE-TENSIONER
M2521008000786
Gas generator
Ball
Pipe
Seat belt pre-tensioner
ACC00046
ACC00081
Pinion
Ring gear
Spool
ACC00504
ACC00505
ACC00555 AB
52B-12
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)
SYSTEM CONSTRUCTION
The seat belt incorporating the pretensioner automatically winds the seatbelt upon front impact to
reduce forward shifting of the passenger.
The seat belt pre-tensioner ignites the gas generator
and emits gas with the electric current supplied from
SRS-ECU. The gas pressure shifts the ball in the
pipe and the balls comes in contact with the protrusion of the ring gear, which is inserted in the ring
gear and then interlocked with the pinion is inserted
in the ring gear The ring gear rotation forces the pinion to turn the spool toward the belt wind direction to
wind the belt.
PASSENGER'S AIR BAG CUT OFF SWITCH
M2521001700278
Instrument panel
Passenger's air bag
cut OFF switch
Front view
ACB05631
ACB05632
ACC00118 AB
Passenger’s air bag cut off switch is located in the
instrument panel passenger’s side. The passenger’s
air bag cut off switch can be used to disable the passenger's (front) air bag.
• To turn an air bag off, follow these steps:
1. Insert the ignition key into the key opening of
the appropriate air bag cut off switch, and turn
that air bag cut off switch to the "OFF" position.
2. Remove the key from the key opening of that
air bag cut off switch.
3. Insert the key into the ignition switch, and turn
the ignition to "ON" position.
• To turn an air bag on, follow these steps:
1. Insert the key into the key opening of the
appropriate air bag cut off switch, and turn
that air bag cut off switch to "ON" position.
2. Remove the key from the key opening of that
air bag cut off switch.
3. Insert the key into the ignition switch, and turn
the ignition to "ON" position.
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)
52B-13
SYSTEM CONSTRUCTION
PASSENGER'S AIR BAG ON/OFF INDICATOR LAMP
M2521001600196
Passenger's air bag
OFF indicator lamp
Hazard indicator assembly
Passenger's air bag
ON indicator lamp
ACB05034
ACB05561
ACC00116AB
The passenger’s air bag ON/OFF indicator lamp is
installed in centre air outlet.
When passenger’s air bag cut off switch is turned
OFF, the indicator will stay on to show that the passenger’s (front) air bag is not operational.
When passenger’s air bag cut off switch is turned
ON, the indicator goes off to show that the passenger’s (front) air bag is operational.
SRS-ECU
M2521007001054
In addition to the analogue G-sensor and safing
G-sensor for the frontal collision, the SRS-ECU
incorporates the analogue G-sensor and safing
G-sensor for the side collision. Upon a frontal collision, when the impact G is simultaneously detected
by the front impact sensor in the engine room, analogue G-sensor, and safing G-sensor for the frontal
collision in SRS-ECU, SRS-ECU outputs the ignition
signal to the driver's and passenger's (front) air bag
modules (squibs).
Upon a side collision, when the lateral impact G is
simultaneously detected by the analogue G-sensor
of side impact sensor and the safing G-sensor for
side collision in SRS-ECU, the SRS-ECU outputs the
ignition signal to the side-airbag module (squib) and
the curtain air bag module (squib) of the relevant
side that is subjected to the impact.
Also, SRS-ECU has the following functions that
improve the system reliability.
• Power supply back-up function (back-up condenser) in preparation for the power supply malfunction upon a collision
• Booster function (DC-DC converter) in preparation for the battery voltage drop
• Diagnosis function that performs a system check
DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION
To improve the system reliability, SRS-ECU performs
the diagnostics of each part. If a malfunction is
detected, it lights up the SRS warning lamp, and
stores the contents as the corresponding diagnosis
code. Also, to facilitate the system check, it has the
following functions, and the check can be performed
using M.U.T.-III.
• Diagnosis code set
• Service data output
• Actuator test
DIAGNOSIS CODE SET
SRS-ECU performs a self-diagnosis on the following
items. If a malfunction is detected, its content (diagnosis code) is stored in the involatile memory (EEPROM*). Therefore, the diagnosis code will not be
erased even when the battery terminal is disconnected. The diagnosis code can be erased using
M.U.T.-III.
NOTE: .
• *: EEPROM (Electrical Erasable & Programmable
Read Only Memory): ROM that can be programmed or erased electrically
• For each diagnosis item, refer to Workshop Manual.
DATA LIST OUTPUT
Using M.U.T.-III, the service data can be read.
NOTE: For service data items, refer to Workshop
Manual.
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)
52B-14
SYSTEM CONSTRUCTION
ACTUATOR TEST
Using M.U.T.-III, the actuator can be forcibly operated. For the actuator test specification, refer to
Workshop Manual.
SRS AIR BAG SPECIAL CONNECTOR
M2521009001027
A
A
A
Curtain air bag module (RH)
A
Side-airbag module (RH)
A
A
Seat belt pre-tensioner (RH)
Passenger's (front) air bag module
Clock spring
SRS-ECU
Driver's air bag module
Seat belt pre-tensioner (LH)
A
A
Lap pre-tensioner
A
Side-airbag module (LH)
Curtain air bag module (LH)
A
A
A
AC607646 AI
To enhance the system reliability, a connector short
circuiting mechanism is integrated in the SRS-ECU
connector, air bag module connectors, clock spring
connector, and pre-tensioner connectors (black connector "A" shown in the figure).
CONNECTOR SHORT-CIRCUIT MECHANISM
SRS-ECU connector
Wiring harness-side connector
Wiring harness-side connector
(terminal to short-circuit)
Short spring
Partition panel
Connector connected
Terminal to short-circuit
Partition panel
(SRS-ECU-side
connector)
Short spring
(wiring harness-side
connector)
AC507316 AB
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)
SYSTEM CONSTRUCTION
This mechanism prevents the improper deployment
of air bag module because of the current application
to the squib due to the static electricity when connectors between SRS-ECU and air bag modules
(squibs) are disconnected. When the connector is
disconnected, the short spring short circuits the (+)
and (-) of squibs, and prevents the static electricity
from generating the potential difference. This connector mechanism is adopted for the following connectors.
52B-15
• SRS-ECU connector
• Connector between the clock spring and
body-side wiring harness
• Each air bag module connector
• Intermediate connector between curtain air bag
module and SRS-ECU
54-1
GROUP 54
CHASSIS
ELECTRICAL
CONTENTS
CHASSIS ELECTRICAL
LOCAL INTERCONNECT NETWORK (LIN)
CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK (CAN)
54A-1
GROUP 54A
CHASSIS
ELECTRICAL
CONTENTS
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . .
GENERAL INFORMATION. . . . . . . . . . . . .
54A-2
GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . .
54A-29
54A-2
AUDIO AND NAVIGATION SYSTEM. 54A-30
BATTERY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GENERAL INFORMATION. . . . . . . . . . . . .
LIGHTING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EXTERIOR LAMPS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
INTERIOR LAMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
54A-3
GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . .
54A-30
54A-3
RADIO AND CD PLAYER . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
54A-32
54A-3
54A-3
REAR VIEW CAMERA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
54A-9
STEERING WHEEL REMOTE CONTROL SWITCH
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54A-37
FUNCTION AND CONTROL BY ETACS-ECU.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54A-10
CUSTOMISATION FUNCTION. . . . . . . . . .
COMBINATION METER . . . . . . . . . .
GENERAL INFORMATION. . . . . . . . . . . . .
54A-16
54A-17
54A-17
MULTI-INFORMATION DISPLAY <STANDARD
METER> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
54A-19
MULTI INFORMATION DISPLAY <HIGH CONTRAST
METER> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
54A-21
BUZZER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
54A-36
USB ADAPTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
54A-38
HANDS-FREE INTERFACE SYSTEM . . . .
54A-38
SPEAKER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
54A-38
ANTENNA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
54A-39
ROCKFORD FOSGATE PREMIUM SOUND SYSTEM
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54A-39
GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . .
54A-39
AUDIO AMPLIFIER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
54A-40
SPEAKER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
54A-41
54A-24
REVERSING SENSOR (CORNER SENSOR
AND BACK SENSOR) . . . . . . . . . . . . 54A-26
GENERAL INFORMATION. . . . . . . . . . . . .
MITSUBISHI MULTI COMMUNICATION SYSTEM
(MMCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54A-34
IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM <Vehicles without
keyless operation system>. . . . . . . . 54A-42
GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . .
54A-42
54A-26
ETACS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54A-44
ACCESSORY SOCKET . . . . . . . . . . . 54A-29
GENERAL INFORMATION. . . . . . . . . . . . .
COLUMN SWITCH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
54A-29
54A-29
GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . .
54A-44
FUNCTION AND CONTROL BY ETACS-ECU.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54A-45
CUSTOMISATION FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . .
54A-45
CHASSIS ELECTRICAL
54A-2
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM
GENERAL INFORMATION
M2544100200739
For improved serviceability, a diagnosis connecter
for inspection of M.U.T.-III is built into the instrument
panel, near the position of the driver's left foot.
System name
Diagnosis Output of Actuator
code set
service
test
data
Erasure of
diagnosis
code by the
M.U.T.-III
Freeze
frame
data
Special
function
Coding
MPI
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
CVT
•
•
−
•
•
•
−
Electric power
steering (EPS)
•
•
•
•
•
•
−
ABS, ASC
•
•
•
•
•
•
−
SRS air bag
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Air conditioner
•
•
•
•
•
•
−
ETACS ECU
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
KOS
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
IMMO/Keyless
•
•
−
•
•
•
•
Combination
meter
•
•
•
•
•
•
−
Steering angle
sensor
−
−
−
−
−
•
−
ETG
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
4WD
•
•
−
•
•
•
−
OSS
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
NOTE: .
1. •: Indicates that the diagnosis function is set.
2. −: Indicates that the diagnosis function is not set.
Diagnosis connector
Terminal
No.
Connecting contents
DIAGNOSIS CONNECTOR
1
Diagnosis control
2, 3
−
4
Earth
5
Earth
6
CAN communication line (CAN_H)
7, 8
MPI
9 to 13
−
14
CAN communication line (CAN_L)
15
−
16
Battery power supply
Diagnosis connector
ACB05016AB
CHASSIS ELECTRICAL
54A-3
BATTERY
BATTERY
GENERAL INFORMATION
M2544200200833
Item
75D23L
Voltage V
12
Capacity (5-hour rate) Ah
52
Electrolytic fluid specific gravity (fully charged state at 20°C)
1.220 to 1.290
LIGHTING
EXTERIOR LAMPS
M2544300301119
Construction diagram
<Halogen type headlamp assembly>
Side turn-signal lamp
(Door mirror type)
Front turn-signal lamp
Low-beam
Side turn-signal lamp
(Fender panel type)
High-beam
Position lamp
<Discharge type headlamp assembly>
Front turn-signal lamp
Front fog lamp
High-beam
Low-beam
Position lamp
ACC00151AB
CHASSIS ELECTRICAL
54A-4
LIGHTING
High-mounted stop lamp
Licence plate lamp
Rear fog lamp, Reflector
Stop/tail lamp
Rear
turn-signal
lamp
Back-up lamp, Reflector
Rear
combination
lamp
ACC00150AB
• There are two types of headlamp assemblies:
halogen type and discharge type (optional for
2.4L model).
• The headlamp assembly employs the four-lamp
integrated with the headlamp (low-beam), headlamp (high-beam), front turn-signal lamp, and
position lamp.
• The newly adopted discharge headlamp for low
beam provides a much better view than ordinary
halogen lamps. <Vehicles with discharge type
headlamp>
• Switching of the high-beam and low-beam illumination of the discharge type headlamp is controlled by moving the lightproof board in the projector
unit according to the signal from the column
switch (lighting switch).
• For the low-beam of the headlamp, the headlamp
manual levelling system <Vehicles with halogen
type headlamp> (Refer to P.54A-5.) and the
headlamp automatic levelling system <Vehicles
with discharge type headlamp> (Refer to
P.54A-6.) have been adopted so that the height
adjustment of the optical axis can be performed
depending on the vehicle load status.
• The fog lamp have been installed to above the
front bumper.
• The rear fog lamp and back-up lamp have been
installed to the rear bumper.
• Two types of the side turn-signal lamp have been
established: the one attached to the fender panel
and the one integrated into the door mirror.
• The rear combination lamp are integrated with
the stop/tail lamp and rear turn-signal lamp.
• The LED-type high-mounted stop lamp have
been integrated into the tailgate.
• The licence plate lamp have been installed to
above the licence plate.
• The lighting system is provided with headlamp
automatic-shutdown function, auto lamp function,
welcome light function and coming home light
function (Refer to P.54A-10).
• For the flasher timer function of turn-signal lamp,
the comfort flasher function has been adopted to
improve the operability when changing the lane.
When the turn-signal lamp switch (lighting switch)
is operated for a short time, this function flashes
the turn-signal lamp of the operated direction
three times (Refer to P.54A-10).
Specifications
Item
Headlamp assembly <Vehicles with
halogen type headlamp>
High-beam W
60 (HB3)
Low-beam W
55 (H7)
Position lamp W
5 (W5W)
Front turn-signal lamp W
21 (PY21W)
CHASSIS ELECTRICAL
54A-5
LIGHTING
Item
Headlamp assembly <Vehicles with
discharge type headlamp>
Front fog lamp
High-beam W
60 (HB3)
Low-beam W
35 (D4S)
Position lamp W
5 (W5W)
Front turn-signal lamp W
21 (PY21W)
Front fog lamp W
55 (H11)
Rear fog lamp W
21 (W21W)
Back-up lamp W
21 (W21W)
Side turn-signal lamp
Rear combination lamp
High-mounted stop lamp
Fender panel type W
5
Door mirror type
LED type
Stop/tail W
21 (P21/5W)
Rear turn-signal W
21 (PY21W)
Integrated in tailgate spoiler
LED type
Licence plate lamp W
5 (W5W)
NOTE: The brackets ( ) show the bulb type.
Headlamp manual levelling system
The beam direction of the headlamps changes
according to the number of passengers and the
amount of load. The headlamp manual levelling function is a system that allows the driver to change the
direction of headlamp beam so that the drivers of
oncoming cars are not dazzled by the headlamps.
The headlamp levelling switch allows changing the
direction in five steps: 0 to 4.
Headlamp levelling
switch
ACC00006AB
Relationship between the switch positions and the number of passengers/loads
5-seating
Passenger and load
AC607611
Switch position
AC607612
AC607613
AC607614
One or two
passengers
Five passengers
Five passengers
and heavy loads
Driver and heavy
loads
0
1
2 or 3
4
NOTE: Each switch position is for reference. In each switch position, when the headlamp beam is too high,
turn the switch to one-level higher position.
CHASSIS ELECTRICAL
54A-6
LIGHTING
Operation
AC302836
Fuse
Headlamp
levelling
unit (LH)
Headlamp
levelling
unit (RH)
Variable resistor
B
Motor
drive
circuit
Variable resistor
Voltage
comparison
circuit
CPU
A
B
Motor
drive
circuit
Voltage
comparison
circuit
CPU
Headlamp
levelling
switch
1
23
ILL
0
4
A
AC314086AB
1. The headlamp levelling switch increases the
resistance as it is turned from 0 to 4. Turning the
headlamp levelling switch changes the voltage at
point A. When the headlamp levelling switch is
turned from 0 to 4, the voltage at point A
decreases. Upon detection of this voltage change,
the headlamp levelling unit turns the motor to
lower the beam direction. At this time, the
resistance of the variable resistor in the headlamp
assembly changes, and the voltage at point B
decreases gradually. When the voltages at points
A and B become equal, the headlamp levelling
unit stops the motor.
2. Turning the headlamp levelling switch from 4 to 0
increases the voltage at point A, and then the
headlamp levelling unit turns the motor in the
direction opposite to that mentioned in Item 1,
increasing the voltage at point B. When the
voltages at points A and B become equal, the
headlamp levelling unit stops the motor.
3. The headlamp levelling unit detects voltage
changes caused by headlamp levelling switch
operation, and turns the motor to change the
directions of the headlamp reflectors for the
adjustment of the headlamp beam direction.
Headlamp automatic levelling system
The beam direction of the headlamps (vertical angle)
changes according to the number of passengers and
the amount of load. The headlamp automatic levelling system is a system that automatically controls
the beam direction of headlamps (up and down
angle) when parking or travelling with stable vehicle
attitude so that the drivers of oncoming cars and of
cars driving in front are not dazzled by the headlamp
beam that is directed upwards.
Operational Description
The beam direction of headlamps is automatically
controlled according to driving conditions as
described in the table below.
CHASSIS ELECTRICAL
54A-7
LIGHTING
Vehicle condition
Control content
When parking
When the engine is stopped with the headlamp (low-beam) ON or
when the vehicle is stopped with the headlamp (low-beam) ON and
the accelerator pedal is released, the ETACS-ECU controls the beam
direction according to the height sensor values of the change in load
resulting from getting on/off of passengers or loading/unloading of
loads.
When driving at a constant speed
When a vehicle starts on curb, the travelling vehicle posture changes
from the posture during parking, so that the beam direction changes.
To control the improper beam direction caused by such vehicle
attitude change, the ETACS-ECU controls the beam direction while
travelling with stable vehicle attitude. This beam direction control
while travelling with stable vehicle attitude is performed only once
between a vehicle stop and the next stop. When driving is started on a
gravel or rough road, the beam direction control is activated after the
vehicle attitude becomes stable on a paved road.
System component and function
ETACS-ECU
Rear height
sensor
ACB04436
ACB04414
Front height
sensor
ACB04435
Headlamp assembly
(integrating headlamp
automatic levelling motor)
ACC00005AB
Parts name
Functional description
Ignition switch
Supplies power to the ETACS-ECU when the ignition switch is in
the ON position.
Height sensor (front)
Detects the elongation/contraction of the front suspension and
transmits the signal to the ETACS-ECU.
54A-8
CHASSIS ELECTRICAL
LIGHTING
Parts name
Functional description
Height sensor (rear)
Detects the elongation/contraction of the rear suspension and
transmits the signal to the ETACS-ECU.
Headlamp assembly (integrating
headlamp automatic levelling motor)
Drives the headlamp reflector by receiving signals from the
ETACS-ECU.
Combination meter
Send an odometer indication value to the ETACS-ECU.
ABS-ECU or ASC-ECU
Transfers the vehicle travel distance information to the
ETACS-ECU.
Engine-ECU
Transfers engine speed signals and accelerator pedal position
signals to the ETACS-ECU.
ETACS-ECU
• Transfers lighting switch position signals, all door switch
ON/OFF signals, tailgate latch switch ON/OFF signals,
hazard warning lamp switch ON/OFF signals, headlamp
(low-beam) ON/OFF status signals.
• Controls the headlamp automatic levelling motor integrated in
the headlamp assembly based on the signals form switches
and sensors to control the beam direction according to the
vehicle posture.
Diagnosis connector
Outputs diagnosis codes.
System block diagram
Ignition switch (IG1)
Engine-ECU
Headlamp assembly (LH)
(integrating headlamp
automatic levelling motor)
(CAN-C
communication)
ETACS-ECU
ABS-ECU or
ASC-ECU
Headlamp assembly (RH)
(integrating headlamp
automatic levelling motor)
Height sensor (front)
Diagnosis connector
Height sensor (rear)
(CAN-C-Mid
communication)
Combination meter
ACB05989AB
CHASSIS ELECTRICAL
54A-9
LIGHTING
INTERIOR LAMP
M2544300400812
CONSTRUCTION DIAGRAM
Front room lamp
(map and room lamp)
Rear room lamp
Luggage compartment lamp
Downlight
ACB05572
Ignition key cylinder
illumination lamp
ACB05571
Glove box lamp
Vanity mirror lamp
ACB05573
ACC00330AB
• A front room lamp, installed to the front part of the
roof, has been equipped with the lens-push type
map & room lamp which can be operated easily
from the driver's and front passenger's seat,
offering an excellent operability for turning on and
off the lamp.
• The front room lamp incorporates a downlight.
• The rear room lamp which illuminates the rear
passenger's seat is installed to above the second
seat.
• The luggage room lamp which illuminates the
luggage room is installed to the upper part of the
luggage room.
• A glove box lamp has been added to the glove
box.
• A ignition key cylinder illumination lamp has been
added to the ignition key cylinder. <Vehicles without KOS>
• The vanity mirror lamps have been installed on
the sun visors of driver's and front passenger's
seats.
• The interior lamp dimmer control function, interior
lamp automatic-shutoff function and ignition key
cylinder illumination lamp control function have
been adopted for the interior lamp (Refer to Function and Control by ETACS-ECU P.54A-10).
CHASSIS ELECTRICAL
54A-10
LIGHTING
Specifications
Item
Specification
Front room lamp (map and room lamp) W × quantity
8×2
Downlight
LED type
rear room lamp W
8
Luggage compartment lamp W
8
Glove box lamp W
1.4
Ignition key cylinder illumination lamp W <Vehicles without KOS>
1.4
Vanity mirror lamp W
2
FUNCTION AND CONTROL BY ETACS-ECU.
M2544300600979
Following functions are controlled by ETACS-ECU.
Function
Headlamp
Flasher timer function
Fog lamp
Function
description
Headlamp automatic-shutdown function
P.54A-11
Auto lamp function <vehicles with lighting control sensor>
P.54A-11
Welcome light function
P.54A-12
Coming home light function
P.54A-12
Turn-signal lamp
P.54A-12
Comfort flasher function
P.54A-12
Hazard warning lamp
P.54A-12
Front fog lamp function
Rear fog lamp function
Interior lamp
Interior lamp dimmer control function
P.54A-14
Interior lamp automatic-shutoff function
P.54A-15
Ignition key cylinder illumination lamp control function
P.54A-15
CHASSIS ELECTRICAL
54A-11
LIGHTING
HEADLAMP
HEADLAMP AUTOMATIC-SHUTDOWN FUNCTION (INITIAL CONDITION: WITH
FUNCTION)
ON
Ignition switch (IG)
OFF
Driver's
door switch
(Open) ON
(Closed) OFF
Headlamp
Lighting switch
Tail lamp
OFF
Tail lamp output
Headlamp output
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
3 minutes
Even when the lighting switch (tail lamp switch or
headlamp switch) is ON, the headlamp (including the
tail lamps) turns off automatically with any of the following conditions to prevent the battery discharge
caused by unattended operation.
• If the ignition switch is turned OFF with the lighting switch ON, the lamp turns off automatically
after 3 minutes. If the driver's door is opened during the 3 minutes, the lamp turns off after 1 second.
• If the lighting switch is turned to the tail lamp position or headlamp position from OFF with the ignition switch OFF, the lamps do not turn off
automatically.
NOTE: This function can be cancelled through customisation (Refer to Customisation Function
P.54A-16).
AUTO LAMP FUNCTION (INITIAL
CONDITION: ILLUMINATES IN
STANDARD AMBIENT BRIGHTNESS)
<vehicles with lighting control sensor>
Lighting control sensor
(rain sensor)
Interior mirror
Lighting control
sensor
(lamp sensor)
AC703843AC
1 second
AC606266 AB
• Auto lamp function automatically turns ON/OFF
the headlamp and tail lamp according to the signal from the lighting control sensor (lamp sensor)
attached to the windshield when the lighting
switch is in the AUTO position.
• The lamp sensor and the rain sensor are incorporated into the lighting control sensor. The lamp
sensor is used for the auto lamp function, and the
rain sensor for the rain sensitive wiper function *.
NOTE: *: For the rain sensitive wiper function, refer
to GROUP 51, Windshield Wiper and Washer .
• The lighting control sensor (lamp sensor) detects
the front and surrounding brightness of the vehicle. With this detection, it is judged that the vehicle enters a tunnel or just drives under a bridge.
When it is judged that the vehicle drives through
a tunnel, the headlamp and tail lamp are automatically turned ON. When it is judged that the
vehicle drives under a bridge, the headlamp and
tail lamp are not turned ON automatically. When
the vehicle surroundings get dark in case such as
evening, the headlamp and tail lamp are automatically turned ON.
• The timing that the headlamp and tail lamp are
automatically turned ON when the vehicle surroundings get dark in case such as evening can
be adjusted by the customisation function. (Refer
to Customisation Function P.54A-16.)
CHASSIS ELECTRICAL
54A-12
LIGHTING
WELCOME LIGHT FUNCTION (INITIAL
CONDITION: TAIL LAMP ILLUMINATES)
When the lighting switch is in the OFF or AUTO position, unlock operation by the keyless entry system
lights up the tail lamp or headlamp. The lighting control sensor operates at nighttimes only.
NOTE: Using the customisation function, it is possible to adjust that either the tail lamp or headlamp
lights up. For more information about the customisation function feature, refer to P.54A-16.
COMING HOME LIGHT FUNCTION
(INITIAL CONDITION: 30 SECONDS)
When the ignition switch is in the LOCK (OFF) position, passing operation lights up the headlamp for a
certain period.
NOTE: Using the customisation function, the illumination time can be adjusted to 15 seconds, 30 seconds, 60 seconds, or 180 seconds. For more
information about the customisation function feature,
refer to P.54A-16.
FLASHER TIMER FUNCTION
TURN-SIGNAL LAMP (INITIAL CONDITION: TURN SIGNAL LAMP CAN BE
OPERATED WHEN THE IGNITION
SWITCH IS IN THE ON POSITION)
Ignition
switch (IG)
Turn-signal lamp
switch RH
Turn-signal lamp
switch LH
Turn-signal lamp
output RH
Turn-signal lamp
output LH
COMFORT FLASHER FUNCTION (INITIAL
CONDITION: WITH FUNCTION)
Ignition
switch (IG)
Turn-signal lamp ON
switch RH
OFF
OFF
ON
Turn-signal lamp ON
output LH
OFF
t: 0.4 seconds or less
OFF
ON
AC311800AE
With the ignition switch in the ON position, when the
turn signal switch is turned ON momentarily (0.4 second or less), ETACS-ECU turns ON the turn signal
lamp output, and flashes the turn signal lamp three
times.
NOTE: Using the customisation function, "with function/without function" of the comfort flasher function
and the switch acceptance time can be set. For more
information about the customisation function. (Refer
to Customisation Function P.54A-16).
HAZARD WARNING LAMP
Turn signal
lamp output
LH
OFF
ON
t
Turn-signal lamp ON
output RH
OFF
Turn signal
lamp output
RH
OFF
ON
t
Turn-signal lamp ON
switch LH
OFF
Hazard lamp
switch
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
AC101509AH
OFF
AC101508AG
When the turn-signal lamp switch is ON (LH or RH)
with the ignition switch is ON, the turn-signal lamp
output (flash signal) is turned ON.
If the lamp bulb of the front or rear turn-signal lamp
has burned out, the flashing speed becomes faster to
alert the driver that the lamp bulb has burned out.
NOTE: Using a customisation function, this function
becomes available even when the ignition switch is
in the ACC position. For more information about the
customisation feature. (Refer to Customisation Function P.54A-16).
ETACS-ECU detects the signal that changes the
hazard lamp switch from OFF to ON, and reverses
the flashing state by the signal (to the flashing state
when the hazard lamp is not flashing, and to the
turned OFF state when flashing).
NOTE: .
1. The push-return switch has been adopted for the
hazard lamp switch.
2. Even if the lamp bulb has burned out, the flashing
speed of the hazard lamp is not changed.
CHASSIS ELECTRICAL
LIGHTING
54A-13
FOG LAMP
FRONT FOG LAMP FUNCTION
Headlamp
Lighting switch
Tail lamp
OFF
ON
Neutral
Fog lamp switch
OFF
Headlamp automatic shutdown
output
Front fog lamps
(Switched off) ON
(Illuminated) OFF
Illuminated
Extinguished
AC804207AB
When the fog lamp switch is turned to ON with the
tail lamp or the headlamp lit (the tail lamp switch or
the headlamp switch is ON), the front fog lamp relay
turns ON, and the front fog lamps turn on.
If the tail lamp or the headlamp is turned off with the
lighting switch OFF while the front fog lamps lit, the
front fog lamps turn off the same time to prevent
unattended operation.
If the tail lamp is turned off by the headlamp automatic-shutdown function, the front fog lamps turn off
at the same time. However, if the tail lamps turn on
again, the front fog lamps do not.
REAR FOG LAMP FUNCTION
Headlamp
Lighting switch
Tail lamp
OFF
ON
Fog lamp switch
Neutral
OFF
Front fog lamps
Illuminated
Extinguished
Illuminated
Rear fog lamp
Extinguished
AC804208 AB
If the fog lamp switch is turned ON while the front fog
lamp is ON, the rear fog lamp illuminates. The rear
fog lamp is switched ON or OFF by turning on or off
the fog lamp switch.
If the tail lamp is turned OFF, the front fog lamp and
the rear fog lamp are turned OFF at the same time.
CHASSIS ELECTRICAL
54A-14
LIGHTING
INTERIOR LAMP
INTERIOR LAMP DIMMER CONTROL FUNCTION (INITIAL CONDITION: 15 SECONDS)
ON
ACC
Ignition switch
OFF
Key removed
Door switch
(Any one open) ON
(All closed) OFF
(Lock) ON
Driver's door lock
actuator switch (lock switch) (Unlock) OFF
LOCK
Keyless entry
lock or unlock signal
OFF
UNLOCK
100%
50%
Interior lamp brightness
0%
15 seconds
15 seconds
AC607916AB
When the interior lamp switch is on the door position,
ETACS-ECU controls the interior lamp as follows.
1. When the ignition switch is OFF:
By opening any door or tailgate, the lamp turns ON
(100%), and dims (50%) when the door or tailgate is closed, then and turns off after 15 seconds.
However, when the ignition switch is turned ON or
the door lock is operated, the lamps turn off at
that time.
2. When the ignition switch is ON:
By opening any door or tailgate, the lamp (100%)
turns ON and OFF when the door or tailgate is
closed.
3. When all doors and the tailgate are closed, and
the ignition key is removed*:
With all the doors closed, when the ignition key is
removed, the lamp turns ON (100%) after approximately 1 second (after the engine is stopped),
and then gradually dims down to OFF after 15
seconds.
By inserting the ignition key again or operating the
door lock with the lamp lit, the lamps turns off.
NOTE: .
• *: For the vehicles with KOS, it is operated the
same way when the steering lock is locked or
when the emergency key is removed from the
key cylinder.
• For the vehicles with the keyless entry system,
the delayed lamp-off time and the operation times
of the keyless entry interior lamp answer back
can be changed by the customisation function.
(Refer to Customisation Function P.54A-16)..
CHASSIS ELECTRICAL
54A-15
LIGHTING
INTERIOR LAMP AUTOMATIC-SHUTOFF FUNCTION (INITIAL CONDITION: 30
MINUTES)
ON
Ignition switch
ACC
OFF
Door switch
Interior lamp
(Any one open) ON
(All closed) OFF
(Illuminated) ON
(Extinguished) OFF
T: 30 minutes
t: Within 30 minutes
T
T
t
t
t
AC302243AB
When the interior lamp such as the room lamp [all
interior lamps connecting to the room lamp fuse (the
front room lamp, the rear room lamp, the luggage
compartment lamp, and the ignition key cylinder illumination lamps)] is lit, but either one of the conditions
is met, the interior lamp is turned off automatically for
preventing the battery discharge caused by the unattended operation or the door-ajar.
• After 30 minutes with the interior lamp lit while the
ignition switch is OFF, the lamp turns off automatically.
• After 30 minutes with any door opened while the
ignition switch is OFF, the lamp turns off automatically.
• After the auto-turn OFF, the interior lamp returns
to the illumination state when the doors are
opened/closed, keyless entry transmitter switch
is operated, or ignition switch is turned to ACC
position. After returning, the lamp turns OFF after
30 minutes, when the interior lamp auto turn off
condition is met.
NOTE: The interior lamp automatic shut-off time can
be adjusted by the customisation function. (Refer to
Customisation Function P.54A-16).
IGNITION KEY CYLINDER ILLUMINATION LAMP CONTROL FUNCTION
Ignition switch (IG)
ON
OFF
(Key removed) ON
Key reminder switch
(Key inserted) OFF
(Opened) ON
Driver's seat door switch
(Closed) OFF
LOCK
Driver's seat door
UNLOCK
Ignition key cylinder
illumination lamp output
(Illuminated) ON
(Extinguished) OFF
T: 30 seconds
T
The ETACS-ECU controls the ignition key cylinder
illumination lamp as described below.
• With the ignition switch OFF, the lamp is illuminated when the driver's door is opened, and it is
turned off 30 seconds after the driver's door is
closed. However, the lamp is turned off if the ignition switch is turned ON or doors are locked
within 30 seconds.
T
T
T
AC710753 AC
• When the ignition key is removed from the ignition key cylinder, the lamp illuminates for 30 seconds after approximately 1 second (after the
engine is stopped).*
NOTE: *: For the vehicles with KOS, it is operated
the same way when the steering lock is locked or
when the emergency key is removed from the key
cylinder.
CHASSIS ELECTRICAL
54A-16
LIGHTING
CUSTOMISATION FUNCTION
M2544300700880
By operating the M.U.T.-III ETACS system, the following functions can be customised. The programmed information is held even when the battery
is disconnected.
Adjustment
Adjustment item
Adjusting content
item (M.U.T.-III
(M.U.T.-III display)
display)
Turn power
source
ACC or IG1
Operable with ACC or ON position
IG1
Operable with ON position (initial
condition)
Comfort flasher With/without
comfort flasher
function
Disable
No function
Enable
With function (initial condition)
Comfort flasher Switch operation
switch time
time to activate the
comfort flasher
function
Normal
0.4 second (initial condition)
Long
0.8 second
Hazard answer
back
Lock:1, Unlock:2
LOCK: Flashes once, UNLOCK: Flashes
twice (initial condition)
Lock:1, Unlock:0
LOCK: Flashes once, UNLOCK: No flash
Lock:0, Unlock:2
LOCK: No flash, UNLOCK: Flash twice
Lock:2, Unlock:1
LOCK: Flash twice, UNLOCK: Flash once
Lock:2, Unlock:0
LOCK: Flash twice, UNLOCK: No flash
Lock:0, Unlock:1
LOCK: No flash, UNLOCK: Flash once
Lock:0, Unlock:0
No function
Level 1 bright
High ambient brightness
Level 2 bright
Standard ambient brightness (initial
condition)
Level 3
Low ambient brightness
Level 4 dark
Low-low ambient brightness
0 sec
0 second (no delay shutdown time)
7.5 sec
7.5 seconds
15 sec
15 seconds (initial condition)
30 sec
30 seconds
60 sec
60 seconds
120 sec
120 seconds
180 sec
180 seconds
Sensitivity for
auto lamp
Adjustment of
turn-signal lamp
operation condition
Adjusting content
Adjustment of the
number of keyless
hazard warning
lamp answer back
flashes
Lighting control
sensor sensitivity
(illumination
intensity) <vehicles
with lighting control
sensor>
Room lamp
Adjustment of
delay timer with interior lamp delay
door
shutdown time
Head lamp auto Adjustment of
Disable
cut customise
headlamp
Enable (B-spec.)
automatic shutdown
function
No function
With function (initial condition)
CHASSIS ELECTRICAL
COMBINATION METER
54A-17
Adjustment
item (M.U.T.-III
display)
Adjustment item
Adjusting content
(M.U.T.-III display)
Adjusting content
Interior lamp
auto cut timer
Adjustment of
interior lamp
automatic shutdown
function operation
time
Disable
No function
3 min
3 minutes
30 min
30 minutes (initial condition)
60 min
60 minutes
Disabling or
enabling coming
home light function
Disabled
No function
15 sec
The headlamps illuminate for 15 seconds.
30sec
The headlamps illuminate for 30 seconds.
(initial condition)
60 sec
The headlamps illuminate for 60 seconds.
180 sec
The headlamps illuminate for 180 seconds.
Disabled
No function
Small lamp
The tail lamps illuminate. <initial condition>
Head lamp
The headlamps illuminate.
Coming home
light
Welcome light
Disabling or
enabling welcome
light function
COMBINATION METER
GENERAL INFORMATION
M2545500201067
There are two types of the combination meter; standard meter and high contrast meter. A speedometer is
located at the right, a liquid crystal display at the centre lower part, a tachometer at the left, and a meter
information switch <Standard meter> or rheostat illumination switch <High contrast meter> at the right
lower part. The combination meter has the following
features:
Standard meter
• A segment-type LCD is adopted. For details refer
to P.54A-19.
High contrast meter
• A colour liquid crystal display has been adopted.
For details refer to P.54A-21.
• A navigation indicator has been adopted. <Vehicles with MMCS>
• A meter information switch is located in the
instrument panel.
CHASSIS ELECTRICAL
54A-18
COMBINATION METER
CONSTRUCTION DIAGRAM
<Standard meter>
3
5
4
6
8
7
9
2
10
1
23
Speedometer
Tachometer
11
12
Meter information
switch
13
22
21
18, 19
20
17
Multi-information display
15
16
14
ACB05440AB
<High contrast meter>
1
2
4
3
5
6
Speedometer
Tachometer
Meter information switch
7
14
8
13
Multi-information display
12
11
10
ACB05980
Rheostat illumination
switch
9
ACB05441
ACB06027 AB
Standard meter
1. Position lamp indicator lamp
2. Front fog lamp indicator lamp
3. Turn-signal lamp indicator/hazard warning indicator lamp (LH side)
4. Door-ajar warning lamp
5. Immobilizer/electric steering lock warning lamp
6. Keyless operation system indicator lamp
7. Electric power steering system warning lamp
8. Turn-signal lamp indicator/hazard warning indicator lamp (RH side)
9. Rear fog lamp indicator lamp
10. High-beam indicator lamp
11. Brake warning lamp
12. Supplemental restraint system warning lamp
13. Driver’s seat belt warning lamp
14. Check engine warning lamp
15. Active stability control system OFF indicator lamp
16. Anti-skid braking system warning lamp
17. Active stability control system ON indicator lamp
18. 4WD-ECO indicator lamp
CHASSIS ELECTRICAL
54A-19
COMBINATION METER
19. 4WD-lock indicator lamp
20. Coolant temperature warning lamp
21. Oil pressure warning lamp
22. Charging warning lamp
23. Cruise control system indicator lamp
10. Check engine warning lamp
11. Anti-skid braking system warning lamp
12. Active stability control system OFF indicator lamp
13. Active stability control system ON indicator lamp
14. Charging warning lamp
High contrast meter
1. Position lamp indicator lamp
2. Front fog lamp indicator lamp
3. Turn-signal lamp indicator/hazard warning indicator lamp (LH side)
4. Turn-signal lamp indicator/hazard warning indicator lamp (RH side)
5. Rear fog lamp indicator lamp
6. High-beam indicator lamp
7. Brake warning lamp
8. Driver’s seat belt warning lamp
9. Supplemental restraint system warning lamp
MULTI-INFORMATION DISPLAY
<STANDARD METER>
M2545500500515
In the multi-information display, the followings are
displayed; "Odometer", "TRIP A", "TRIP B", "Meter
illumination control", "Driving range", "Average fuel
consumption", "Outside temperature and frost warning", "Service reminder*".
NOTE: .
• *: Is not displayed during driving.
METER ILLUMINATION CONTROL
The brightness of the combination meter can be
adjusted in eight stages (LEVEL 1 to LEVEL 8) by
pushing the meter information switch when the meter
is illuminated. Current illumination level will be displayed each time the meter information switch is
pushed. The illumination level can be changed by
operating the meter information switch according to
specified procedure *. The brightness of each brightness level is as described in the table below.
NOTE: The brightness can be set separately for the
daytime and nighttime. The configured information is
stored in the RAM. In the initial setting of brightness,
the daytime is set at LEVEL 8 and the nighttime is
set at LEVEL 7.
Current brightness level
Display
Brightness level
Level 7, 8
Level 5, 6
Level 3, 4
Level 1, 2
ACB06035AB
BRIGHTNESS LEVEL TABLE
Brightness
level
Dial brightness
Pointer brightness
LCD display brightness
Day
Night
Day
Night
Day
Night
LEVEL 8
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
35%
LEVEL 7
90%
58.8%
90%
58.8%
90%
19%
LEVEL 6
81%
34.3%
81%
34.3%
81%
10.4%
LEVEL 5
71%
20.3%
71%
20.3%
71%
5.5%
LEVEL 4
61%
11.8%
61%
11.8%
61%
3.1%
CHASSIS ELECTRICAL
54A-20
COMBINATION METER
Brightness
level
Dial brightness
Pointer brightness
LCD display brightness
Day
Night
Day
Night
Day
Night
LEVEL 3
51%
6.8%
51%
6.8%
51%
1.6%
LEVEL 2
42%
3.8%
42%
3.8%
42%
0.7%
LEVEL 1
32%
2.3%
32%
2.3%
32%
0.3%
DRIVING RANGE DISPLAY
Change unit for trip computer
Possible cruising
distance
ACB06037AB
Calculates current driving range possible on the
remaining fuel and displays it on the multi-information display.
NOTE: Possible driving range displayed is only for
guide.
AVERAGE FUEL CONSUMPTION DISPLAY
Auto reset mode
Average fuel consumption
ACB06041AB
A long press of the meter information switch will
change unit displayed while the average fuel consumption is displayed.
OUTSIDE TEMPERATURE AND FROST
WARNING
Frost warning indicator
Outside temperature
ACB06040AB
Calculates average fuel consumption since the last
reset and displays it on the multi-information display.
Informs the driver how the road condition is. While
the frost warning is being triggered, the buzzer will
sound and the indicator will illuminate or flash to alert
the driver.
RESET MODE
Change unit for outside temperature
Manual reset mode
ACB06038AB
There are two reset modes; manual reset mode and
auto reset mode. In the manual reset mode, the
driver can reset it at any time by operating the meter
information switch. In the auto reset mode, the calculation will be reset without operating the meter information switch when four hours elapse since the last
ignition switch turning off.
ACB06042AB
CHASSIS ELECTRICAL
54A-21
COMBINATION METER
Displayed unit (Celsius and Fahrenheit) can be
switched over by pressing and holding the meter
information switch while the outside temperature and
frost warning screen is being displayed.
When the inspection interval (alert start point in table
below) is due in accordance with the predetermined
schedule (see table below), the service reminder
indicator will be displayed when the ignition switch is
turned to the ON position. However, even if the warning condition is met, the indicator does not display
immediately. It illuminates next time when the ignition
switch is turned ON. The impending inspection interval can be displayed by changing the LCD section by
the meter information switch. The service reminder
indicator will go off when it is reset by operating the
meter information switch according to the specified
procedure *, or the warning criteria (end point) shown
in the table below is satisfied.
NOTE: .
• *: For details about the meter information switch
special operation, refer to the Workshop Manual.
SERVICE REMINDER
Service reminder indicator
ACB06039AB
SCHEDULE TABLE
Schedule
Warning type
Warning criteria
Normal
Elapsed time (month)
Every 12 elapsed months
Driving distance (miles)
Every 12,500 miles of driving distance
Driving distance (km)
Every 20,000 km of driving distance
WARNING CRITERIA (WARNING START AND END POINTS)
Elapsed time
Driving distance (km)
Driving distance (miles)
Warning start
point
Warning end
point
Warning start
point
Warning end
point
Warning start
point
Warning end
point
−15 days
+15 days
− 500 km
+500 km
− 300 miles
+300 miles
MULTI INFORMATION DISPLAY <HIGH
CONTRAST METER>
M2545500500496
In the multi-information display, followings are displayed; "Drive mode indicator", "Caution mark",
"Cruise control", "TRIP A", "TRIP B", "Meter illumination control", "Driving range", "Average fuel consumption", "Average speed/Instant fuel
consumption", "Service reminder*", "Function setting*", "Selector lever position", "Engine coolant temperature", "Fuel remaining", "Odometer", "Outside
temperature". Displayed contents can be switched
by operating the meter information switch.
NOTE: .
• *: Is not displayed during driving.
CHASSIS ELECTRICAL
54A-22
COMBINATION METER
When the ignition switch is LOCK (OFF), ACC position
1
When the ignition switch is ON position
6
5
7
2
8
SET
9
10
3
12
11
4
13
14
ACB06043AB
WHEN THE IGNITION SWITCH IS IN THE LOCK (OFF) POSITION (DISPLAYED WHEN A DOOR IS OPEN
OR THE MULTI INFORMATION METER SWITCH IS OPERATED.)
Item
Content
1
Caution mark display
screen
It indicates when some warnings have occurred or existence of warning
on background. Except for frost warning and service interval indication.
2
Information screen/interrupt
display screen
• When the meter information switch is operated, the displayed
information contents are changed in the following order.
1. TRIP A (To reset the trip meter, press and hold the switch.)
2. TRIP B (To reset the trip meter, press and hold the switch.)
3. Service reminder (When service reminder function is enabled.)
4. Warning screen display (When a warning is present.)
• An interrupt display of appropriate contents is performed when a
warning is issued.
3
Door-ajar warning display
screen
Displays the door or tailgate that is open.
4
Odometer display screen
Displays the odometer.
WHEN THE IGNITION SWITCH IS ON POSITION
Item
Content
5
Drive mode indicator
display screen
Displays which driving mode is selected.
6
Caution mark display
screen
It indicates when some warnings have occurred or existence of warning
on background. Except for frost warning and service interval indication.
7
Cruise control symbol
display screen
Displayed when the cruise control system is on.
8
Cruise control status
display screen
Displays a cruise control system status.
CHASSIS ELECTRICAL
54A-23
COMBINATION METER
Item
Content
9
Information screen/interrupt
display screen
• When the meter information switch is operated, the displayed
information contents are changed in the following order.
1. Trip meter (A) (To reset the trip meter, press and hold the switch.)
2. Trip meter (B) (To reset the trip meter, press and hold the switch.)
3. Driving range
4. Average fuel consumption (To reset the average fuel consumption,
press and hold the switch.)
5. Average speed/Instant fuel consumption (To reset the average
speed/Instant fuel consumption, press and hold the switch.)
6. Service reminder (When service reminder function is enabled.)
7. Function setting screen (Appears when the vehicle is stopped, the
selector lever is in the "P" position, and the parking brake is ON) (To
display the setting screen, press and hold the switch.)
8. Warning screen display (When a warning is present.)
• An interrupt display of appropriate contents is performed when a
warning is issued.
10
Selector lever position
display screen
Displays the selector lever position.
11
Engine coolant temperature Displays the engine coolant temperature.
display screen
12
Fuel remaining display
screen
Displays the remaining fuel amount.
13
Odometer display screen
Displays the odometer.
14
Outside temperature
display screen
Displays the ambient temperature.
METER ILLUMINATION CONTROL
The brightness of the combination meter can be
adjusted in eight stages (LEVEL 1 to LEVEL 8) by
pushing the rheostat illumination switch when the
meter is illuminated. Current illumination level will be
displayed each time the rheostat illumination switch
is pushed. The illumination level can be changed by
operating the rheostat illumination switch according
to specified procedure *. The brightness of each
brightness level is as described in the table below.
NOTE: The brightness can be set separately for the
daytime and nighttime. The configured information is
stored in the RAM. In the initial setting of brightness,
the daytime is set at LEVEL 8 and the nighttime is
set at LEVEL 7.
BRIGHTNESS LEVEL TABLE
Brightness
level
Dial brightness
Pointer brightness
LCD display brightness
Day
Night
Day
Night
Day
Night
LEVEL 8
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
LEVEL 7
90%
22.3%
90%
22.3%
90%
19%
LEVEL 6
81%
10.9%
81%
10.9%
81%
9.3%
LEVEL 5
71%
5.3%
71%
5.3%
71%
4.6%
LEVEL 4
61%
2.5%
61%
2.5%
61%
2.3%
LEVEL 3
51%
1.2%
51%
1.2%
51%
1.1%
LEVEL 2
42%
0.5%
42%
0.5%
42%
0.6%
CHASSIS ELECTRICAL
54A-24
COMBINATION METER
Brightness
level
Dial brightness
Pointer brightness
LCD display brightness
Day
Night
Day
Night
Day
Night
LEVEL 1
32%
0.2%
32%
0.2%
32%
0.3%
SERVICE REMINDER FUNCTION
the meter information switch. The service reminder
indicator will go off when it is reset by operating the
meter information switch according to the specified
procedure *, or the warning criteria (end point) shown
in the table below is satisfied.
NOTE: *: For details about the meter information
switch special operation, refer to the Workshop Manual.
When the inspection interval (alert start point in table
below) is due in accordance with the predetermined
schedule (see table below), the service reminder
indicator will be displayed when the ignition switch is
turned to the ON position. However, even if the warning condition is met, the indicator does not display
immediately. It illuminates next time when the ignition
switch is turned ON. The impending inspection interval can be displayed by changing the LCD section by
SCHEDULE TABLE
Schedule
Warning type
Warning criteria
Normal
Elapsed time (month)
Every 12 elapsed months
Driving distance (miles)
Every 12,500 miles of driving distance
Driving distance (km)
Every 20,000 km of driving distance
WARNING CRITERIA (WARNING START AND END POINTS)
Elapsed time
Driving distance (km)
Driving distance (miles)
Warning start
point
Warning end
point
Warning start
point
Warning end
point
Warning start
point
Warning end
point
−30 days
+30 days
− 500 km
+500 km
− 300 miles
+300 miles
BUZZER
M2545500600396
Using its own signal or signal sent via CAN communication, the combination meter sounds the integrated buzzer.
Item
Relating ECU
Seat belt reminder function
Combination meter
Electric steering wheel lock malfunction warning buzzer (vehicles with
OSS)
OSS
OSS-related malfunction warning buzzer (vehicles with OSS)
OSS
Engine switch reminder buzzer (vehicles with OSS)
OSS
A/T shift cancel buzzer
CVT-ECU
Paddle shift cancel prohibition buzzer <Vehicles with paddle shift>
Lamp reminder buzzer function
ETACS-ECU
Keyless operation key reminder buzzer (vehicles with KOS)
KOS
Door-ajar warning buzzer function
ETACS-ECU
Freeze warning buzzer
Combination meter
Parking brake reminder buzzer function
Combination meter
Multi-information display interrupt display buzzer
Combination meter
CHASSIS ELECTRICAL
54A-25
COMBINATION METER
Item
Relating ECU
ETACS-ECU function customisation buzzer
ETACS-ECU
A/C operation buzzer
A/C-ECU
Audio operation buzzer
Radio and CD player,
Multivision display
Meter information switch or rheostat illumination switch <High contrast
meter> operation buzzer
Combination meter
Turn-signal lamp buzzer function
ETACS-ECU
Rest reminder buzzer
Combination meter
SEAT BELT REMINDER FUNCTION
When the driver's seat belt is released
1. When the ignition switch is turned ON, the
driver's seat belt indicator illuminates and the
buzzer sounds for 6 seconds.
2. 60 seconds after the ignition switch is turned ON,
if the vehicle speed exceeds 8 km/h, the driver's
seat belt indicator illuminates and blinks for 90
seconds. The buzzer sounds simultaneously with
the blinks of the indicator.
3. On Step 2 completion, if the seat belt is not fastened when the vehicle speed changes from 3
km/h to 8 km/h, the indicator illuminates and
blinks again and the buzzer sounds again.
When the front passenger's seat belt is released
• Control is the same as when the driver's seat belt
is not fastened.
ELECTRIC STEERING WHEEL LOCK
WARNING BUZZER (VEHICLES WITH
OSS)
A buzzer will sound when the steering wheel lock is
not activated/deactivated normally.
OSS-RELATED MALFUNCTION
WARNING BUZZER (VEHICLES WITH
OSS)
A/T SHIFT CANCEL BUZZER/PADDLE
SHIFT CANCEL PROHIBITION BUZZER
<VEHICLES WITH PADDLE SHIFT>
The buzzer sounds when the shift change on the
transmission side is not made although the downshift
operation is performed with the selector lever or paddle shift.
LAMP REMINDER BUZZER FUNCTION
With the ignition switch in the LOCK (OFF) position,
when the driver's door is opened with the tail lamp
switch remaining ON, the buzzer sounds.
KEYLESS OPERATION KEY REMINDER
BUZZER (VEHICLES WITH KOS)
With the ignition switch in the LOCK (OFF) position,
when the driver's door is opened with the keyless
operation key left in the vehicle, the buzzer sounds.
DOOR-AJAR WARNING BUZZER
FUNCTION
With the ignition switch in the ON position, when any
of the doors (including the tailgate) is open and the
vehicle speed information sent via the CAN communication is 8 km/h or more, the buzzer sounds.
FREEZE WARNING BUZZER
A buzzer will sound when an error occurs in the
OSS-ECU power supply system.
When the ignition switch is in the ON position, if the
ambient temperature is at 3°C or below, the buzzer
sounds.
ENGINE SWITCH REMINDER BUZZER
(VEHICLES WITH OSS)
PARKING BRAKE REMINDER BUZZER
FUNCTION
With the engine switch in the ON position, when the
driver's door is opened, the buzzer sounds.
With the ignition switch in the ON position, if the
parking brake has not been reset (parking brake
switch: ON), and when the vehicle speed information
transmitted via CAN communication is 8 km/h or
more, the buzzer sounds.
54A-26
CHASSIS ELECTRICAL
REVERSING SENSOR (CORNER SENSOR AND BACK SENSOR)
MULTI-INFORMATION DISPLAY
INTERRUPT DISPLAY BUZZER
When the interrupt display is displayed on the
multi-information display because of alarms, the
buzzer sounds.
ETACS-ECU FUNCTION CUSTOMIZATION
BUZZER
METER INFORMATION SWITCH OR
RHEOSTAT ILLUMINATION SWITCH
<HIGH CONTRAST METER> OPERATION
BUZZER
When the meter information switch or rheostat illumination switch <High contrast meter> is operated, the
buzzer sounds.
When entering into the customize mode of
ETACS-ECU functions or when the customisation is
executed, the buzzer sounds in each case.
TURN-SIGNAL LAMP BUZZER FUNCTION
A/C OPERATION BUZZER, AUDIO
OPERATION BUZZER
REST REMINDER BUZZER
According to the buzzer sounding request signal
which is received when the A/C, radio and CD player,
CD changer or audio visual navigation unit is operated, the buzzer sounds.
The buzzer sounds in synchronisation with the turn
signal lamp operation.
When the time to take a rest which was set on the
multi-information display is reached, the buzzer
sounds.
REVERSING SENSOR (CORNER SENSOR AND BACK
SENSOR)
GENERAL INFORMATION
M2545200200353
The ultrasonic sensors installed on the rear corner
bumper and rear bumper detect obstacles at the
vehicle corners. These sensors have been adopted
to inform the driver of the obstacle distance from the
vehicle using the buzzer in corner sensor/back sensor-ECU, and to improve the safety and vehicle drivability during driving the vehicle into a garage and
parking in a narrow space.
Back sensor
Rear corner sensor
ACC00225AB
CAUTION
When the illuminated licence plate is installed, the sensors may not operate because of noise from
the plate.Refer to FAIL-SAFE FUNCTION (1)
Approx. 100 cm (MAX 150cm)
Back sensor detection range
Corner sensor detection range
Approx.
60 cm
Back sensor detection range
Approx. 50 cm
• Automatically active system by select reverse
position
Corner sensor detection range
AC808517AB
CHASSIS ELECTRICAL
54A-27
REVERSING SENSOR (CORNER SENSOR AND BACK SENSOR)
• Depending on whether the vehicle is equipped
with a towing bar, you can change sensors
between the standard mode and the towing bar
mode. The towing bar mode changes the system
to exclude in the area in which the towing bar is
mounted from the detection areas.
NOTE: The detection range of the sensor varies with temperature and humidity. Obstacles below the bumpers or a curbstone not taller than the sensor position may be hard to be detected.
OPERATION
ACTIVATION/DEACTIVATION OF REVERSING SENSOR SYSTEM
By shifting the gear to the reverse position and operating the sonar switch (corner sensor switch), the
system can be turned ON (reversing sensor indicator: ON) and OFF (reversing sensor indicator: OFF).
Sonar switch (Corner sensor switch)
ACC00007AB
THE TOWING BAR MODE SWITCHING
By operating the sonar switch (corner sensor switch),
"TOWING BAR MODE" and "STANDARD MODE"
can be changed.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position.
2. Move the shift lever or selector lever to the "R"
(reverse) position.
3. Turn off the reversing sensor system by operating
the sonar switch (corner sensor switch).(Reversing sensor indicator: OFF)
4. Press and hold the sonar switch (corner sensor
switch) for approximately 5 seconds.
5. The buzzer* sounds and the mode is switched
between "TOWING BAR MODE" and "STANDARD MODE".
NOTE: *: Sounds twice when the mode is switched
to "TOWING BAR MODE". Sounds once when the
mode is switched to "STANDARD MODE".
BUZZER DURATION
The buzzer sound of the corner sensor/back sensors
is the same. The buzzer in the corner sensor/back
sensor-ECU sounds based on the closer alarm cycle
having a higher priority.
BACK SENSOR
Distance
Buzzer duration
between
The standard mode
back
sensor and
obstacles
Less than
approximat
ely 40 cm
The towing bar mode
Buzzer: OFF
Buzzer: ON
Buzzer: OFF
Continuity
AC808131AC
Approximat
ely 40 to 60
cm
Buzzer: ON
Buzzer: ON
Buzzer: OFF
Buzzer: OFF
0.1s 0.1s 0.1s 0.1s 0.1s 0.1s 0.1s 0.1s 0.1s
AC808128 AC
Continuity
AC808131AC
CHASSIS ELECTRICAL
54A-28
REVERSING SENSOR (CORNER SENSOR AND BACK SENSOR)
Distance
Buzzer duration
between
The standard mode
back
sensor and
obstacles
Approximat
ely 60 to 80
cm
The towing bar mode
Buzzer: ON
Buzzer: ON
Buzzer: OFF
Buzzer: OFF
0.2s
0.2s
0.2s
0.2s
0.1s 0.1s 0.1s 0.1s 0.1s 0.1s 0.1s 0.1s 0.1s
0.2s
AC808132 AC
Approximat
ely 80 to
100 cm
Buzzer: ON
AC808128 AC
Buzzer: ON
Buzzer: OFF
Buzzer: OFF
0.4s
0.4s
0.4s
0.2s
0.2s
0.2s
Approximat
ely 100 to
120 cm
0.2s
Buzzer: ON
Buzzer: ON
Buzzer: OFF
Buzzer: OFF
0.6s
0.4s
0.6s
0.4s
Buzzer: ON
0.4s
AC808133AC
AC808134AC
Approximat
ely 120 to
150 cm
0.2s
AC808132 AC
AC808133AC
Buzzer: ON
Buzzer: OFF
Buzzer: OFF
0.8s
0.8s
AC808135AC
0.6s
0.6s
AC808134AC
CORNER SENSOR
Distance
Buzzer duration
between
corner
sensor and
obstacles
Less than
approximat
ely 25 cm
Buzzer: ON
Buzzer: OFF
Continuity
AC808131AC
Approximat
ely 25 to 40
cm
Buzzer: ON
Buzzer: OFF
0.1s 0.1s 0.1s 0.1s 0.1s 0.1s 0.1s 0.1s 0.1s
AC808128 AC
Approximat
ely 40 to 50
cm
Buzzer: ON
Buzzer: OFF
0.2s
0.2s
0.2s
0.2s
0.2s
AC808132 AC
FAIL-SAFE FUNCTION
1. When the ultrasonic noise is received, the bass
toned buzzer sound continuously. When the ultrasonic noise stops, the normal operation will be
resumed immediately.
2. When the abnormality such as the open circuit of
a sensor occurs, the sensor turns OFF and the
high toned buzzer sounds for 5 seconds. When
the normal signal is received, the normal state
will be resumed.
CHASSIS ELECTRICAL
54A-29
ACCESSORY SOCKET
3. When an abnormality occurs in the system, the
reversing sensor indicator keeps flashing with
0.8-second interval until the system returns to the
normal condition. However, if the system is
turned OFF by using the switch, the indicator
stops its flashing.
ACCESSORY SOCKET
GENERAL INFORMATION
M2544400200785
<Instrument centre panel>
<Rear floor console>
Accessory socket
Cigarette lighter
ACB05420
ACB05500
ACB06036 AB
• The instrument centre panel is equipped with a
cigarette lighter as standard.
• The rear console contains a plug-in type accessory socket, which is useful when using a accessory device
• The maximum load is 120 W when a single
accessory socket is used.
COLUMN SWITCH
GENERAL INFORMATION
FUNCTION
M2546100200166
Column switch has a function to ensure the driver's
safety upon an impact of frontal collision.
Front of vehicle
Column switch
Collision load
Collision load
Column switch
ACB02479 AB
CHASSIS ELECTRICAL
54A-30
AUDIO AND NAVIGATION SYSTEM
If the column switch moves to the front of the vehicle
and hits the instrument panel or meter bezel due to
the impact of frontal collision, the steering wheel
moves to the front of the vehicle because the right
and left levers fall down, ensuring the driver's safety.
In addition, the column switch is ensured of the rigidity that the levers do not fall down by the normal
operation, but it cannot be reused after deformation
occurrence.
AUDIO AND NAVIGATION SYSTEM
GENERAL INFORMATION
M2547000100563
• For the audio unit (radio and CD player), the following two types have been established: the 1CD
audio as well as the display audio.
• For Mitsubishi Multi Communication System
(MMCS), the multivision display with CD drive
and SD memory card drive is established.
• A rear view camera has been established to the
tailgate.
• On the spoke of steering wheel, the steering
wheel remote control switch has been installed.
• An USB adapter is equipped in the rear console.
• The hands-free interface system has been established.
• For the speaker system, the following two types
have been established: the 6 speakers as well as
the 9 speakers at 7 positions*.
NOTE: *Vehicles with Rockford Fosgate® premium
sound system.
• A roof antenna has been mounted for receiving
radio broadcast.
• The Rockford Fosgate® premium sound system
(audio amplifier and 9 speakers at 7 positions)
has been established.
CHASSIS ELECTRICAL
54A-31
AUDIO AND NAVIGATION SYSTEM
CONSTRUCTION DIAGRAM
GPS antenna
Microphone unit
Radio and CD player or
multivision display (MMCS)
Roof antenna
CAN box
Hands free ECU
USB adapter
ACB05387AB
ACB05387
CHASSIS ELECTRICAL
54A-32
AUDIO AND NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Steering wheel
remote control switch
Audio amplifier
Tweeter
ETACS-ECU
Front door speaker
Rear door speaker
Rear view camera
Subwoofer
ACB05388 AB
RADIO AND CD PLAYER
M2544900400610
For the audio unit, the following two types have been
established: the 1CD audio as well as the display
audio. To have best acoustical characteristics, integrated amplifier is tuned to the acoustic.
1CD audio
• Harmonized face panel design and colour with
around trim parts.
• 2 line bright white letters on VFD (Vacuum Fluorescent Display), umber illumination.
Display audio
• Harmonized face panel design and colour with
around trim parts.
• 6.1 inch QVGA full colour display, with touch
panel, umber illumination.
• Compatible with rear view camera interface.
SPECIFICATIONS
Item
1CD audio
Display audio
FM/MW/LW electronic tuning radio
Equipped
Equipped
RDS function
Equipped
Equipped
CD player, compatible with MP3 format
(CD-R/CD-RW supported)*1
Equipped
−
CHASSIS ELECTRICAL
54A-33
AUDIO AND NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Item
1CD audio
Display audio
CD player, compatible with
MP3/WMA/AAC format (CD-R/CD-RW
supported)*1
−
Equipped
Audio integrated 4 channel power
amplifier
General 140 W
General 140 W
Supports iPod®/portable music
player/USB memory device
(MP3/WMA/AAC compatible)
connection*2
Equipped
Equipped
NOTE: .
• *1: Some MP3/WMA/AAC format and
CD-R/CD-RW may not be played.
• *2: A iPod®/portable music player/USB memory
device (MP3/WMA/AAC compatible) can be connected through the USB connection to play its
stored audio file or charge its battery. Some
devices may not be compatible with the hands
free ECU.
CHASSIS ELECTRICAL
54A-34
AUDIO AND NAVIGATION SYSTEM
SYSTEM BLOCK DIAGRAM
Combination
meter
ETACS-ECU
Radio
antenna
Steering wheel
remote control
switch
Rear view
camera
Image
Sound
Radio and CD player
Speaker
<Vehicles without
hands-free interface system>
Sound
USB
device
USB
adapter
Audio
control
<Vehicles with
hands-free interface system>
Sound
Communication
Sound
USB
device
USB
adapter
BluetoothR device
Hands free ECU
Audio
control
BluetoothR
Sound
Microphone unit
ACC00427
MITSUBISHI MULTI COMMUNICATION
SYSTEM (MMCS)
M2544800100560
For Mitsubishi Multi Communication System
(MMCS), the multivision display (7 inch WVGA display of wide 2 DIN size) with CD drive and SD memory card drive is established.
Two slots of SD memory card available. One uses
map data and software program etc., the other uses
music data (MP3, WMA, etc.) playback.
Lift customer satisfaction point to improve following
items from current model.
Refresh Design
Adopt high-definition screen
• Change WQVGA (480 x 234 dot) display into
WVGA (800 x 480 dot) in the same size. So, supply sharper image.
Change panel and screen design
• Change the name of panel buttons easy to understand.
• Adopt rotary switches to change volume intuitively.
CHASSIS ELECTRICAL
54A-35
AUDIO AND NAVIGATION SYSTEM
• Group each menu easy to understand (Left side:
AV, Right side: Navigation, Under: Setting).
• Create expensive-looking high gross black and
plating on the panel.
Improve Functions
Improve the base feature of MMCS
• Add 3D map view and 3D landmarks
• Add highway (motorway) map
• Add junction view
• Display speed limit
Improve Usability
Add map of new countries
• Add new countries as below.
• Finland
• Baltic States (Latvia, Lithuania, Estonia)
• Belarus
• Moldova
Enhance AV Functions
Display guidance point in the combination meter
• Displaying guidance information displayed in
MMCS in combination meter, confirm guidance
point safety.
Display two screen at a time
• Display map screen and other screen (AV, Information etc.) at a time
SYSTEM BLOCK DIAGRAM
Combination
meter
ETACS-ECU
GPS
antenna
Radio
antenna
CAN box
<Vehicles without Rockford Fosgate R
premium sound system>
Sound
Steering wheel
remote control
switch
Speaker
Multivision display
(MMCS)
Rear view
camera
Image
<Vehicles with Rockford Fosgate R
premium sound system>
Sound
Audio
amplifier
Sound
Speaker
Communication
Sound
Sound
USB
device
USB
adapter
BluetoothR device
Hands free ECU
Audio
control
BluetoothR
Sound
Microphone unit
ACB05488
ETACS FUNCTION CUSTOMISATION
FUNCTION
The ETACS functions can be customised by selecting of the multivision display.
CHASSIS ELECTRICAL
54A-36
AUDIO AND NAVIGATION SYSTEM
REAR VIEW CAMERA
M2544700100187
A rear view camera has been established to the tailgate. The rear view camera displays the rear view
image of the vehicle on the display audio or multivision display for easy confirmation of safety when
driving backward.
Rear view camera
ACB05474 AB
Bottom edge line of direct vision
Display area of rear view camera
ACB05487 AB
CHASSIS ELECTRICAL
54A-37
AUDIO AND NAVIGATION SYSTEM
OPERATION
When the selector lever is moved to the R (reverse)
position with the ignition switch "ON", the image of
the rear view camera is displayed on the display
audio screen or multivision display screen.
Screen display
<Vehicles with display audio>
Displays rear view camera.
Caution message
Approx. 2 m behind the vehicle
Directly check the area around the vehicle.
Approx. 3 m behind the vehicle
Approx. 1 m behind the vehicle
Extended line of
"vehicle width + 0.2 m"
(Displayed in green)
Approx. 0.5 m behind the vehicle
(Displayed in red)
Tailgate
Approx. 0 m behind the vehicle
AC612475 AG
<Vehicles with multivision display>
Approx. 2 m behind the vehicle
Approx. 3 m behind the vehicle
Approx. 1 m behind the vehicle
Extended line of
"vehicle width + 0.2 m"
(Displayed in green)
Approx. 0.5 m behind the vehicle
(Displayed in red)
Tailgate
Approx. 0 m behind the vehicle
Directly check the area around the vehicle.
Caution message
STEERING WHEEL REMOTE CONTROL
SWITCH
M2546500000320
AC612475 AH
On the spoke of steering wheel, the steering wheel
audio remote control switch and steering wheel voice
control switch have been installed.
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO REMOTE
CONTROL SWITCH
Using the steering wheel audio remote control
switch, the volume adjustment of the radio and CD
player and the multivision display, mode changeover,
CD track up/down, and others can be performed.
Steering wheel
audio remote control
switch
Steering wheel
voice control
switch
ACB05490AB
STEERING WHEEL VOICE CONTROL
SWITCH <VEHICLES WITH HANDS-FREE
INTERFACE SYSTEM>
Using the steering wheel voice control switch,
hands-free interface system.
CHASSIS ELECTRICAL
54A-38
AUDIO AND NAVIGATION SYSTEM
USB ADAPTER
M2547100100021
USB adapter
An USB adapter is equipped in the rear console. A
iPod®/portable music player can be connected
through the USB connection to play its stored audio
file on the radio and CD player or the multivision display, or charge its battery.
HANDS-FREE INTERFACE SYSTEM
M2546400300023
The hands-free interface system enables handsfree
talking and playing music by Bluetooth® connection
with Bluetooth® device (mobile phone or music
player). In addition, music can be played by connecting the USB-compatible device to the USB adapter.
ACB05492 AB
CONSTRUCTION DIAGRAM
Microphone unit
(built in front room lamp)
Steering wheel
voice control
switch
ACB05490
AC704935
Hands free ECU
USB adapter
ACB05492
ACB05493 AB
SPEAKER
M2545000100426
6 speakers (tweeter, front door, rear door) are provided.
NOTE: For Rockford Fosgate® premium sound system, refer to P.54A-41.
CHASSIS ELECTRICAL
54A-39
AUDIO AND NAVIGATION SYSTEM
SPECIFICATIONS
Item
Allowable input power W
Rated input power W
Tweeter
25
3
Front door speaker
35
15
Rear door speaker
35
15
TWEETER
The 3.5 cm balance dome tweeters are incorporated
in the front door sash trim.
DOOR SPEAKER
The 16 cm paper cone speakers are incorporated in
the front door and rear door.
ANTENNA
M2545100100371
At the centre of the roof rear, the roof antenna has
been mounted for receiving radio broadcast.
ROCKFORD FOSGATE PREMIUM
SOUND SYSTEM
GENERAL INFORMATION
M2547000100574
The premium sound system applies "Rockford Fosgate®", American top car audio brand, as same as
current model. All the electronics devices, circuits,
like audio unit and premium amplifier, and sound
structures, such as door speakers and subwoofer
are newly developed. And the sound system is tuned
thoroughly by professional Mitsubishi and Rockford
engineers, the Rockford Fosgate® premium sound
system accomplished higher sound quality than the
current model having high reputation at world wide
markets.
CHASSIS ELECTRICAL
54A-40
AUDIO AND NAVIGATION SYSTEM
CONSTRUCTION DIAGRAM
Audio amplifier
Tweeter
Front door speaker
Rear door speaker
Subwoofer
ACC00014 AB
FUNCTION
Wide stereo technology: PremiDIA-WIDE
Various attractive new sound adjusting functions are
added, to select sound setting precisely, according to
various user preferences.
Emphasize stereo image more expanded, beyond
cabin space.
Surround technology: DTS Neural
Surround
Multi-channel surround enhancement technology
developed by DTS, surround sound from the rear
speakers, even 2-channel music source.
Media expander: PremiDIA-HD
Compensate sound quality of the compressed digital
music source.
Automatic volume control technology:
Dolby Volume
Auto volume level adjusting technology developed by
Dolby, reduce volume changes between different volume level source.
Listening Position selector
Sound quality optimization according to the location
of the listeners.
3 levels speed compensated volume
(SCV)
Select from 3 levels of SCV effect (+OFF) accordingly from driving noise (current model: fixed value,
SCV ON or OFF).
AUDIO AMPLIFIER
M2547000200258
As a separate amplifier, 8-ch audio amplifier incorporating digital signal processor (total maximum output
of 710 W) has been introduced.
CHASSIS ELECTRICAL
54A-41
AUDIO AND NAVIGATION SYSTEM
By using AUREUS® 32 bit digital signal processor
and BURR-BROWN® 24 bit D/A converter, system
has higher accretion of digital sound processing, and
it makes predominantly clear sound.
SPEAKER
M2545000100437
9 speakers [tweeter, front door, rear door (2-way),
subwoofer] are provided.
SPECIFICATIONS
Item
Allowable input power W
Rated input power W
Tweeter
50
25
Front door speaker
80
40
Rear door speaker
80
40
Subwoofer
150/150
75/75
TWEETER
The 3.5 cm soft dome tweeters are incorporated in
the front door sash trim.
By using light weight CCAW (Copper-Clad Aluminium Wire) voice coil and Tetoron® diaphragm, making much clear and comfortable high frequency
sound.
Vacuum moulded 3D shape cone woofer has advantages for lighter weight and higher stiffness. By making horn shaped surrounding of the tweeter, makes
sound connection smoothly from low to high frequency.
DOOR SPEAKER
The 25 cm dual voice coil subwoofer has been
installed to the quarter trim in the luggage room, enabling the playback of dynamic deep bass.
Gain more power than current model although subwoofer unit size is same. Position and direction of it
are decided enthusiastically for excellent sound.
The 16 cm polypropylene cone speakers (woofer)
are incorporated in the front door. The 16 cm + 3.5
cm polypropylene cone 2-way coaxial speakers
(woofer + tweeter) are incorporated in the rear door.
SUBWOOFER
54A-42
CHASSIS ELECTRICAL
IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM <Vehicles without keyless operation system>
DOOR AS A SPEAKER BOX
Resin cover
Resin plug
Front door
speaker
Resin cover
Resin plug
Resin plug
Rear door
speaker
Sheet metal
cover
Urethane integrated
resin sheet
Front door
water proof film
Sheet metal
cover
Urethane integrated
resin sheet
Rear door
water proof film
ACB05473 AB
The openings of doors is blocked by using the sheet
metal cover, resin cover, resin plug and urethane
integrated resin sheet to make the door into a
speaker box, thus improving the sound quality. As an
advantage of the sheet metal cover, the rigidity of the
areas around the speaker has been increased, and
the higher sound pressure, suppression of high harmonic, and suppression of dumping are achieved to
improve sound quality.
IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM <Vehicles without keyless
operation system>
GENERAL INFORMATION
M2544600200251
• The immobilizer system consists of the receiver
antenna, the ETACS-ECU, the steering lock
(immobiliser antenna) and the ignition key.
• The receiver antenna communicates with the
transponder via the steering lock to receive keyless entry signal, and then sends the signal to the
ETACS.
• ID codes (transmitter and transponder) is registered into ETACS-ECU.
CHASSIS ELECTRICAL
IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM <Vehicles without keyless operation system>
• The ETACS-ECU compares the ID code, which it
receives from the receiver antenna, with the one
stored in its memory. If the ID codes correspond,
the ETACS-ECU will permit the keyless operation
and the engine starting.
• The ignition key (transmitter and transponder)
incorporates an indicator lamp that enables the
driver to check if the signal is transmitted correctly or if the battery in the key is discharged.
54A-43
• Each vehicle is provided with two ignition keys as
standard, and up to eight ignition keys can be
registered.
• Settings of the keyless entry function can be
adjusted using a customisation function.
CONSTRUCTION DIAGRAM
Ignition key
Immobilizer
antenna
Receiver
antenna
ETACS-ECU
Engine-ECU
Starter relay
CAN-C
ID
CPU
Ignition
Transponder
CAN
Injection
Steering lock
ACB05551 AB
MAIN COMPONENTS
Component name
Outline of function
Receiver antenna
Receives the operation signals from the lock/unlock switches on the ignition
key (transmitter and transponder), sends them to ETACS-ECU
Sends signal to the transponder in the ignition key and receives the reply data
from the transponder via the steering lock (immobilizer antenna), sends the
reply data to ETACS-ECU.
Communication with transponder is operated by ETACS, Receiver antenna is a
driver module for transponder communication.
Steering lock (immobilizer
antenna)
Wireless communication with ignition key (transponder) receives the ID code
(key ID) of the ignition key (transponder) needed for starting the engine,
transponder communication is conducted via this antenna and receiver
antenna drives this antenna.
Ignition key (transmitter
and transponder)
The ignition key (transponder) receives signals for certification sent from
ETACS-ECU via receiver antenna and immobilizer antenna, and sends the
reply data signal to ETACS-ECU via receiver antenna and immobilizer
antenna.
The ignition key (transmitter) also sends signals to receiver antenna when the
lock/unlock switches on it are operated.
ETACS-ECU
Conduct certification communication with the engine by using the CAN
communications.
Operate the receiver antenna for the transponder communication, and store
the IDs using the immobilizer communication.
Engine-ECU
Communicates with ETACS-ECU via CAN. Permits/inhibits the engine starting
and controls the engine operation.
CHASSIS ELECTRICAL
54A-44
ETACS
System configuration
Ignition key
Lock switch
Unlock switch
Transmitter
Transponder
Door mirror assembly
Radio
frequency
signal
(Transponder)
Steering lock
(immobilizer
antenna)
Radio
frequency
signal (Transmitter)
Room lamp,
Ignition key cylinder
illumination lamp
Door lock actuator
Tailgate latch
assembly
Receiver
antenna
ETACS-ECU
Power window switch
CAN-C
communication
Turn-signal lamp
Engine-ECU
ACC00115 AB
OPERATION
1. When the ignition key is inserted to the ignition
switch or the ignition switch is turned to the ON
position, ETACS-ECU starts operation of receiver
antenna, and starts communication with ignition
key (transponder) by radio frequency.
2. When the ignition key receives the request signal
to start the communication from receiver antenna
via immobilizer antenna, then transponder starts
the communication and send the signal for
communication to receiver antenna via
immobilizer antenna.
3. Receiver antenna sends the codes (key ID, etc)
sent from the ignition key to the ETACS-ECU.
4. ETACS-ECU compares the codes (key ID, etc)
sent from receiver antenna with the
already-registered ID code and self calculated
value, and then reflect the result of transponder
communication to the certification communication
with engine ECU.
NOTE: .
• The transponder integrated in the ignition key
uses the power supplied from receiver antenna
via immobilizer antenna. Therefore, it can be
used regardless of the battery in ignition key (for
transmitter).
• Two ignition keys (transmitter and transponder)
are provided, and up to eight keys can be registered to one vehicle as needed.
• When ETACS-ECU is replaced or when the key
is lost or added, the ID codes for all the keys (key
ID) must be registered using M.U.T.-III.
ETACS
GENERAL INFORMATION
M2545400200722
ETACS*-ECU has three main functions (gateway
function, coding function, body electrical equipment
control function).
CHASSIS ELECTRICAL
ETACS
54A-45
NOTE: *: ETACS (Electronic Time and Alarm Control
System)
GATEWAY FUNCTION
LIN
ETACS-ECU
CAN-C-Mid
CAN-C
ACC00079AB
As a central ECU for the on-vehicle communication
network system established in the vehicle, the gateway function is integrated into ETACS-ECU. The
gateway function offers the following functions:
• Data transfer among three networks*1
Transfers the data flowing in a network to another
network in real time.
NOTE: *1: CAN*2-C (power train network),
CAN*2-C-Mid (middle-speed body network), LIN
*3
(low-speed body network)
NOTE: *2: For details of CAN, refer to GROUP 54C,
Controller Area Network (CAN) .
NOTE: *3: For details of LIN, refer to GROUP 54B,
Local Interconnect Network (LIN) .
• Diagnosis of each network communication line
Detects and stores an open circuit and short circuit of
communication line.
• Communication error diagnosis of network ECUs
Detects and stores the ECU that is not properly
transmitting data.
CODING FUNCTION
By writing the coding data such as vehicle model,
destination, and equipment level to ECUs, the functions of ECUs can be changed. There are two types
of coding method, the local coding and global coding.
BODY ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
CONTROL FUNCTION
This function controls the following electrical equipment.
• Exterior lamps
• Wiper, washer
• Central door locking system
• Interior lamp
• Electric-folding door mirror <vehicles with electric
retractable remote controlled door mirrors>
• Keyless entry, keyless operation system <vehicles with KOS>
• Power supply control
• Immobilizer system <vehicles without electric
retractable remote controlled door mirrors>
• Headlamp automatic levelling system <vehicles
with headlamp automatic levelling system>
FUNCTION AND CONTROL BY ETACS-ECU.
M2545400300547
POWER SUPPLY CONTROL
ACC POWER CUT-OFF FUNCTION <INITIAL CONDITION: 30 MINUTES>
NOTE: Using a customise function, the availability of
ACC power cut-off function and its time to ACC
power cut-off can be set. (Refer to Customise Function P.54A-45).
The function has been added that the ACC power
supply is cut-off when 30 or 60 minutes has elapsed
with the ignition switch in the ACC position.
CUSTOMISATION FUNCTION
M2545400400942
By operating the M.U.T.-III ETACS system, the following functions can be customised. The programmed information is held even when the battery
is disconnected.
CHASSIS ELECTRICAL
54A-46
ETACS
Adjustment
item (M.U.T.-III
display)
Adjustment item
Adjusting content
(M.U.T.-III display)
Adjusting content
Turn power
source
Adjustment of
turn-signal lamp
operation condition
ACC or IG1
Operable with ACC or ON position
IG1
Operable with ON position (initial
condition)
Comfort flasher With/without
comfort flasher
function
Disable
No function
Enable
With function (initial condition)
Hazard answer
back
Lock:1, Unlock:2
LOCK: Flashes once, UNLOCK: Flashes
twice (initial condition)
Lock:1, Unlock:0
LOCK: Flashes once, UNLOCK: No flash
Lock:0, Unlock:2
LOCK: No flash, UNLOCK: Flash twice
Lock:2, Unlock:1
LOCK: Flash twice, UNLOCK: Flash once
Lock:2, Unlock:0
LOCK: Flash twice, UNLOCK: No flash
Lock:0, Unlock:1
LOCK: No flash, UNLOCK: Flash once
Lock:0, Unlock:0
No function
Front wiper
operation
Adjustment of the
number of keyless
hazard warning
lamp answer back
flashes
Adjustment of the
Normal INT
intermittent
windshield wiper
Variable INT
operation <vehicles
without lighting
Speed Sensitive
control sensor>
Intermittent wiper interval is fixed to 4
seconds.
Adjustment of the
Normal INT
intermittent
windshield wiper
Variable INT
operation <vehicles
with lighting control
Speed Sensitive
sensor>
Intermittent wiper interval is fixed to 4
seconds.
Rain Sensitive
Intermittent wiper interval is calculated only
by the wiper volume control.
Intermittent wiper interval is calculated
according to the intermittent wiper volume
control and vehicle speed (initial
condition).
Intermittent wiper interval is calculated only
by the wiper volume control.
Intermittent wiper interval is calculated
according to the intermittent wiper volume
control and vehicle speed.
Intermittent wiper interval is calculated
according to the intermittent wiper volume
control and lighting control sensor (initial
condition).
Front/rear wiper Disabling or
Only Washer
washer
enabling
Washer & Wiper
washer-linked wiper
function
With after wipe
No function
Intermittent time Adjustment of rear
of rear wiper
wiper interval
0 sec.
No wiper interval
4 sec.
4 seconds
8 sec.
8 seconds (initial condition)
16 sec.
16 seconds
With function: Without delayed finishing
wipe function <Initial condition>
With function: With delayed finishing wipe
function
CHASSIS ELECTRICAL
ETACS
Adjustment
item (M.U.T.-III
display)
Adjustment item
Adjusting content
(M.U.T.-III display)
54A-47
Adjusting content
Rear wiper Low Disabling or
Disable
speed mode
enabling rear wiper Enable
continuous
operation
No function
Auto fold mirror Electric folding door
mirror automatic
unfolding function
<vehicles with
electric retractable
remote controlled
door mirrors>
Not Auto
No synchronised operation
Open Vehicle SPD
Vehicle speed-dependent operation
Open/Close by IG
Ignition switch linked operation
OPN/CLS Keyless
Keyless entry linked operation (initial
condition)
Sensitivity for
auto lamp
Level 1 bright
High ambient brightness
Level 2 bright
Standard ambient brightness (initial
condition)
Level 3
Low ambient brightness
Level 4 dark
Low-low ambient brightness
0 sec.
0 second (no delay shutdown time)
7.5 sec.
7.5 seconds
15 sec.
15 seconds (initial condition)
30 sec.
30 seconds
60 sec.
60 seconds
120 sec.
120 seconds
180 sec.
180 seconds
Lighting control
sensor sensitivity
(illumination
intensity) <vehicles
with lighting control
sensor>
Room lamp
Adjustment of
delay timer with interior lamp delay
door
shutdown time
With function (initial condition)
Head lamp auto Adjustment of
Disable
cut customise
headlamp
Enable (B-spec.)
automatic shutdown
function
No function
Interior lamp
auto cut timer
With function (initial condition)
Adjustment of
interior lamp
automatic shutdown
function operation
time
Disable
No function
3 min
3 minutes
30 min
30 minutes (initial condition)
60 min
60 minutes
Comfort flasher Switch operation
switch time
time to activate the
comfort flasher
function
Normal
0.4 second (initial condition)
Long
0.8 second
Intelligent/Comf With/without
ort washer
Comfort washer
function
Disable
No function (Initial condition)
Enable
With function
CHASSIS ELECTRICAL
54A-48
ETACS
Adjustment
item (M.U.T.-III
display)
Adjustment item
Adjusting content
(M.U.T.-III display)
Adjusting content
Auto door
unlock
Adjustment of the
auto door unlock
function
Disable
Without function (initial condition)
Always (P pos)
With function: Operates when the shift
lever or the selector lever is moved to the
P position.
Always(Lock pos)
With function: Operates when the ignition
switch is moved to the LOCK (OFF)
position.
All Doors Unlock
Without function: The first operation of
keyless entry system or unlock operation
by KOS unlocks all doors (initial condition).
Dr Door Unlock
With function: The first operation of
keyless entry system or unlock operation
by KOS unlocks the driver's door only, and
the second unlock operation within 2
seconds after that unlocks all doors.
30 sec.
30 seconds (initial condition)
60 sec.
60 seconds
120 sec.
120 seconds
180 sec.
180 seconds
Door unlock
mode
Adjustment of
power door locks
with selective
unlocking
Timer lock timer Timer lock period
adjustment
Multi mode
Multi-mode keyless Disable
entry function
D/M: O&C
customisation
<Vehicles with
electric retractable
remote controlled
door mirrors>
No function
Door mirror fold/unfold operation only
(initial condition)
Duration of horn Horn sounding time Short
chirp
during horn answer Long
back
0.01 second (initial condition)
Rear
wiper(linked
reverse gear)
Enable(R wip.ON)
Operates only when the rear wiper switch
is ON.
Enable(R/F wip.)
Operates only when the front or rear wiper
switch is ON (initial condition).
KOS key detect With/without KOS
out from window key exterior
detection function
<Vehicles with
KOS>
Enable
No function
Disable
With function (initial condition)
KOS feature
Both enable
All KOS functions are enabled (initial
condition).
Door Entry enable
Only door entry function is enabled.
ENG start enable
Only engine starting function is enabled.
Both disable
All KOS functions are disabled.
Adjustment of
automatic rear
window wiper
operation with
reverse gear
engaged
KOS function
adjustment
<Vehicles with
KOS>
0.02 second
CHASSIS ELECTRICAL
ETACS
Adjustment
item (M.U.T.-III
display)
Adjustment item
Adjusting content
(M.U.T.-III display)
Adjusting content
KOS unlock
disable time
Adjusts the door
unlock inhibition
period after door
lock is activated.
<Vehicles with
KOS>
0 sec.
0 second
3 sec.
3 seconds (Initial condition)
5 sec.
5 seconds
54A-49
Remote ENG
starter answer
back
Remote engine
Disable
starter answer back Enable
function adjustment
No function (Initial condition)
ACC power
auto cut
Time to ACC power Disable
cut-off when the
30 min
ignition switch is in
60 min
the ACC position
No function
Disabling or
enabling coming
home light function
Disable
No function
15 sec.
The headlamps illuminate for 15 seconds.
30 sec.
The headlamps illuminate for 30 seconds.
(initial condition)
60 sec.
The headlamps illuminate for 60 seconds.
180 sec.
The headlamps illuminate for 180 seconds.
Disabling or
enabling welcome
light function
Disable
No function
Small lamp
The tail lamps illuminate. <initial condition>
Head lamp
The headlamps illuminate.
KOS outer buzzer
volume adjustment
<Vehicles with
KOS>
Volume 1
Quieter than the standard
Volume 2
Standard volume (Initial condition)
Volume 3
Louder than the standard
A/C
Recirculation
Control
With/without
inside/outside air
automatic control
function
Disable
No function
Enable
With function (Initial condition)
A/C Switch
Control
With/without A/C
automatic control
function
Disable
No function
Enable
With function (Initial condition)
Coming home
light
Welcome light
Outer buzzer
volume
With function
30 minutes (initial condition)
60 minutes
CHASSIS ELECTRICAL
54A-50
ETACS
Adjustment
item (M.U.T.-III
display)
Adjustment item
Adjusting content
(M.U.T.-III display)
A/C Sensible
temp.
customize
Adjusting mean
-2
value for
temperature setting
Adjusting content
Decreases the control temperature two
degrees than the temperature displayed
on the LCD.
-1
Decreases the control temperature one
degree than the temperature displayed on
the LCD.
0
No change (Initial condition)
1
Increases the control temperature one
degree than the temperature displayed on
the LCD.
2
Increases the control temperature two
degrees than the temperature displayed
on the LCD.
FOOT / DEF Air Changes air
outlet ratio
distribution rate for
DEF/FOOT vents
during manual
operation.
Normal
D/F2 (Initial condition)
FOOT > DEF
D/F1(more to FOOT vent): More air flows
through FOOT vents.
FOOT < DEF
D/F3(more to DEF vent): More air flows
through DEF vents.
FACE / FOOT
Air outlet ratio
Normal
B/L2 (Initial condition)
FACE > FOOT
B/L1(more to FACE vent): More air flows
through FACE vents.
FACE < FOOT
B/L3(more to FOOT vent): More air flows
through FOOT vents.
Changes air
distribution rate for
FACE/FOOT vents
during manual
operation.
Auto Rear
When ambient
Disable
Defogger(Engin temperature is 3
Enable
e Start)
degree or less, the
rear defogger will
be turned on
automatically. (The
rear window
defogger has never
been activated
since the ignition
switch was turned
on last time)
No function (Initial condition)
With function
54B-1
GROUP 54B
LOCAL
INTERCONNECT
NETWORK (LIN)
CONTENTS
GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . .
54B-2
STRUCTURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
54B-2
SYSTEM OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . .
54B-3
54B-2
LOCAL INTERCONNECT NETWORK (LIN)
GENERAL INFORMATION
GENERAL INFORMATION
M2545600100019
LIN refers to "Local Interconnect Network," which is a
serial multiplex communication protocol* administrated by LIN consortium. A communication circuit
employing the LIN protocol connects each ECU, and
switch and sensor data can be shared among ECUs,
which enables more reduction in wiring.
NOTE: *: The regulations that have been decided in
detail, from software matters such as the necessary
transmission rate for communication, the system,
data format, and communication timing control
method to hardware matters such as the harness
type and length and the resistance values.
STRUCTURE
M2545600200395
Master ECU
Slave ECU
ETACS-ECU
Sunroof-ECU
<Vehicles with
sunroof>
LIN bus line
Column switch
(column-ECU)
Lighting control sensor
<Vehicles with
lighting control sensor>
Slave ECU
Slave ECU
AC608956AD
Master and slave ECUs are connected to the LIN
bus lines. The master ECU is the ETACS*-ECU, and
the slave ECUs are the column switch (column-ECU), the sunroof-ECU <vehicles with sunroof>
and the lighting control sensor <vehicles with lighting
control sensor>. The master ECU requests these
slave ECUs to communicate each other via communication lines.
*
NOTE: : ETACS (Electronic Time and Alarm Control
System)
LOCAL INTERCONNECT NETWORK (LIN)
54B-3
SYSTEM OPERATION
SYSTEM OPERATION
M2545600300132
LIN bus line
Master ECU
Slave ECU
Slave task C
Master task
Slave task A
Slave task B
Slave ECU
Slave task D
State of message on LIN bus line
Byte field
1 byte
Logical value:
<Master task>
Response
Slave task D
Header
Response
0
Start bit
Transmits the header
at regular intervals.
Header
1
Header
Slave task A
Response
Slave task C
Data bit
Header
Response
Stop bit
Time
Slave task B
Transmits the response
to suit the header
<Slave task>
AC506324 AE
LIN communication system is described below:
• The master ECU performs the master tasks and
slave tasks, and the slave ECUs perform the
slave tasks.
• When the master ECU performs a master task,
the header frame which stores information to call
certain slave tasks (ECU) is transmitted at regular
intervals.
• When the master ECU and slave ECU perform a
slave task, the ECU called by the header frame
transmits the response frame which stores data
used for control.
• A header and response collectively are called as
a message frame, and the communication
method that uses the message frame is called as
the frame communication.
• Basically, the communication data is used with
some blocks of 10-bit data group which includes
one start bit and one stop bit (byte field) arranged
in order.
LOCAL INTERCONNECT NETWORK (LIN)
54B-4
SYSTEM OPERATION
VOLTAGE VARIATION OF LIN BUS LINE
Battery voltage
Voltage variation
of LIN bus line:
Earth level
Recessive
State:
Dominant
Recessive
1
Logical value:
0
AC309813 AF
When each ECU sends or receives signals, LIN bus
line voltage varies as follows:
• The voltage variation of LIN bus line (0 and 1
combination as a logical value) ranging between
battery voltage (recessive) and 0 V (dominant) is
output (transmitted) as a control signal.
• When no communication is established, the LIN
bus line remains recessive (battery voltage).
MESSAGE FRAME
Message frame
Header
Response
1 (Recessive)
Logical value:
0 (Dominant)
a
b
c
d
a: Synchronisation start region
c: Identifier region
b: Synchronisation region
d: Data region
d
d
e
e: Checksum region
AC506907 AD
A message frame consists of regions that include a
synchronisation start region, identifier region, data
region, and checksum region. A few bits of recessive
data is used to separate the frame from each region.
Frame
Region name
Description
Header
Synchronisation
start region
A region that informs each ECU of the starting of header transmission
by sending dominant signals for a given period of time.
Synchronisation
region
A region that synchronises the transmission cycle of each ECU
connected to the LIN bus line (the slave ECU matches its
communication speed to that of the master ECU).
Identifier region
A region that stores an ID to call the slave ECU defined by the LIN
protocol. The number of bytes for the data region is also defined in this
region.
LOCAL INTERCONNECT NETWORK (LIN)
SYSTEM OPERATION
54B-5
Frame
Region name
Description
Response
Data region
A region to store the control data used by ECU that is called by the
header
Checksum region
A region for checking errors in data content The sending-end ECU
calculates data region value according to the specified computing
equation, and the result is stored in this filed. The receiving-end ECU
detects the transmission error based on the checksum filed value.
54C-1
GROUP 54C
CONTROLLER
AREA NETWORK
(CAN)
CONTENTS
GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . .
54C-2
SELF-DIAGNOSIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
54C-6
STRUCTURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
54C-3
CAN BUS DIAGNOSTICS . . . . . . . . .
54C-7
SYSTEM OPERATION. . . . . . . . . . . .
54C-4
54C-2
CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK (CAN)
GENERAL INFORMATION
GENERAL INFORMATION
M2542000100386
CAN, an abbreviation for Controller Area Network, is
an ISO-certified international standard for a serial
multiplex communication protocol*1. A communication circuit employing the CAN protocol connects
each ECU, and sensor data can be shared among,
which enables more reduction in wiring.
CAN offers the following advantages.
• Transmission rates are much faster than those in
conventional communication (up to 1 Mbps*2),
allowing much more data to be sent.
• It is exceptionally immune to noise, and the data
obtained from each error detection device is more
reliable.
• Each ECU connected via the CAN communicates
independently, therefore if the ECU enters damaged mode, communications can be continued in
some cases.
NOTE: .
• *1: The regulations have been decided in detail,
from software matters such as the necessary
transmission rate for communication, the system,
data format, and communication timing control
method to hardware matters such as the harness
type and length and the resistance values.
• *2: bps=bit per second
CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK (CAN)
54C-3
STRUCTURE
STRUCTURE
M2542000201405
Terminal resistor
Terminal resistor
ETACS-ECU
CAN_L
CAN_L
CAN_H
CAN_H
Steering
wheel
sensor
4WD-ECU
OSS-ECU
SRS-ECU
ABS-ECU
or
ASC-ECU
A/C-ECU
CVT-ECU
EPS-ECU
KOS-ECU
Radio and
CD player
or CAN box
unit
Diagnosis
connector
Main
bus line
M.U.T.-III
Engine-ECU
Electric
tailgate
control unit
Terminal resistor
Corner sensor/
back sensor
-ECU
CAN-C
: Indicates main bus line
CAN-C-Mid
Combination meter
Terminal resistor
: Indicates sub bus line
ACB05902AC
• A gateway function has been integrated to
ETACS-ECU as the network central ECU (Refer
to GROUP 54A − ETACS-ECU ).
• The CAN system consists of the following two
networks: CAN-C (high-speed power train network) and CAN-C-Mid (middle-speed body network). Each ECU is connected to one of the
networks depending on its functions.
• The CAN bus line consists of two lines, CAN_L
and CAN_H (CAN Low and CAN High, respectively), as well as two terminal resistors (A
twisted-pair cable, highly resistant to noise, is
used for the communications line).
• The CAN bus line connecting two dominant
ECUs is the main bus line, and the CAN bus line
connecting each ECU is the sub-bus line.
CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK (CAN)
54C-4
SYSTEM OPERATION
• With CAN bus, the terminal resistors are incorporated in ECU. Resistors with approximately 120
Ω is used for the dominant ECU.
NOTE: .
• Dominant ECU: ETACS-ECU, engine ECU
and Combination meter.
• Non-dominant ECU: ECU and sensor on CAN
network, excluding ETACS-ECU, engine ECU
and Combination meter.
• To the CAN bus line, ECU, sensor, and diagnosis
connector are connected as follows for each network.
CAN-C
• ETACS-ECU
• Steering wheel sensor
• 4WD-ECU <4WD>
• SRS-ECU
• ABS-ECU <vehicles without ASC> or
ASC-ECU <vehicles with ASC>
• CVT-ECU
• EPS-ECU
• Diagnosis connector
• Engine-ECU
CAN-C-Mid
• ETACS-ECU
• OSS-ECU <vehicles with OSS>
• A/C-ECU
• KOS-ECU <vehicles with KOS>
• Radio and CD player <vehicles with radio and
CD player>
• Electric tailgate control unit <vehicles with
electric tailgate>
• CAN box unit <vehicles with MMCS>
• Corner sensor/back sensor-ECU <vehicles
with reversing sensor system>
• Combination meter
SYSTEM OPERATION
M2542000300506
Data frames
A
A
A
A
ECU-1
Interval "a"
B
B
B
ECU-2
Transmission
suspended by
mediation
Interval "b"
C
C
C
ECU-3
Interval "c"
A
B
C
A
Retransmission
B
A
C
B
A
CAN bus
AC206267
AC206267AB
The CAN communication system is described below.
• Each ECU communicating with CAN periodically
sends several sensors’ information on CAN bus
as data frame (called periodical sending data).
For further details, consult the data frame section.
• ECUs requiring data on CAN bus can receive
data frames sent from each ECU simultaneously.
• The data sent from each ECU conducting CAN
communication is transmitted at 0.01 − 1 sec
interval depending on necessity of data.
NOTE: In the figure above, the data frame A is transmitted in "a" intervals, while the data frames B
and C are transmitted at intervals "b" and "c,"
respectively.
• A single ECU transmits multiple data frames.
CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK (CAN)
54C-5
SYSTEM OPERATION
• When data frames conflict with one another
(when plural ECUs transmit signals simultaneously), data is prioritised for transmission by
mediation, therefore, plural data frames are not
sent simultaneously. For further details, consult
the mediation section.
• Data is transmitted not by the conventional voltage-using method but by voltage potential difference. For further details, consult the section on
CAN bus voltage transformation .
• Reliability of each ECU transmitting signals via
CAN communication is secured by several error
detection and recovery processes. For further
details, consult the sections on error detection
and system recovery.
• For major communication signals (transmitting
signals) among ECUs.
MEDIATION
Because each ECU transmits data independently on
the CAN bus, there are cases of data collision when
multiple data frames that ECUs attempt to transmit
simultaneously (if multiple ECUs transmit at nearly
the same moment). At this moment, processing of
the ECUs attempting transmission is performed in
the following way.
1. Data frame with high priority is transmitted first
according to ID codes memorized in data frames.
2. Transmission of low-priority data (data frames) is
suspended by the issuing ECUs until the bus
clears (when no transmission data exists on the
CAN bus).
NOTE: If the suspended state continues for a specific time, new data (data frame content) is created and sent.
3. ECU containing suspended data frames transmits the data when the bus becomes available.
NOTE: There is enough capacity on the CAN bus,
which never prevents data frames from being sent.
VOLTAGE TRANSFORMATION ON THE CAN BUS
Voltage
transformation
in CAN_H
3.5 V
2.5 V
Voltage
transformation
in CAN_L
State:
1.5 V
Recessive
Dominant
Recessive
0
Logical value:
1
AC204753AE
Data frame transmission through the CAN bus line
involves voltage transformation (for output signals) in
the distinctive CAN profile as follows. The ECU
transmitting through the CAN_H and CAN_L bus
lines sends 2.5 − 3.5 V signals to the CAN_H side
and 2.5 − 1.5 V signals to the CAN_L side. The
receiving ECU reads the data from the CAN_H and
CAN_L potential difference. "Recessive" refers to the
state where both CAN_H and CAN_L are under the
2.5 V state, and "Dominant" refers to the state where
CAN_H is under the 3.5 V state and CAN_L is under
the 1.5 V state. By transformation mainly to 2.5 V,
even in cases when voltage is rendered 0 from faulty
earthing or the like (causing a problem of an approximate 0.5 voltage increase on the communications
line), communication can be continued uninterrupted. Employing dual communications lines
improves reliability to prevent the presence of noise,
compared to the conventional communication
method.
CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK (CAN)
54C-6
SELF-DIAGNOSIS
DATA FRAMES
Data Frames
SOF
ID region
Control
Data region
CRC region
region
ACK
EOF
region
AC404606AB
The data frame, which is sent from each ECU (or
sensor) to the CAN bus line, consists of the fields
bellow.
ACK (Acknowledge) region
• Region where to conform the reception of sent
data
SOF (Start of Frame)
• Indicates the start of the frame
EOF (End of Frame)
• Indicates the end of the frame
ID (Identifier) region
• Identifies the data content while specifying priority rank in case of mediation
ERROR DETECTION AND RECOVERY
Control region
• Specifies the frame type, data length, etc.
Data region
• Values used for data control, etc.
CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Check) region
• Region where to check for errors in sent data.
The transmitting ECU calculates data regions by
applying prescribed operations and stores the
results. The receiving ECU detects erroneous
communication by comparing the CRC region
with the data region.
CAN protocol secures its reliability of communication
by providing several error detection function such as
CRC shown in data frame, and the recovery function
(recovery is performed by resending, from abnormal
state such as transmission errors). If an error is
detected but it is not resolved even after recovery,
communication is stopped. This state is called "Bus
Off."
SELF-DIAGNOSIS
M2542000400428
• CAN self-diagnosis is performed by each ECU
connected to the CAN bus.
• Diagnosis codes related to communication are
named with the capital letter U, and are called
"U-codes."
• A summary of the CAN self-diagnosis system is
presented below.
TIME-OUT
Each ECU transmits data frames periodically. If the
data frame is not received within the specified period,
the intended receiving ECU transmits a diagnosis
code indicating communication time-out for the ECU
that failed to transmit.
FAILURE DATA
When the transmitting ECU detects failure of a sensor directly connected to it, this is the pertinent data
used to inform the ECU.
CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK (CAN)
CAN BUS DIAGNOSTICS
54C-7
CAN BUS DIAGNOSTICS
M2542000500339
As ECUs are connected via CAN bus (including
M.U.T.-III), always diagnose CAN bus to confirm its
normality when inspecting. When the CAN bus diagnosis is carried out, the M.U.T.-III will monitor the
mutual communication status of the ECUs and then
display a current status of the CAN bus on its screen.
55-1
GROUP 55
HEATER, AIR
CONDITIONER AND
VENTILATION
CONTENTS
GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . .
55-2
CUSTOMIZATION FUNCTION . . . . . .
55-12
HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM
.................................
55-7
A/C COMPRESSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
55-14
CONDENSER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
55-15
DUCT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
55-15
VENTILATION SYSTEM. . . . . . . . . . .
55-16
HEATER CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . .
55-10
AIR CONDITIONER CONTROL SYSTEM
.................................
55-11
HEATER, AIR CONDITIONER AND VENTILATION
55-2
GENERAL INFORMATION
GENERAL INFORMATION
M2551000101826
The new heater unit integrates blower, and evaporator, it increases the air flow but reduces air flow
resistance and air flow noise.
FEATURES
ENHANCEMENTS IN COMFORT
• With the adoption of automatic A/C system, the
inlets (fresh air/recirculation air), the vents, temperature at the vents and fan speed are automatically the controlled according to the outside
temperature and cabin temperature so that the
optimum air conditioner is achieved.
• By the adoption of clean air filter, the air quality in
the cabin has been kept.
• Improves the cooling performance by optimal
refrigerant line routing and prevents potential
refrigerant leaks by reducing refrigerant line connections.
• Independent air conditioner control function
allows individual temperature adjustment at the
right and left depending on which the customer
prefers.<Vehicles with DUAL-ZONE AUTO A/C>
ENHANCEMENTS IN OPERATION
PERFORMANCE
• To enhance luxurious appearance and convenience, a liquid crystal display panel has been
adopted.
• Customize function has been added for the
enhanced convenience.
ENHANCEMENTS IN FUEL ECONOMY
• The 3D-profile high efficiency compressor has
been installed, thus improving the fuel economy.
• The idle-up speed is controlled in two steps to
secure the air cooling performance during summer and to enhance the fuel economy in the
moderate seasons.
• The cooling fan control depending on the refrigerant pressure and on the vehicle speed reduce
alternator load, thus enhancing the fuel economy.
ENHANCEMENT IN SAFETY
• A/C system will shut down automatically if the air
bags are open.
• Crushable space has been adopted into heater
unit to reduce the risk of passenger injuries if a
collision occurred.
GLOBAL ENVIRONMENT PROTECTION
• Refrigerant system (HFC134a) has been
adopted.
• Clean air filter media and its cover are separated
to reduce waste materials, when replacing the filter.
ENHANCEMENTS IN SERVICE QUALITY
• Reduction of refrigerant gas leakage and
enhancement in serviceability by incorporating
condenser and receiver
• Clean air filter is installed to the backside of glove
box to facilitate the filter replacement.
ENHANCEMENTS IN RESPONSIBILITY
Reliable information transmission is achieved by
connecting A/C-ECU and each ECU via CAN communication.
SPECIFICATIONS
Item
Specification
Air conditioner switch type
LCD push button
Compressor type
QS90
Cooling output kW
5.5
Heating output kW
5.7
Refrigerant
Type
HFC-134a
Charge quantity g
480 - 520
HEATER, AIR CONDITIONER AND VENTILATION
55-3
GENERAL INFORMATION
CONSTRUCTION DIAGRAM
A/C pressure sensor
Ambient temperature sensor
ACB03811AD
ACB03813AC
Interior temperature sensor
ACB05399AB
HEATER, AIR CONDITIONER AND VENTILATION
55-4
GENERAL INFORMATION
A/C compressor
suction hose
High-pressure
side valve
Low-pressure
side valve
Heater unit
A/C compressor
discharge hose
Condenser
A/C compressor
assembly
A/C condenser
outlet pipe
ACB05002AB
HEATER, AIR CONDITIONER AND VENTILATION
GENERAL INFORMATION
55-5
Heater controller assembly
(A/C-ECU)
ACB05540 AB
HEATER, AIR CONDITIONER AND VENTILATION
55-6
GENERAL INFORMATION
COMMUNICATION
ETACS-ECU
·Ambient temperature sensor
·Engine water temperature sensor
·A/C out put
·Rear defogger
·Status of ignition key
·A/C compressor
·Cooling fan
·Idle-Up
·Rear defogger relay
CAN-C-Mid
CAN-C
+B (12V)
(ETACS)
CVT
Fin thermo sensor
IG (12V)
(ETACS)
A/C pressure sensor
Interior temperature sensor
Outside/Inside air selection
damper control motor
Heater
controller
assembly
(A/C-ECU)
Audio
Air mixing damper
control motor*
Mode selection damper
control motor
ABS
ILL+, ILL(Meter)
Power transistor
ILO+, ILO(switches)
Display
Blower motor
NOTE
: Interactive communication
*: On vehicles with dual- zone auto A/C, two air mixing
damper control motors are fitted. On vehicles single- zone
A/C, one air mixing damper control motor is fitted.
Combination meter
-ECU
Diagnostic
connector
Engine-ECU
ACC00036AB
HEATER, AIR CONDITIONER AND VENTILATION
55-7
HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM
HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM
M2551001000896
Front defroster
Side defroster
Side defroster
Side
outlet
Centre
outlet
Recirculation
Fresh
Side
outlet
Heater core
Clean air filter
Heater outlet
for 2nd seat
Evaporator
Blower motor
Heater outlet
for front seat
AC612039AO
Mode selection damper control motor
Heater unit
Outside/Inside air selection
damper control motor
Air mixing damper
2
control motor (LH)*
Air intake duct
Power transistor
Fin thermo sensor
Blower case
Air mixing damper
control motor*1
Air mixing damper
2
control motor (RH)*
Blower motor
NOTE:
*1: <SINGLE-ZONE AUTO A/C>
*2: <DUAL-ZONE AUTO A/C>
ACB05541AB
HEATER, AIR CONDITIONER AND VENTILATION
55-8
HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM
<SINGLE-ZONE AUTO A/C>
Heater unit
Evaporator
Mode selection damper
Air intake duct
Air mixing damper
Outside / inside air
selection damper
Heater core
Clean air filter
Blower case
ACB05542 AB
<DUAL- ZONE AUTO A/C>
Heater unit
Evaporator
Mode selection damper
Air intake duct
Air mixing damper (LH)
Outside / inside air
selection damper
Heater core
Air mixing damper (RH)
Blower case
Clean air filter
ACC00509AB
HEATER, AIR CONDITIONER AND VENTILATION
HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM
Crushable space
Crushable space
Front side
Evaporator
Drain port
Heater core
AC506491AB
The following front heater unit has been adopted.
• A case of thinner panel thickness, a narrower
evaporator and condenser, a smaller expansion
valve, a lighter power transistor are used to save
weight.
• Higher density in the core enhances the cooling
performance. Internal temperature in the evaporator are equalised due to an optimum multi-flow
structure and refrigerant circuit, thus improving
comfort.
• Openings on the dash panel are sealed securely
by adding a cover, etc. to the expansion valve.
Insulation pads are adhered to the HVAC case
and the duct, thus improving sound absorption
and insulation against external noise.
• A heater/cooling assembly unit is adopted for
greater fan power and reduced noise.
55-9
• The evaporator and heater core has been longitudinally installed in the vehicle length, and a
crushable space has been ensured so that it
absorbs the impact in case of a collision and
reduces the risk of passenger injuries.
• Inside air recirculation is controlled by driving the
inside/outside damper, thus improving the heating performance in winter.
• The air temperature of the defroster outlets has
been set lower than at the foot outlets to prevent
the red glow on face in winter. In order to avoid
too cool temperature around the torso, the air distribution at the side face and foot outlets is optimised.
• Clean air filter has been introduced as standard
to prevent the intrusion of foreign materials
including pollen, dust and cigarette smoke to
improve the air quality inside the passenger compartment.
• The installation position of clean air filter has
been set to the backside of glove box to facilitate
the filter replacement operation. At the same
time, the one-touch tab structure has been
adopted for the cover installation to enable the
replacement operation without tools.
• The air mixing damper control motors and the air
mixing dampers are installed as shown. The air
mixing dampers can be operated independently
to allow passengers to set temperature each for
the driver and the front passenger. <Vehicles with
DUAL-ZONE AUTO A/C>
HEATER, AIR CONDITIONER AND VENTILATION
55-10
HEATER CONTROL
HEATER CONTROL
M2551000900904
WITHOUT DUAL A/C
Temperature set switch
Outside/inside air
changeover switch
Air outlet
changeover switch
A/C switch
AUTO switch
OFF switch
Rear defogger switch
Fan mode
changeover switch
Defogger switch
ACB05984AB
LCD panel
<WITHOUT DUAL A/C>
Set temperature
display
Inside/outside
air display
Illuminates at
A/C ON mode
Illuminates while
the blower motor is on
Air volume
display
Air outlet display
ACB05986AB
HEATER, AIR CONDITIONER AND VENTILATION
55-11
AIR CONDITIONER CONTROL SYSTEM
DUAL A/C
Temperature set switch (LH)
A/C switch
Outside/inside air
changeover switch
AUTO switch
Fan mode
changeover switch
Air outlet
changeover switch
OFF switch
Rear defogger switch
Temperature set switch (RH)
Defogger switch
ACB05404AC
LCD panel <DUAL A/C>
Set temperature
display (driver's side)
Illuminates
at DUAL mode
Illuminates at
A/C ON mode
Air volume
display
Illuminates while
the blower motor is on
The following heater controller has been adopted.
• To enhance luxurious appearance and convenience, a liquid crystal display panel has been
adopted.
• A white character LCD is adopted in order to provide a better visibility.
Inside/outside
air display
Set temperature display
(front passenger's side)
Air outlet display
ACB05985 AB
• Ergonomic layout of the control panel allows the
driver to check the current status without less eye
movement.
• The smoke-shaded LCD screen provides a luxury
image.
AIR CONDITIONER CONTROL SYSTEM
M2551002800033
General
The air conditioner system with following features
has been adopted.
• If the heater fan runs at higher stage, the recirculation ratio of heated air will be increased, thus
improving heating performance.
• The heating performance is enhanced by
increasing air volume.
• The heating performance is enhanced by restricting minimum air volume at low ambient temperature (-5°C or less).
• The interior temperature sensor can measure
temperature more precisely due to better sealing
around it. This improves the response and comfort of the automatic air conditioner.
HEATER, AIR CONDITIONER AND VENTILATION
55-12
CUSTOMIZATION FUNCTION
CONTROL
FORCED DEF CONTROL
IDLE-UP CONTROL
When air outlet position is switched to DEF, A/C is
automatically turned ON, and outside/inside air
selection damper is set to the fresh air position to
quickly defrost the windshield screen.
MAX COOL, MAX HOT CONTROL
When the set temperature is at MAX COOL (15°C) or
at MAX HOT (29°C) with the air outlet and air volume
at the AUTO positions, the following controls are
made automatically by the A/C-ECU.
Subject to
control
MAX COOL
MAX HOT
Air mix
damper
MAX COOL
position
MAX HOT
position
Air outlet
mode
FACE position
FOOT position
Air volume
Maximum
Maximum
Outside/insid Air recirculation
e air
position*
selection
damper
Fresh air
position*
Air
conditioner
switch
OFF*
ON*
A/C-ECU and the engine-ECU communicate with
each other through the CAN communication. The
idle-up speed of the engine is controlled in two steps
depending on the A/C load to secure the air cooling
performance during summer and to enhance fuel
economy in seasons with moderate temperature.
DETECTION CONTROL FOR
REFRIGERANT LEAKS
A/C-ECU determines if the refrigerant amount is less
than specified or refrigerant pressure is abnormal by
using the ambient temperature (ambient temperature
sensor to measure refrigerant inflation rate) and
refrigerant pressure (measured by the A/C pressure
sensor). When refrigerant amount or refrigerant pressure is judged abnormal, the compressor is cut-off to
protect the A/C system.
PROTECTION CONTROL AT AIR BAG
DEPLOYMENT (DURING COLLISION)
When the air bag deployment is detected, the A/C
system is stopped.
COMMUNICATION
NOTE: "*" indicates that when the automatic control
is not cancelled using the customise function, the
manual operation is disabled.
A/C-ECU performs the signal transmission and
reception with each ECU via CAN (Controller Area
Network)*.
NOTE: *: For details of CAN communication, refer to
GROUP 54C − Controller Area Network .
DIAGNOSTIC FUNCTION
A/C-ECU has the following functions for easier system checks.
• DIAGNOSTIC FUNCTION
• Service data output
• Actuator test
NOTE: For each item, refer to the Workshop Manual.
CUSTOMIZATION FUNCTION
M2551003000018
By operating the M.U.T.-III ETACS system, the following functions can be customised. The programmed information is held even when the battery
is disconnected.
HEATER, AIR CONDITIONER AND VENTILATION
CUSTOMIZATION FUNCTION
Adjustment
item (M.U.T.-III
display)
Adjustment item
Adjusting content
(M.U.T.-III display)
Adjusting content
A/C
Recirculation
Control
With/without
inside/outside air
automatic control
function
Disable
No function
Enable
With function (Initial condition)
A/C Switch
Control
With/without A/C
automatic control
function
Disable
No function
Enable
With function (Initial condition)
A/C Sensible
temp.
customize
Adjusting mean
-2
value for
temperature setting
55-13
Decreases the control temperature two
degrees than the temperature displayed
on the LCD.
-1
Decreases the control temperature one
degree than the temperature displayed on
the LCD.
0
No change (Initial condition)
1
Increases the control temperature one
degree than the temperature displayed on
the LCD.
2
Increases the control temperature two
degrees than the temperature displayed
on the LCD.
FOOT / DEF Air Changes air
outlet ratio
distribution rate for
DEF/FOOT vents
during manual
operation.
Normal
D/F2 (Initial condition)
FOOT > DEF
D/F1(more to FOOT vent): More air flows
through FOOT vents.
FOOT < DEF
D/F3(more to DEF vent): More air flows
through DEF vents.
FACE / FOOT
Air outlet ratio
Normal
B/L2 (Initial condition)
FACE > FOOT
B/L1(more to FACE vent): More air flows
through FACE vents.
FACE < FOOT
B/L3(more to FOOT vent): More air flows
through FOOT vents.
Changes air
distribution rate for
FACE/FOOT vents
during manual
operation.
Auto Rear
When ambient
Disable
Defogger(Engin temperature is 3
Enable
e Start)
degree or less, the
rear defogger will
be turned on
automatically. (The
rear window
defogger has never
been activated
since the ignition
switch was turned
on last time)
No function (Initial condition)
With function
55-14
HEATER, AIR CONDITIONER AND VENTILATION
A/C COMPRESSOR
A/C COMPRESSOR
M2551001100837
HIGH EFFICIENCY COMPRESSOR WITH
INTEGRATED OIL SEPARATOR
MAGNETIC CLUTCH WITH THERMAL
FUSE
High efficiency compressor with integrated oil separator has been adopted to enhance fuel economy by
reducing the A/C operating rate.
At the compressor lock, the thermal fuse integrated
in the magnet clutch is blown due to the frictional
heat against the compressor in order to reduce risk
of the drive belt breakage. The thermal fuse, together
with the coil, is coated with resin to enhance resistance to corrosion.
3D-PROFILE COMPRESSOR
Refrigerant temperature switch
Discharge valve
(internal relief valve)
AC708240 AC
• The 3D profile improves durability and efficiency,
and shortens the total length.
• An internal relief valve allows compressed refrigerant to escape into the outlet side, thus improving the reliability of the compressor.
• The refrigerant temperature switch can measure
temperature without any openings on the case.
This reduces the risk of refrigerant leaks.
HEATER, AIR CONDITIONER AND VENTILATION
55-15
CONDENSER
CONDENSER
M2551001400333
The air conditioner compressor with following features has been adopted..
• A sub-cool type is adopted in order to enhance
performance.
• A narrower high-efficiency core and plastic brackets are adopted in order to save weight.
• A condenser is assembled into the radiator as
one module, thus simplifying the structure.
Condenser
Radiator
ACB05982 AB
DUCT
M2551001300842
To windshield (Defroster)
To front door window
(Side defroster)
Side ventilator
Centre ventilator
To front door window
(Side defroster)
Side ventilator
To driver seat footwell
To passenger seat footwell
To rear seat footwell
To rear seat footwell
The following air outlet system has been adopted to
improve comfort.
• The FACE vents at the driver's side is located so
that air is directed to the driver's face rather than
hands. This improves comfort.
ACB05540 AC
• A rear heater duct is fitted in order to improve
comfort.
55-16
HEATER, AIR CONDITIONER AND VENTILATION
VENTILATION SYSTEM
VENTILATION SYSTEM
M2551002001096
Rear ventilation duct
ACB05000AB
Fresh air is sucked from the front deck and
exhausted through the air outlet behind the rear
bumper. Optimising areas of the outside air induction
hole and the air outlet enhances ventilated air
amount, reducing noise.
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement